The "partitions_total" and "partitions_done" fields were updated
as though the current level of partitioning was the only one.
In multi-level cases, not only could partitions_total change
over the course of the command, but partitions_done could go
backwards or exceed the currently-reported partitions_total.
Fix by setting partitions_total to the total number of direct
and indirect children once at command start, and then just
incrementing partitions_done at appropriate points. Invent
a new progress monitoring function "pgstat_progress_incr_param"
to simplify doing the latter. We can avoid adding cost for the
former when doing CREATE INDEX, because ProcessUtility already
enumerates the children and it's pretty easy to pass the count
down to DefineIndex. In principle the same could be done in
ALTER TABLE, but that's structurally difficult; for now, just
eat the cost of an extra find_all_inheritors scan in that case.
Ilya Gladyshev and Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a15f904a70924ffa4ca25c3c744cff31e0e6e143.camel@gmail.com
This provides a very simple way to see the generic plan for a
parameterized query. Without this, it's necessary to define
a prepared statement and temporarily change plan_cache_mode,
which is a bit tedious.
One thing that's a bit of a hack perhaps is that we disable
execution-time partition pruning when the GENERIC_PLAN option
is given. That's because the pruning code may attempt to
fetch the value of one of the parameters, which would fail.
Laurenz Albe, reviewed by Julien Rouhaud, Christoph Berg,
Michel Pelletier, Jim Jones, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0a29b954b10b57f0d135fe12aa0909bd41883eb0.camel@cybertec.at
The sslcertmode option controls whether the server is allowed and/or
required to request a certificate from the client. There are three
modes:
- "allow" is the default and follows the current behavior, where a
configured client certificate is sent if the server requests one
(via one of its default locations or sslcert). With the current
implementation, will happen whenever TLS is negotiated.
- "disable" causes the client to refuse to send a client certificate
even if sslcert is configured or if a client certificate is available in
one of its default locations.
- "require" causes the client to fail if a client certificate is never
sent and the server opens a connection anyway. This doesn't add any
additional security, since there is no guarantee that the server is
validating the certificate correctly, but it may helpful to troubleshoot
more complicated TLS setups.
sslcertmode=require requires SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb(), available since
OpenSSL 1.0.2. Note that LibreSSL does not include it.
Using a connection parameter different than require_auth has come up as
the simplest design because certificate authentication does not rely
directly on any of the AUTH_REQ_* codes, and one may want to require a
certificate to be sent in combination of a given authentication method,
like SCRAM-SHA-256.
TAP tests are added in src/test/ssl/, some of them relying on sslinfo to
check if a certificate has been set. These are compatible across all
the versions of OpenSSL supported on HEAD (currently down to 1.0.1).
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Peter Eisentraut, David G. Johnston,
Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9e5a8ccddb8355ea9fa4b75a1e3a9edc88a70cd3.camel@vmware.com
This commit renames the members of a few pgstat structures related to
functions and relations, by respectively removing their prefix "f_" and
"t_". The statistics for functions and relations and handled in their
own file, and pgstatfuncs.c associates each field in a structure
variable named based on the object type handled, so no information is
lost with this rename.
This will help with some of the refactoring aimed for pgstatfuncs.c, as
this makes more consistent the field names with the SQL functions
retrieving them.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9142f62a-a422-145c-bde0-b5bc498a4ada@gmail.com
Add pgstat counter to track row updates that result in the successor
version going to a new heap page, leaving behind an original version
whose t_ctid points to the new version. The current count is shown by
the n_tup_newpage_upd column of each of the pg_stat_*_tables views.
The new n_tup_newpage_upd column complements the existing n_tup_hot_upd
and n_tup_upd columns. Tables that have high n_tup_newpage_upd values
(relative to n_tup_upd) are good candidates for tuning heap fillfactor.
Corey Huinker, with small tweaks by me.
Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=ded21M9iZ36hHm-vj2rE2d=zcKpUQMds__Xm2pxLfHKA@mail.gmail.com
* Commit 3048898e dropped -ING from PHJ wait event names. Update the
corresponding barrier phases names to match.
* Rename the "DONE" phases to "FREE". That's symmetrical with
"ALLOCATE", and names the activity that actually happens in that phase
(as we do for the other phases) rather than a state. The bug fixed by
commit 8d578b9b might have been more obvious with this name.
* Rename the batch/bucket growth barriers' "ALLOCATE" phases to
"REALLOCATE", a better description of what they do.
* Update the high level comments about phases to highlight phases
are executed by a single process with an asterisk (mostly memory
management phases).
No behavior change, as this is just improving internal identifiers. The
only user-visible sign of this is that a couple of wait events' display
names change from "...Allocate" to "...Reallocate" in pg_stat_activity,
to stay in sync with the internal names.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BMDpwF2Eo2LAvzd%3DpOh81wUTsrwU1uAwR-v6OGBB6%2B7g%40mail.gmail.com
Currently, in read committed transaction isolation mode (default), we have the
following sequence of actions when tuple_update()/tuple_delete() finds
the tuple updated by concurrent transaction.
1. Attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(), which
returns TM_Updated.
2. Lock tuple with tuple_lock().
3. Re-evaluate plan qual (recheck if we still need to update/delete and
calculate the new tuple for update).
4. Second attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete().
This attempt should be successful, since the tuple was previously locked.
This patch eliminates step 2 by taking the lock during first
tuple_update()/tuple_delete() call. Heap table access method saves some
efforts by checking the updated tuple once instead of twice. Future
undo-based table access methods, which will start from the latest row version,
can immediately place a lock there.
The code in nodeModifyTable.c is simplified by removing the nested switch/case.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdua-YFw3XTprfutzGp28xXLigFtzNbuFY8yPhqeq6X5kg%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Pavel Borisov, Vignesh C, Mason Sharp
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Chris Travers
These are set after a \! command or a backtick substitution.
SHELL_ERROR is just "true" for error (nonzero exit status) or "false"
for success, while SHELL_EXIT_CODE records the actual exit status
following standard shell/system(3) conventions.
Corey Huinker, reviewed by Maxim Orlov and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=cWao2x2f+UDw15W1JkVFr_bsxfstw=NGea7r9m4j-7rQ@mail.gmail.com
With unlucky timing and parallel_leader_participation=off (not the
default), PHJ could attempt to access per-batch shared state just as it
was being freed. There was code intended to prevent that by checking
for a cleared pointer, but it was racy. Fix, by introducing an extra
barrier phase. The new phase PHJ_BUILD_RUNNING means that it's safe to
access the per-batch state to find a batch to help with, and
PHJ_BUILD_DONE means that it is too late. The last to detach will free
the array of per-batch state as before, but now it will also atomically
advance the phase, so that late attachers can avoid the hazard. This
mirrors the way per-batch hash tables are freed (see phases
PHJ_BATCH_PROBING and PHJ_BATCH_DONE).
An earlier attempt to fix this (commit 3b8981b6, later reverted) missed
one special case. When the inner side is empty (the "empty inner
optimization), the build barrier would only make it to
PHJ_BUILD_HASHING_INNER phase before workers attempted to detach from
the hashtable. In that case, fast-forward the build barrier to
PHJ_BUILD_RUNNING before proceeding, so that our later assertions hold
and we can still negotiate who is cleaning up.
Revealed by build farm failures, where BarrierAttach() failed a sanity
check assertion, because the memory had been clobbered by dsa_free().
In non-assert builds, the result could be a segmentation fault.
Back-patch to all supported releases.
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reported-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reported-by: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Tested-by: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200929061142.GA29096%40paquier.xyz
When determining whether an index update may be skipped by using HOT, we
can ignore attributes indexed by block summarizing indexes without
references to individual tuples that need to be cleaned up.
A new type TU_UpdateIndexes provides a signal to the executor to
determine which indexes to update - no indexes, all indexes, or only the
summarizing indexes.
This also removes rd_indexattr list, and replaces it with rd_attrsvalid
flag. The list was not used anywhere, and a simple flag is sufficient.
This was originally committed as 5753d4ee32, but then got reverted by
e3fcca0d0d because of correctness issues.
Original patch by Josef Simanek, various fixes and improvements by Tomas
Vondra and me.
Authors: Matthias van de Meent, Josef Simanek, Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/05ebcb44-f383-86e3-4f31-0a97a55634cf@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFp7QwpMRGcDAQumN7onN9HjrJ3u4X3ZRXdGFT0K5G2JWvnbWg%40mail.gmail.com
Add versions of timestamptz + interval, timestamptz - interval, and
generate_series(timestamptz, ...) in which a timezone can be specified
explicitly instead of defaulting to the TimeZone GUC setting.
The new functions for the first two are named date_add and
date_subtract. This might seem too generic, but we could use
overloading to add additional variants if that seems useful.
Along the way, improve the docs' pretty inadequate explanation
of how timestamptz +- interval works.
Przemysław Sztoch and Gurjeet Singh; cosmetic changes and most of
the docs work by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/01a84551-48dd-1359-bf7e-f6b0203a6bd0@sztoch.pl
We already had five copies of essentially the same logic, and an
upcoming patch introduces yet another use-case. That's past my
threshold of pain, so introduce a common subroutine. There's not
that much net code savings, but the chance of typos should go down.
Inspired by a patch from Przemysław Sztoch, but different in detail.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/01a84551-48dd-1359-bf7e-f6b0203a6bd0@sztoch.pl
Check whether the datctype is C to determine whether t_isspace() and
related functions use isspace() or iswspace().
Previously, t_isspace() checked whether the database default collation
was C; which is incorrect when the default collation uses the ICU
provider.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/79e4354d9eccfdb00483146a6b9f6295202e7890.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Backpatch-through: 15
Currently, there are quite a few places in reorderbuffer.c that tries to
access top-transaction for a subtransaction. This makes the code to access
top-transaction consistent and easier to follow.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Sawada Masahiko
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PuCznOyTqBQwjRUu-ibG-=KHyCv-0FTcWQtZUdR88umfg@mail.gmail.com
Support for SCM credential authentication has been removed in the
backend in 9.1, and libpq has kept some code to handle it for
compatibility.
Commit be4585b, that did the cleanup of the backend code, has done
so because the code was not really portable originally. And, as there
are likely little chances that this is used these days, this removes the
remaining code from libpq. An error will now be raised by libpq if
attempting to connect to a server that returns AUTH_REQ_SCM_CREDS,
instead.
References to SCM credential authentication are removed from the
protocol documentation. This removes some meson and configure checks.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZBLH8a4otfqgd6Kn@paquier.xyz
This structure included only PgStat_FunctionCounts, and removing it
facilitates some upcoming refactoring for pgstatfuncs.c to use more
macros rather that mostly-duplicated functions.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/11d531fe-52fc-c6ea-7e8e-62f1b6ec626e@gmail.com
This adds the ability to pretty-print XML documents ... according to
libxml's somewhat idiosyncratic notions of what's pretty, anyway.
One notable divergence from a strict reading of the spec is that
libxml is willing to collapse empty nodes "<node></node>" to just
"<node/>", whereas SQL and the underlying XML spec say that this
option should only result in whitespace tweaks. Nonetheless,
it seems close enough to justify using the SQL-standard syntax.
Jim Jones, reviewed by Peter Smith and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2f5df461-dad8-6d7d-4568-08e10608a69b@uni-muenster.de
The hook can be installed by a shared_preload library.
A similar mechanism could be used for radius paswords, for example, and
the type name auth_password_hook_typ has been shosen with that in mind.
John Naylor and Andrew Dunstan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/469b06ed-69de-ba59-c13a-91d2372e52a9@dunslane.net
Using REPLICA IDENTITY FULL on the publisher can lead to a full table scan
per tuple change on the subscription when REPLICA IDENTITY or PK index is
not available. This makes REPLICA IDENTITY FULL impractical to use apart
from some small number of use cases.
This patch allows using indexes other than PRIMARY KEY or REPLICA
IDENTITY on the subscriber during apply of update/delete. The index that
can be used must be a btree index, not a partial index, and it must have
at least one column reference (i.e. cannot consist of only expressions).
We can uplift these restrictions in the future. There is no smart
mechanism to pick the index. If there is more than one index that
satisfies these requirements, we just pick the first one. We discussed
using some of the optimizer's low-level APIs for this but ruled it out
as that can be a maintenance burden in the long run.
This patch improves the performance in the vast majority of cases and the
improvement is proportional to the amount of data in the table. However,
there could be some regression in a small number of cases where the indexes
have a lot of duplicate and dead rows. It was discussed that those are
mostly impractical cases but we can provide a table or subscription level
option to disable this feature if required.
Author: Onder Kalaci, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Shi yu, Hou Zhijie, Vignesh C, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACawEhVLqmAAyPXdHEPv1ssU2c=dqOniiGz7G73HfyS7+nGV4w@mail.gmail.com
Expose the standard error functions as SQL-callable functions. These
are expected to be useful to people working with normal distributions,
and we use them here to test the distribution from random_normal().
Since these functions are defined in the POSIX and C99 standards, they
should in theory be available on all supported platforms. If that
turns out not to be the case, more work will be needed.
On all platforms tested so far, using extra_float_digits = -1 in the
regression tests is sufficient to allow for variations between
implementations. However, past experience has shown that there are
almost certainly going to be additional unexpected portability issues,
so these tests may well need further adjustments, based on the
buildfarm results.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Nathan Bossart and Thomas Munro.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCXv5fi7+Vu-POiyai+ucF95+YMcCMafxV+eZuN1B-=MkQ@mail.gmail.com
The new connection parameter require_auth allows a libpq client to
define a list of comma-separated acceptable authentication types for use
with the server. There is no negotiation: if the server does not
present one of the allowed authentication requests, the connection
attempt done by the client fails.
The following keywords can be defined in the list:
- password, for AUTH_REQ_PASSWORD.
- md5, for AUTH_REQ_MD5.
- gss, for AUTH_REQ_GSS[_CONT].
- sspi, for AUTH_REQ_SSPI and AUTH_REQ_GSS_CONT.
- scram-sha-256, for AUTH_REQ_SASL[_CONT|_FIN].
- creds, for AUTH_REQ_SCM_CREDS (perhaps this should be removed entirely
now).
- none, to control unauthenticated connections.
All the methods that can be defined in the list can be negated, like
"!password", in which case the server must NOT use the listed
authentication type. The special method "none" allows/disallows the use
of unauthenticated connections (but it does not govern transport-level
authentication via TLS or GSSAPI).
Internally, the patch logic is tied to check_expected_areq(), that was
used for channel_binding, ensuring that an incoming request is
compatible with conn->require_auth. It also introduces a new flag,
conn->client_finished_auth, which is set by various authentication
routines when the client side of the handshake is finished. This
signals to check_expected_areq() that an AUTH_REQ_OK from the server is
expected, and allows the client to complain if the server bypasses
authentication entirely, with for example the reception of a too-early
AUTH_REQ_OK message.
Regression tests are added in authentication TAP tests for all the
keywords supported (except "creds", because it is around only for
compatibility reasons). A new TAP script has been added for SSPI, as
there was no script dedicated to it yet. It relies on SSPI being the
default authentication method on Windows, as set by pg_regress.
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, David G. Johnston, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9e5a8ccddb8355ea9fa4b75a1e3a9edc88a70cd3.camel@vmware.com
This allows for a string which if an input field matches causes the
column's default value to be inserted. The advantage of this is that
the default can be inserted in some rows and not others, for which
non-default data is available.
The file_fdw extension is also modified to take allow use of this
option.
Israel Barth Rubio
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO_rXXAcqesk6DsvioOZ5zmeEmpUN5ktZf-9=9yu+DTr0Xr8Uw@mail.gmail.com
If MERGE attempts an UPDATE or DELETE on a table with BEFORE ROW
triggers, or a cross-partition UPDATE (with or without triggers), and
a concurrent UPDATE or DELETE happens, the merge code would fail.
In some cases this would lead to a crash, while in others it would
cause the wrong merge action to be executed, or no action at all. The
immediate cause of the crash was the trigger code calling
ExecGetUpdateNewTuple() as part of the EPQ mechanism, which fails
because during a merge ri_projectNew is NULL, since merge has its own
per-action projection information, which ExecGetUpdateNewTuple() knows
nothing about.
Fix by arranging for the trigger code to exit early, returning the
TM_Result and TM_FailureData information, if a concurrent modification
is detected, allowing the merge code to do the necessary EPQ handling
in its own way. Similarly, prevent the cross-partition update code
from doing any EPQ processing for a merge, allowing the merge code to
work out what it needs to do.
This leads to a number of simplifications in nodeModifyTable.c. Most
notably, the ModifyTableContext->GetUpdateNewTuple() callback is no
longer needed, and mergeGetUpdateNewTuple() can be deleted, since
there is no longer any requirement for get-update-new-tuple during a
merge. Similarly, ModifyTableContext->cpUpdateRetrySlot is no longer
needed. Thus ExecGetUpdateNewTuple() and the retry_slot handling of
ExecCrossPartitionUpdate() can be restored to how they were in v14,
before the merge code was added, and ExecMergeMatched() no longer
needs any special-case handling for cross-partition updates.
While at it, tidy up ExecUpdateEpilogue() a bit, making it handle
recheckIndexes locally, rather than passing it in as a parameter,
ensuring that it is freed properly. This dates back to when it was
split off from ExecUpdate() to support merge.
Per bug #17809 from Alexander Lakhin, and follow-up investigation of
bug #17792, also from Alexander Lakhin.
Back-patch to v15, where MERGE was introduced, taking care to preserve
backwards-compatibility of the trigger API in v15 for any extensions
that might use it.
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/17809-9e6650bef133f0fe%40postgresql.orghttps://postgr.es/m/17792-0f89452029662c36%40postgresql.org
The recently added standard collation UNICODE (0d21d4b9bc) doesn't
give consistent results on some build farm members with old ICU
versions. Apparently, the ICU locale specification 'und' (language
tag style) misbehaves on some older ICU versions. Replacing it with
'' (ICU locale ID style) fixes it at least on some OS versions. Let's
see what the build farm says.
This exposes the ICU facility to add custom collation rules to a
standard collation.
New options are added to CREATE COLLATION, CREATE DATABASE, createdb,
and initdb to set the rules.
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/821c71a4-6ef0-d366-9acf-bb8e367f739f@enterprisedb.com
There was apparently an attempt here to list all the object types that
ACL_USAGE applies to, but it wasn't complete. So instead of trying to
keep up, put in a more timeless comment.
Previously, all the nodes of CallStmt were included in the jumbling,
causing a duplicate in the computation as the transformed state of the
CALL query was included as well as the parsed state (transformed
FuncCall with all the input arguments and potential output arguments).
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y+MRdEq9W9XVa2AB@paquier.xyz
IntoClause.viewQuery is a copy of the parsed-but-not-rewritten SELECT
clause copied to IntoClause when transforming CreateTableAsStmt for a
materialized view. Including a second copy of the SELECT Query into the
query jumbling was leading to an incorrect numbering of the Const node
locations, as these would be counted twice instead of once.
This becomes visible once the query normalization is applied to CREATE
MATERIALIZED VIEW in pg_stat_statements in the shape of a query string
using only odd numbers for the normalized constants, (regression tests
added in pg_stat_statements as of de2aca2 would show the difference).
Including the original Query from CreateTableAsStmt is enough for the
query jumbling.
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y+MRdEq9W9XVa2AB@paquier.xyz
This routine is able to retrieve the OID of the schema used with an
extension (pg_extension.extnamespace), or InvalidOid if this information
is not available. plpgsql_check embeds a copy of this code when
performing checks on functions, as one out-of-core example.
Author: Pavel Stehule
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRD+9x55hjDoi285jCcjPc8uuY_D+FLn5RpXggdz+4O2sQ@mail.gmail.com
If UPDATE is forced to retry after an EvalPlanQual check, it neglected
to repeat GENERATED-column computations, even though those might well
have changed since we're dealing with a different tuple than before.
Fixing this is mostly a matter of looping back a bit further when
we retry. In v15 and HEAD that's most easily done by altering the API
of ExecUpdateAct so that it includes computing GENERATED expressions.
Also, if an UPDATE in a partitioned table turns into a cross-partition
INSERT operation, we failed to recompute GENERATED columns. That's a
bug since 8bf6ec3ba allowed partitions to have different generation
expressions; although it seems to have no ill effects before that.
Fixing this is messier because we can now have situations where the same
query needs both the UPDATE-aligned set of GENERATED columns and the
INSERT-aligned set, and it's unclear which set will be generated first
(else we could hack things by forcing the INSERT-aligned set to be
generated, which is indeed how fe9e658f4 made it work for MERGE).
The best fix seems to be to build and store separate sets of expressions
for the INSERT and UPDATE cases. That would create ABI issues in the
back branches, but so far it seems we can leave this alone in the back
branches.
Per bug #17823 from Hisahiro Kauchi. The first part of this affects all
branches back to v12 where GENERATED columns were added.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17823-b64909cf7d63de84@postgresql.org
While testing a fix for bug #17823, I discovered that EvalPlanQualStart
failed to copy es_rteperminfos from the parent EState, resulting in
failure if anything in EPQ execution wanted to consult that information.
This led me to conclude that commit a61b1f748 had been too haphazard
about where to fill es_rteperminfos, and that we need to be sure that
that happens exactly where es_range_table gets filled. So I changed the
signature of ExecInitRangeTable to help ensure that this new requirement
doesn't get missed. (Indeed, pgoutput.c was also failing to fill it.
Maybe we don't ever need it there, but I wouldn't bet on that.)
No test case yet; one will arrive with the fix for #17823.
But that needs to be back-patched, while this fix is HEAD-only.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17823-b64909cf7d63de84@postgresql.org
Disabling this option is useful to run VACUUM (with or without FULL) on
only the toast table of a relation, bypassing the main relation. This
option is enabled by default.
Running directly VACUUM on a toast table was already possible without
this feature, by using the non-deterministic name of a toast relation
(as of pg_toast.pg_toast_N, where N would be the OID of the parent
relation) in the VACUUM command, and it required a scan of pg_class to
know the name of the toast table. So this feature is basically a
shortcut to be able to run VACUUM or VACUUM FULL on a toast relation,
using only the name of the parent relation.
A new switch called --no-process-main is added to vacuumdb, to work as
an equivalent of PROCESS_MAIN.
Regression tests are added to cover VACUUM and VACUUM FULL, looking at
pg_stat_all_tables.vacuum_count to see how many vacuums have run on
each table, main or toast.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221230000028.GA435655@nathanxps13
The following changes are made to pg_write_zeros(), the API able to
write series of zeros using vectored I/O:
- Add of an "offset" parameter, to write the size from this position
(the 'p' of "pwrite" seems to mean position, though POSIX does not
outline ythat directly), hence the name of the routine is incorrect if
it is not able to handle offsets.
- Avoid memset() of "zbuffer" on every call.
- Avoid initialization of the whole IOV array if not needed.
- Group the trailing write() call with the main write() call,
simplifying the function logic.
Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230215005525.mrrlmqrxzjzhaipl@awork3.anarazel.de
Beginning in v15, if you apply ALTER TABLE ENABLE/DISABLE TRIGGER to
a partitioned table, it also affects the partitions' cloned versions
of the affected trigger(s). The initial implementation of this
located the clones by name, but that fails on foreign-key triggers
which have names incorporating their own OIDs. We can fix that, and
also make the behavior more bulletproof in the face of user-initiated
trigger renames, by identifying the cloned triggers by tgparentid.
Following the lead of earlier commits in this area, I took care not
to break ABI in the v15 branch, even though I rather doubt there
are any external callers of EnableDisableTrigger.
While here, update the documentation, which was not touched when
the semantics were changed.
Per bug #17817 from Alan Hodgson. Back-patch to v15; older versions
do not have this behavior.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17817-31dfb7c2100d9f3d@postgresql.org
The comments claim that certain pieces of data are part of the main
WAL record data when in reality they are part of the data for
block 0. Repair.
Bertrand Drouvot, reviewed by Amit Kapila. Originally reported by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/80db7836-4415-d54a-64c3-66b88b1430e7@gmail.com
Open long-lived data and WAL file descriptors with O_CLOEXEC. This flag
was introduced by SUSv4 (POSIX.1-2008), and by now all of our target
Unix systems have it. Our open() implementation for Windows already had
that behavior, so provide a dummy O_CLOEXEC flag on that platform.
For now, callers of open() and the "thin" wrappers in fd.c that deal in
raw descriptors need to pass in O_CLOEXEC explicitly if desired. This
commit does that for WAL files, and automatically for everything
accessed via VFDs including SMgrRelation and BufFile. (With more
discussion we might decide to turn it on automatically for the thin
open()-wrappers too to avoid risk of missing places that need it, but
these are typically used for short-lived descriptors where we don't
expect to fork/exec, and it's remotely possible that extensions could be
using these APIs and passing descriptors to subprograms deliberately, so
that hasn't been done here.)
Do the same for sockets and the postmaster pipe with FD_CLOEXEC. (Later
commits might use modern interfaces to remove these extra fcntl() calls
and more where possible, but we'll need them as a fallback for a couple
of systems, so do it that way in this initial commit.)
With this change, subprograms executed for archiving, copying etc will
no longer have access to the server's descriptors, other than the ones
that we decide to pass down.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKb6FsAdQWcRL35KJsftv%2B9zXqQbzwkfRf1i0J2e57%2BhQ%40mail.gmail.com
When I designed the Bitmapset module, I set things up so that an empty
Bitmapset could be represented either by a NULL pointer, or by an
allocated object all of whose bits are zero. I've recently come to
the conclusion that that was a bad idea and we should instead have a
convention like the longstanding invariant for Lists, whereby an empty
list is represented by NIL and nothing else.
To do this, we need to fix bms_intersect, bms_difference, and a couple
of other functions to check for having produced an empty result; but
then we can replace bms_is_empty(a) by a simple "a == NULL" test.
This is very likely a (marginal) win performance-wise, because we
call bms_is_empty many more times than those other functions put
together. However, the real reason to do it is that we have various
places that have hand-implemented a rule about "this Bitmapset
variable must be exactly NULL if empty", so that they can use
checks-for-null in place of bms_is_empty calls in particularly hot
code paths. That is a really fragile, mistake-prone way to do things,
and I'm surprised that we've seldom been bitten by it. It's not well
documented at all which variables have this property, so you can't
readily tell which code might be violating those conventions. By
making the convention universal, we can eliminate a subtle source of
bugs.
Patch by me; thanks to Nathan Bossart and Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1159933.1677621588@sss.pgh.pa.us
nodeAppend.c used non-nullness of appendstate->as_valid_subplans as
a state flag to indicate whether it'd done ExecFindMatchingSubPlans
(or some sufficient approximation to that). This was pretty
questionable even in the beginning, since it wouldn't really work
right if there are no valid subplans. It got more questionable
after commit 27e1f1456 added logic that could reduce as_valid_subplans
to an empty set: at that point we were depending on unspecified
behavior of bms_del_members, namely that it'd not return an empty
set as NULL. It's about to start doing that, which breaks this
logic entirely. Hence, add a separate boolean flag to signal
whether as_valid_subplans has been computed.
Also fix a previously-cosmetic bug in nodeAgg.c, wherein it ignored
the return value of bms_del_member instead of updating its pointer.
Patch by me; thanks to Nathan Bossart and Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1159933.1677621588@sss.pgh.pa.us
This function has been semi-deprecated ever since we invented
bms_next_member(). Its habit of scribbling on the input bitmapset
isn't great, plus for sufficiently large bitmapsets it would take
O(N^2) time to complete a loop. Now we have the additional problem
that reducing the input to empty while leaving it still accessible
would violate a planned invariant. So let's just get rid of it,
after updating the few extant callers to use bms_next_member().
Patch by me; thanks to Nathan Bossart and Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1159933.1677621588@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit 0a20ff54f split out the GUC variables from guc.c into a new file
guc_tables.c. This updates comments referencing guc.c regarding variables
which are now in guc_tables.c.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6B50C70C-8C1F-4F9A-A7C0-EEAFCC032406@yesql.se
pg_input_error_info() is now a SQL function able to return a row with
more than just the error message generated for incorrect data type
inputs when these are able to handle soft failures, returning more
contents of ErrorData, as of:
- The error message (same as before).
- The error detail, if set.
- The error hint, if set.
- SQL error code.
All the regression tests that relied on pg_input_error_message() are
updated to reflect the effects of the rename.
Per discussion with Tom Lane and Andrew Dunstan.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/139a68e1-bd1f-a9a7-b5fe-0be9845c6311@dunslane.net
Some clang versions whine about comparing an enum variable to
a value outside the range of the enum, on the grounds that the
result must be constant. In the cases we fix here, the loops
will terminate only if the enum variable can in fact hold a
value one beyond its declared range. While that's very likely
to always be true for these enum types, it still seems like a
poor coding practice to assume it; so use "int" loop variables
instead to silence the warnings. (This matches what we've done
in other places, for example loops over the range of ForkNumber.)
While at it, let's drop the XXX_FIRST macros for these enums and just
write zeroes for the loop start values. The apparent flexibility
seems rather illusory given that iterating up to one-less-than-
the-number-of-values is only correct for a zero-based range.
Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20520.1677435600@sss.pgh.pa.us
This will create two bytes of padding space in xl_hash_vacuum_one_page which
can be used for future patches. This makes the datatype of
xl_hash_vacuum_one_page.ntuples same as gistxlogDelete.ntodelete which is
advisable as both are used for the same purpose.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b0e20c40-cb7a-fc1c-c607-2a78dac5021e@gmail.com
We already tried to fix this in commits 3f7323cbb et al (and follow-on
fixes), but now it emerges that there are still unfixed cases;
moreover, these cases affect all branches not only pre-v14. I thought
we had eliminated all cases of making multiple clones of an UPDATE's
target list when we nuked inheritance_planner. But it turns out we
still do that in some partitioned-UPDATE cases, notably including
INSERT ... ON CONFLICT UPDATE, because ExecInitPartitionInfo thinks
it's okay to clone and modify the parent's targetlist.
This fix is based on a suggestion from Andres Freund: let's stop
abusing the ParamExecData.execPlan mechanism, which was only ever
meant to handle initplans, and instead solve the execution timing
problem by having the expression compiler move MULTIEXPR_SUBLINK steps
to the front of their expression step lists. This is feasible because
(a) all branches still in support compile the entire targetlist of
an UPDATE into a single ExprState, and (b) we know that all
MULTIEXPR_SUBLINKs do need to be evaluated --- none could be buried
inside a CASE, for example. There is a minor semantics change
concerning the order of execution of the MULTIEXPR's subquery versus
other parts of the parent targetlist, but that seems like something
we can get away with. By doing that, we no longer need to worry
about whether different clones of a MULTIEXPR_SUBLINK share output
Params; their usage of that data structure won't overlap.
Per bug #17800 from Alexander Lakhin. Back-patch to all supported
branches. In v13 and earlier, we can revert 3f7323cbb and follow-on
fixes; however, I chose to keep the SubPlan.subLinkId field added
in ccbb54c72. We don't need that anymore in the core code, but it's
cheap enough to fill, and removing a plan node field in a minor
release seems like it'd be asking for trouble.
Andres Freund and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17800-ff90866b3906c964@postgresql.org
Offers a generally better separation of responsibilities for collation
code. Also, a step towards multi-lib ICU, which should be based on a
clean separation of the routines required for collation providers.
Callers with NUL-terminated strings should call pg_strcoll() or
pg_strxfrm(); callers with strings and their length should call the
variants pg_strncoll() or pg_strnxfrm().
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a581136455c940d7bd0ff482d3a2bd51af25a94f.camel%40j-davis.com
Switch pg_dump to use the Compression API, implemented by bf9aa490db.
The CompressFileHandle replaces the cfp* family of functions with a
struct of callbacks for accessing (compressed) files. This allows adding
new compression methods simply by introducing a new struct instance with
appropriate implementation of the callbacks.
Archives compressed using custom compression methods store an identifier
of the compression algorithm in their header instead of the compression
level. The header version is bumped.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
It's possible, in admittedly-rather-contrived cases, for an eclass
to generate a derived "join" qual that constrains the post-outer-join
value(s) of some RHS variable(s) without mentioning the LHS at all.
While the mechanisms were set up to work for this, we fell foul of
the "get_common_eclass_indexes" filter installed by commit 3373c7155:
it could decide that such an eclass wasn't relevant to the join, so
that the required qual clause wouldn't get emitted there or anywhere
else.
To fix, apply get_common_eclass_indexes only at inner joins, where
its rule is still valid. At an outer join, fall back to examining all
eclasses that mention either input (or the OJ relid, though it should
be impossible for an eclass to mention that without mentioning either
input). Perhaps we can improve on that later, but the cost/benefit of
adding more complexity to skip some irrelevant eclasses is dubious.
To allow cheaply distinguishing outer from inner joins, pass the
ojrelid to generate_join_implied_equalities as a separate argument.
This also allows cleaning up some sloppiness that had crept into
the definition of its join_relids argument, and it allows accurate
calculation of nominal_join_relids for a child outer join. (The
latter oversight seems not to have been a live bug, but it certainly
could have caused problems in future.)
Also fix what might be a live bug in check_index_predicates: it was
being sloppy about what it passed to generate_join_implied_equalities.
Per report from Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs4-DsTBfOvXuw64GdFss2=M5cwtEhY=0DCS7t2gT7P6hSA@mail.gmail.com
This was previously only documented in a comment. Given the size of the
struct, it's not hard to miss that comment. As evidenced by the commits
leading up to fe3caa1439, 67b26703b4.
It's possible, but not likely, that we might have to weaken these assertions
on a less commonly used architecture.
Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/295606.1677101684@sss.pgh.pa.us
SQL:2023 defines an ANY_VALUE aggregate whose purpose is to emit an
implementation-dependent (i.e. non-deterministic) value from the
aggregated rows.
Author: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5cff866c-10a8-d2df-32cb-e9072e6b04a2@postgresfriends.org
To allow testing for general support for fast bitscan intrinsics,
add symbols HAVE_BITSCAN_REVERSE and HAVE_BITSCAN_FORWARD.
Also do related cleanup in AllocSetFreeIndex(): Previously, we
tested for HAVE__BUILTIN_CLZ and copied the relevant internals of
pg_leftmost_one_pos32(), with a special fallback that does less
work than the general fallback for that function. Now that we have
a more general test, we just call pg_leftmost_one_pos32() directly
for platforms with intrinsic support. On gcc at least, there is no
difference in the binary for non-assert builds.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAFBsxsEPc%2BFnX_0vmmQ5DHv60sk4rL_RZJ%2BMD6ei%3D76L0kFMvA%40mail.gmail.com
The setting of the process title could be seen on profiles of very
fast-to-execute queries. In many locations where we call
set_ps_display() we pass along a string constant, the length of which is
known during compilation. Here we effectively rename set_ps_display() to
set_ps_display_with_len() and then add a static inline function named
set_ps_display() which calls strlen() on the given string. This allows
the compiler to optimize away the strlen() call when dealing with
call sites passing a string constant. We can then also use memcpy()
instead of strlcpy() to copy the string into the destination buffer.
That's significantly faster than strlcpy's byte-at-a-time way of
copying.
Here we also take measures to improve some code which was adjusting the
process title to add a " waiting" suffix to it. Call sites which require
this can now just call set_ps_display_suffix() to add or adjust the suffix
and call set_ps_display_remove_suffix() to remove it again.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvocBvvk-0gWNA2Gohe+sv9fMcv+fK_G+siBKJrgDG4O7g@mail.gmail.com
A new callback named startup_cb, called shortly after a module is
loaded, is added. This makes possible the initialization of any
additional state data required by a module. This initial state data can
be saved in a ArchiveModuleState, that is now passed down to all the
callbacks that can be defined in a module. With this design, it is
possible to have a per-module state, aimed at opening the door to the
support of more than one archive module.
The initialization of the callbacks is changed so as
_PG_archive_module_init() does not anymore give in input a
ArchiveModuleCallbacks that a module has to fill in with callback
definitions. Instead, a module now needs to return a const
ArchiveModuleCallbacks.
All the structure and callback definitions of archive modules are moved
into their own header, named archive_module.h, from pgarch.h.
Command-based archiving follows the same line, with a new set of files
named shell_archive.{c,h}.
There are a few more items that are under discussion to improve the
design of archive modules, like the fact that basic_archive calls
sigsetjmp() by itself to define its own error handling flow. These will
be adjusted later, the changes done here cover already a good portion
of what has been discussed.
Any modules created for v15 will need to be adjusted to this new
design.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230130194810.6fztfgbn32e7qarj@awork3.anarazel.de
d9d7fe68d3 made use of an existing wait event when sending data from the
apply worker, but we should have invented a new wait event since this is a
new place to wait.
This patch corrects the mistake by using a new wait event
"LogicalApplySendData".
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobWzbr9H3yN3dLVckviEZKemPwd+XyCFKEgyZQZhgP66Q@mail.gmail.com
force_parallel_mode is meant to be used to allow us to exercise the
parallel query infrastructure to ensure that it's working as we expect.
It seems some users think this GUC is for forcing the query planner into
picking a parallel plan regardless of the costs. A quick look at the
documentation would have made them realize that they were wrong, but the
GUC is likely too conveniently named which, evidently, seems to often
result in users expecting that it forces the planner into usefully
parallelizing queries.
Here we rename the GUC to something which casual users are less likely to
mistakenly think is what they need to make their query run more quickly.
For now, the old name can still be used. We'll revisit if the old name
mapping can be removed once the buildfarm configs are all updated.
Reviewed-by: John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrsOi92_uA7PEaHZMH-S4Xv+MGhQWA+GrP8b1kjpS1HjQ@mail.gmail.com
OpenSSL 1.1.1 and newer versions have added support for RSA-PSS
certificates, which requires the use of a specific routine in OpenSSL to
determine which hash function to use when compiling it when using
channel binding in SCRAM-SHA-256. X509_get_signature_nid(), that is the
original routine the channel binding code has relied on, is not able to
determine which hash algorithm to use for such certificates. However,
X509_get_signature_info(), new to OpenSSL 1.1.1, is able to do it. This
commit switches the channel binding logic to rely on
X509_get_signature_info() over X509_get_signature_nid(), which would be
the choice when building with 1.1.1 or newer.
The error could have been triggered on the client or the server, hence
libpq and the backend need to have their related code paths patched.
Note that attempting to load an RSA-PSS certificate with OpenSSL 1.1.0
or older leads to a failure due to an unsupported algorithm.
The discovery of relying on X509_get_signature_info() comes from Jacob,
the tests have been written by Heikki (with few tweaks from me), while I
have bundled the whole together while adding the bits needed for MSVC
and meson.
This issue exists since channel binding exists, so backpatch all the way
down. Some tests are added in 15~, triggered if compiling with OpenSSL
1.1.1 or newer, where the certificate and key files can easily be
generated for RSA-PSS.
Reported-by: Gunnar "Nick" Bluth
Author: Jacob Champion, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17760-b6c61e752ec07060@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 11
In commit b78f6264e I opined that it was "too risky" to delete a
relation's RelOptInfo from the planner's data structures when we have
realized that we don't need to join to it; so instead we just marked
it as a dead relation. In hindsight that judgment seems flawed: any
subsequent access to such a dead relation is arguably a bug in
itself, so leaving the RelOptInfo present just helps to mask bugs.
Let's delete it instead, allowing removal of the whole notion of a
"dead relation". So far as the regression tests can find, this
requires no other code changes, except for one Assert in equivclass.c
that was very dubiously not complaining about access to a dead rel.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/229905.1676062220@sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit removes most of the Plan and Path nodes, which should never
be included in the query jumbling because we ignore these in Query
nodes. This is facilitated by making no_query_jumble an inherited
attribute, like no_copy, no_equal and no_read when the supertype of a
node is found as marked with that.
RawStmt is not used in parsed queries, so it can be removed from the
query jumbling. A couple of nodes defined in pathnodes.h, plannodes.h
and primnodes.h with NodeTag as supertype need to be marked
individually.
Forcing the execution of the query jumbling code with compute_query_id =
auto while pg_stat_statements is loaded brings the code coverage of
queryjumblefuncs.funcs.c to 95.6%.
The core code does not yet include a way to enforce the execution in
query jumbling except in pg_stat_statements, so the numbers I am
mentioning above will not reflect on the default coverage report with
just what is done in this commit.
Reported-by: Tom Lane
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3344827.1675809127@sss.pgh.pa.us
Builds on 28e626bde0 and f30d62c2fc. See the former for motivation.
Rows of the view show IO operations for a particular backend type, IO target
object, IO context combination (e.g. a client backend's operations on
permanent relations in shared buffers) and each column in the view is the
total number of IO Operations done (e.g. writes). So a cell in the view would
be, for example, the number of blocks of relation data written from shared
buffers by client backends since the last stats reset.
In anticipation of tracking WAL IO and non-block-oriented IO (such as
temporary file IO), the "op_bytes" column specifies the unit of the "reads",
"writes", and "extends" columns for a given row.
Rows for combinations of IO operation, backend type, target object and context
that never occur, are ommitted entirely. For example, checkpointer will never
operate on temporary relations.
Similarly, if an IO operation never occurs for such a combination, the IO
operation's cell will be null, to distinguish from 0 observed IO
operations. For example, bgwriter should not perform reads.
Note that some of the cells in the view are redundant with fields in
pg_stat_bgwriter (e.g. buffers_backend). For now, these have been kept for
backwards compatibility.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Author: Samay Sharma <smilingsamay@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Maciek Sakrejda <m.sakrejda@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
Commit 28e626bde0 introduced the infrastructure for tracking more detailed IO
statistics. This commit adds the actual collection of the new IO statistics
for relations and temporary relations. See aforementioned commit for goals and
high-level design.
The changes in this commit are fairly straight-forward. The bulk of the change
is to passing sufficient information to the callsites of pgstat_count_io_op().
A somewhat unsightly detail is that it currently is hard to find a better
place to count fsyncs than in md.c, whereas the other pgstat_count_io_op()
calls are in bufmgr.c/localbuf.c. As the number of fsyncs is tied to md.c
implementation details, it's not obvious there is a better answer.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls
to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics,
documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review
easier.
While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and
pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what
the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid
IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers
written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always
done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies,
it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly,
pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers /
compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often
prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers.
The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse,
and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend,
autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp
relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite).
What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the
aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer
hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope
of the already large patchset manageable.
Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
The DDLs like Refresh Materialized views that generate lots of temporary
data due to rewrite rules may not be processed by output plugins (for
example pgoutput). So, we won't send keep-alive messages for a long time
while processing such commands and that can lead the subscriber side to
timeout. We have previously fixed a similar case for large transactions in
commit f95d53eded where the output plugin filters all or most of the
changes but missed to handle the DDLs.
We decided not to backpatch this as this adds a new callback in the
existing exposed structure and moreover, users can increase the
wal_sender_timeout and wal_receiver_timeout to avoid this problem.
Author: Wang wei, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Ashutosh Bapat, Shi yu, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS3PR01MB6275478E5D29E4A563302D3D9E2B9@OS3PR01MB6275.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA5-nLARN7-3SLU_QUxfy510pmrYK6JJb=bk3hcgemAM_pAv+w@mail.gmail.com
Like the implementation for node copy, write and read, this node
requires a custom implementation so as the query jumbling is able to
consider the correct value assigned to it, depending on its type (int,
float, bool, string, bitstring).
Based on a dump of pg_stat_statements from the regression database, this
would confuse the query jumbling of the following queries:
- SET.
- COPY TO with SELECT queries.
- START TRANSACTION with different isolation levels.
- ALTER TABLE with default expressions.
- CREATE TABLE with partition bounds.
Note that there may be a long-term argument in tracking the location of
such nodes so as query strings holding such nodes could be normalized,
but this is left as a separate discussion.
Oversight in 3db72eb.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y9+HuYslMAP6yyPb@paquier.xyz
In standby mode, we don't actually report progress of recovery,
but up until now, startup_progress_timeout_handler() nevertheless
got called every log_startup_progress_interval seconds. That's
an unnecessary expense, so avoid it.
Report by Thomas Munro. Patch by Bharath Rupireddy, reviewed by
Simon Riggs, Thomas Munro, and me. Back-patch to v15, where
the problem was introduced.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CA%2BhUKGKCHSffAj8zZJKJvNX7ygnQFxVD6wm1d-2j3fVw%2BMafPQ%40mail.gmail.com
This reverts commits 24c35ec and 57169ad. PreRestoreCommand() and
PostRestoreCommand() need to be put closer to the system() call calling
a restore_command, as they enable in_restore_command for the startup
process which would in turn trigger an immediate proc_exit() in the
SIGTERM handler. Perhaps we could get rid of this behavior entirely,
but 24c35ec has made the window where the flag is enabled much larger
than it was, and any Postgres-like actions (palloc, etc.) taken by code
paths while the flag is enabled could lead to more severe issues in the
shutdown processing.
Note that curculio has showed that there are much more problems in this
area, unrelated to this change, actually, hence the issues related to
that had better be addressed first. Keeping the code of HEAD in line
with the stable branches should make that a bit easier.
Per discussion with Andres Freund and Nathan Bossart.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y979NR3U5VnWrTwB@paquier.xyz
Backward and forward scans share much of the same page acquisition code.
Here we consolidate that code to reduce some duplication.
Additionally, add a new rs_coffset field to HeapScanDescData to track the
offset of the current tuple. The new field fits nicely into the padding
between a bool and BlockNumber field and saves having to look at the last
returned tuple to figure out which offset we should be looking at for the
current tuple.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bvkhka0CZQun28KTqhuUh5ZqY=_T8QEqZqOL02rpi2bw@mail.gmail.com
In the 90s we needed to deal with computers that still had the
pre-standard signal masking APIs. That hasn't been relevant for a very
long time on Unix systems, and c94ae9d8 got rid of a remaining
dependency in our Windows porting code. PG_SETMASK didn't expose
save/restore functionality, so we'd already started using sigprocmask()
directly in places, creating the visual distraction of having two ways
to spell it. It's not part of the API that extensions are expected to
be using (but if they are, the change will be trivial). It seems like a
good time to drop the old macro and just call the standard POSIX
function.
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BKfQgrhHP2DLTohX1WwubaCBHmTzGnAEDPZ-Gug-Xskg%40mail.gmail.com
Here remove some dead code from heapgettup() and heapgettup_pagemode()
which was trying to support NoMovementScanDirection scans. This code can
never be reached as standard_ExecutorRun() never calls ExecutePlan with
NoMovementScanDirection.
Additionally, plans which were scanning an unordered index would use
NoMovementScanDirection rather than ForwardScanDirection. There was no
real need for this, so here we adjust this so we use ForwardScanDirection
for unordered index scans. A comment in pathnodes.h claimed that
NoMovementScanDirection was used for PathKey reasons, but if that was
true, it no longer is, per code in build_index_paths().
This does change the non-text format of the EXPLAIN output so that
unordered index scans now have a "Forward" scan direction rather than
"NoMovement". The text format of EXPLAIN has not changed.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bvkhka0CZQun28KTqhuUh5ZqY=_T8QEqZqOL02rpi2bw@mail.gmail.com
This commit changes the query jumbling code in queryjumblefuncs.c to be
generated automatically based on the information of the nodes in the
headers of src/include/nodes/ by using gen_node_support.pl. This
approach offers many advantages:
- Support for query jumbling for all the utility statements, based on the
state of their parsed Nodes and not only their query string. This will
greatly ease the switch to normalize the information of some DDLs, like
SET or CALL for example (this is left unchanged and should be part of a
separate discussion). With this feature, the number of entries stored
for utilities in pg_stat_statements is reduced (for example now
"CHECKPOINT" and "checkpoint" mean the same thing with the same query
ID).
- Documentation of query jumbling directly in the structure definition
of the nodes. Since this code has been introduced in pg_stat_statements
and then moved to code, the reasons behind the choices of what should be
included in the jumble are rather sparse. Note that some explanation is
added for the most relevant parts, as a start.
- Overall code reduction and more consistency with the other parts
generating read, write and copy depending on the nodes.
The query jumbling is controlled by a couple of new node attributes,
documented in nodes/nodes.h:
- custom_query_jumble, to mark a Node as having a custom
implementation.
- no_query_jumble, to ignore entirely a Node.
- query_jumble_ignore, to ignore a field in a Node.
- query_jumble_location, to mark a location in a Node, for
normalization. This can apply only to int fields, with "location" in
their name (only Const as of this commit).
There should be no compatibility impact on pg_stat_statements, as the
new code applies the jumbling to the same fields for each node (its
regression tests have no modification, for one).
Some benchmark of the query jumbling between HEAD and this commit for
SELECT and DMLs has proved that this new code does not cause a
performance regression, with computation times close for both methods.
For utility queries, the new method is slower than the previous method
of calculating a hash of the query string, though we are talking about
extra ns-level changes based on what I measured, which is unnoticeable
even for OLTP workloads as a query ID is calculated once per query
post-parse analysis.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5BHOUhX3zTH/ig6@paquier.xyz
EquivalenceClasses are now understood as applying within a "join
domain", which is a set of inner-joined relations (possibly underneath
an outer join). We no longer need to treat an EC from below an outer
join as a second-class citizen.
I have hopes of eventually being able to treat outer-join clauses via
EquivalenceClasses, by means of only applying deductions within the
EC's join domain. There are still problems in the way of that, though,
so for now the reconsider_outer_join_clause logic is still here.
I haven't been able to get rid of RestrictInfo.is_pushed_down either,
but I wonder if that could be recast using JoinDomains.
I had to hack one test case in postgres_fdw.sql to make it still test
what it was meant to, because postgres_fdw is inconsistent about
how it deals with quals containing non-shippable expressions; see
https://postgr.es/m/1691374.1671659838@sss.pgh.pa.us. That should
be improved, but I don't think it's within the scope of this patch
series.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Remove RestrictInfo.nullable_relids, along with a good deal of
infrastructure that calculated it. One use-case for it was in
join_clause_is_movable_to, but we can now replace that usage with
a check to see if the clause's relids include any outer join
that can null the target relation. The other use-case was in
join_clause_is_movable_into, but that test can just be dropped
entirely now that the clause's relids include outer joins.
Furthermore, join_clause_is_movable_into should now be
accurate enough that it will accept anything returned by
generate_join_implied_equalities, so we can restore the Assert
that was diked out in commit 95f4e59c3.
Remove the outerjoin_delayed mechanism. We needed this before to
prevent quals from getting evaluated below outer joins that should
null some of their vars. Now that we consider varnullingrels while
placing quals, that's taken care of automatically, so throw the
whole thing away.
Teach remove_useless_result_rtes to also remove useless FromExprs.
Having done that, the delay_upper_joins flag serves no purpose any
more and we can remove it, largely reverting 11086f2f2.
Use constant TRUE for "dummy" clauses when throwing back outer joins.
This improves on a hack I introduced in commit 6a6522529. If we
have a left-join clause l.x = r.y, and a WHERE clause l.x = constant,
we generate r.y = constant and then don't really have a need for the
join clause. But we must throw the join clause back anyway after
marking it redundant, so that the join search heuristics won't think
this is a clauseless join and avoid it. That was a kluge introduced
under time pressure, and after looking at it I thought of a better
way: let's just introduce constant-TRUE "join clauses" instead,
and get rid of them at the end. This improves the generated plans for
such cases by not having to test a redundant join clause. We can also
get rid of the ugly hack used to mark such clauses as redundant for
selectivity estimation.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Traditionally we used the same Var struct to represent the value
of a table column everywhere in parse and plan trees. This choice
predates our support for SQL outer joins, and it's really a pretty
bad idea with outer joins, because the Var's value can depend on
where it is in the tree: it might go to NULL above an outer join.
So expression nodes that are equal() per equalfuncs.c might not
represent the same value, which is a huge correctness hazard for
the planner.
To improve this, decorate Var nodes with a bitmapset showing
which outer joins (identified by RTE indexes) may have nulled
them at the point in the parse tree where the Var appears.
This allows us to trust that equal() Vars represent the same value.
A certain amount of klugery is still needed to cope with cases
where we re-order two outer joins, but it's possible to make it
work without sacrificing that core principle. PlaceHolderVars
receive similar decoration for the same reason.
In the planner, we include these outer join bitmapsets into the relids
that an expression is considered to depend on, and in consequence also
add outer-join relids to the relids of join RelOptInfos. This allows
us to correctly perceive whether an expression can be calculated above
or below a particular outer join.
This change affects FDWs that want to plan foreign joins. They *must*
follow suit when labeling foreign joins in order to match with the
core planner, but for many purposes (if postgres_fdw is any guide)
they'd prefer to consider only base relations within the join.
To support both requirements, redefine ForeignScan.fs_relids as
base+OJ relids, and add a new field fs_base_relids that's set up by
the core planner.
Large though it is, this commit just does the minimum necessary to
install the new mechanisms and get check-world passing again.
Follow-up patches will perform some cleanup. (The README additions
and comments mention some stuff that will appear in the follow-up.)
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Rename the developer option 'logical_decoding_mode' to the more flexible
name 'logical_replication_mode' because doing so will make it easier to
extend this option in the future to help test other areas of logical
replication.
Currently, it is used on the publisher side to allow streaming or
serializing each change in logical decoding. In the upcoming patch, we are
planning to use it on the subscriber. On the subscriber, it will allow
serializing the changes to file and notifies the parallel apply workers to
read and apply them at the end of the transaction.
We discussed exposing this parameter as a subscription option but
it did not seem advisable since it is primarily used for testing/debugging
and there is no other such parameter. We also discussed having separate
GUCs for publisher and subscriber but for current testing/debugging
requirements, one GUC is sufficient.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Kuroda Hayato, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAy2c=Mx=FTCs+EwUsf2kQL5MmU3N18X84k0EmCXntK4g@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Split out "ConfigOptionIsVisible" to perform the privilege
check for GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY GUCs (which these days can also
be read by pg_read_all_settings role members), and move the
should-we-show-it checks from GetConfigOptionValues to its
sole caller.
This commit also removes get_explain_guc_options's check of
GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL, which seems to have got cargo-culted in there.
While there's no obvious use-case for marking a GUC both
GUC_EXPLAIN and GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL, if it were set up that way
one would expect EXPLAIN to show it --- if that's not what
you want, then don't set GUC_EXPLAIN.
In passing, simplify the loop logic in show_all_settings.
Nitin Jadhav, Bharath Rupireddy, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMm1aWYgfekpRK-Jz5=pM_bV+Om=ktGq1vxTZ_dr1Z6MV-qokA@mail.gmail.com
Avoid having walreceiver code know explicitly about the precision
and underlying datatype of TimestampTz. (There is still one
calculation that knows that, which should be replaced with use of
TimestampDifferenceMilliseconds; but we need to figure out what to do
about overflow cases first.)
In support of this, provide a TimestampTzPlusSeconds macro, as well
as TIMESTAMP_INFINITY and TIMESTAMP_MINUS_INFINITY macros. (We could
have used the existing DT_NOEND and DT_NOBEGIN symbols, but I judged
those too opaque and confusing.)
Move GetCurrentTimestamp calls so that it's more obvious that we
are not using stale values of "now" anyplace. This doesn't result
in net more calls, and might indeed make for net fewer.
Avoid having a dummy value in the WalRcvWakeupReason enum, so that
we can hope for the compiler to catch overlooked switch cases.
Nathan Bossart and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230125235004.GA1327755@nathanxps13
Eager freezing strategy avoids large build-ups of all-visible pages. It
makes VACUUM trigger page-level freezing whenever doing so will enable
the page to become all-frozen in the visibility map. This is useful for
tables that experience continual growth, particularly strict append-only
tables such as pgbench's history table. Eager freezing significantly
improves performance stability by spreading out the cost of freezing
over time, rather than doing most freezing during aggressive VACUUMs.
It complements the insert autovacuum mechanism added by commit b07642db.
VACUUM determines its freezing strategy based on the value of the new
vacuum_freeze_strategy_threshold GUC (or reloption) with logged tables.
Tables that exceed the size threshold use the eager freezing strategy.
Unlogged tables and temp tables always use eager freezing strategy,
since the added cost is negligible there. Non-permanent relations won't
incur any extra overhead in WAL written (for the obvious reason), nor in
pages dirtied (since any extra freezing will only take place on pages
whose PD_ALL_VISIBLE bit needed to be set either way).
VACUUM uses lazy freezing strategy for logged tables that fall under the
GUC size threshold. Page-level freezing triggers based on the criteria
established in commit 1de58df4, which added basic page-level freezing.
Eager freezing is strictly more aggressive than lazy freezing. Settings
like vacuum_freeze_min_age still get applied in just the same way in
every VACUUM, independent of the strategy in use. The only mechanical
difference between eager and lazy freezing strategies is that only the
former applies its own additional criteria to trigger freezing pages.
Note that even lazy freezing strategy will trigger freezing whenever a
page happens to have required that an FPI be written during pruning,
provided that the page will thereby become all-frozen in the visibility
map afterwards (due to the FPI optimization from commit 1de58df4).
The vacuum_freeze_strategy_threshold default setting is 4GB. This is a
relatively low setting that prioritizes performance stability. It will
be reviewed at the end of the Postgres 16 beta period.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkFok_6EAHuK39GaW4FjEFQsY=3J0AAd6FXk93u-Xq3Fg@mail.gmail.com
Invent separate macros for "invalid" values of these types, so that
we needn't embed knowledge of their representations into calling code.
These are all zeroes anyway ATM, so this is not fixing any live bug,
but it makes the code cleaner and more future-proof.
I (tgl) also chose to move DSM_HANDLE_INVALID into dsm_impl.h,
since it seems like it should live beside the typedef for dsm_handle.
Hou Zhijie, Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB5716860B1454C34E5B179B6694C99@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Previously, a CREATEROLE user without SUPERUSER could not alter
REPLICATION users in any way, and could not set the BYPASSRLS
attribute. However, they could manipulate the CREATEDB property
even if they themselves did not possess it.
With this change, a CREATEROLE user without SUPERUSER can set or
clear the REPLICATION, BYPASSRLS, or CREATEDB property on a new
role or a role that they have rights to manage if and only if
that property is set for their own role.
This implements the standard idea that you can't give permissions
you don't have (but you can give the ones you do have). We might
in the future want to provide more powerful ways to constrain
what a CREATEROLE user can do - for example, to limit whether
CONNECTION LIMIT can be set or the values to which it can be set -
but that is left as future work.
Patch by me, reviewed by Nathan Bossart, Tushar Ahuja, and Neha
Sharma.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobX=LHg_J5aT=0pi9gJy=JdtrUVGAu0zhr-i5v5nNbJDg@mail.gmail.com
Currently dblink and postgres_fdw don't process interrupts during connection
establishment. Besides preventing query cancellations etc, this can lead to
undetected deadlocks, as global barriers are not processed.
Libpqwalreceiver in contrast, processes interrupts during connection
establishment. The required code is not trivial, so duplicating it into
additional places does not seem like a good option.
These aforementioned undetected deadlocks are the reason for the spate of CI
test failures in the FreeBSD 'test_running' step.
For now the helper library is just a header, as it needs to be linked into
each extension using libpq, and it seems too small to be worth adding a
dedicated static library for.
The conversion to the helper are done in subsequent commits.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220925232237.p6uskba2dw6fnwj2@awork3.anarazel.de
Historically we skipped writing/reading this field, but that no
longer works under WRITE_READ_PARSE_PLAN_TREES since we expanded
the coverage of that option to include utility commands (787102b56).
Remove the special case and just treat this field normally.
Bump catversion out of an abundance of caution --- I do not think
we currently ever store RangeVar nodes in the catalogs, but
perhaps I'm wrong.
Per report from Pavel Stehule.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRAYvYu-qU7-NieqRRyaQZk-yr3UjtHQ2LR62PS9M1dZMA@mail.gmail.com
This adds combine, serial and deserial functions for the array_agg() and
string_agg() aggregate functions, thus allowing these aggregates to
partake in partial aggregations. This allows both parallel aggregation to
take place when these aggregates are present and also allows additional
partition-wise aggregation plan shapes to include plans that require
additional aggregation once the partially aggregated results from the
partitions have been combined.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, Stephen Frost, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f9sx_6GTcvd6TMuZnNtCh0VhBzhX6FZqw17TgVFH-ga_A@mail.gmail.com
Enforce wal_retrieve_retry_interval on a per-subscription basis,
rather than globally, and arrange to skip that delay in case of
an intentional worker exit. This probably makes little difference
in the field, where apply workers wouldn't be restarted often;
but it has a significant impact on the runtime of our logical
replication regression tests (even though those tests use
artificially-small wal_retrieve_retry_interval settings already).
Nathan Bossart, with mostly-cosmetic editorialization by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221122004119.GA132961@nathanxps13
Until now we used struct timespec for instr_time on all platforms but
windows. Using struct timespec causes a fair bit of memory (struct timeval is
16 bytes) and runtime overhead (much more complicated additions). Instead we
can convert the time to nanoseconds in INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(), making the
remaining operations cheaper.
Representing time as int64 nanoseconds provides sufficient range, ~292 years
relative to a starting point (depending on clock source, relative to the unix
epoch or the system's boot time). That'd not be sufficient for calendar time
stored on disk, but is plenty for runtime interval time measurement.
On windows instr_time already is represented as cycles. It might make sense to
represent time as cycles on other platforms as well, as using cycle
acquisition instructions like rdtsc directly can reduce the overhead of time
acquisition substantially. This could be done in a fairly localized manner as
the code stands after this commit.
Because the windows and non-windows paths are now more similar, use a common
set of macros. To make that possible, most of the use of LARGE_INTEGER had to
be removed, which looks nicer anyway.
To avoid users of the API relying on the integer representation, we wrap the
64bit integer inside struct struct instr_time.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com>
Author: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230113195547.k4nlrmawpijqwlsa@awork3.anarazel.de
This is similar to 835d476, except that this one is to add node
attributes related to query jumbling and avoid long lines in the headers
and in the node structures changed by this commit.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5BHOUhX3zTH/ig6@paquier.xyz
This will ease a follow-up move that will generate automatically this
code. The C file is renamed, for consistency with the node-related
files whose code are generated by gen_node_support.pl:
- queryjumble.c -> queryjumblefuncs.c
- utils/queryjumble.h -> nodes/queryjumble.h
Per a suggestion from Peter Eisentraut.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5BHOUhX3zTH/ig6@paquier.xyz
This provides a way to reserve connection slots for non-superusers.
The slots reserved via the new GUC are available only to users who
have the new predefined role pg_use_reserved_connections.
superuser_reserved_connections remains as a final reserve in case
reserved_connections has been exhausted.
Patch by Nathan Bossart. Reviewed by Tushar Ahuja and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230119194601.GA4105788@nathanxps13
This is in preparation for adding a new reserved_connections GUC,
but aligning the GUC name with the variable name is also a good
idea on general principle.
Patch by Nathan Bossart. Reviewed by Tushar Ahuja and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230119194601.GA4105788@nathanxps13
This patch largely reverts what I did in commits c9b0c678d and
78e73e875. The maximum cover length limit that I added in 78e73e875
(to band-aid over c9b0c678d's performance issues) creates too many
user-visible behavior discrepancies, as complained of for example in
bug #17691. The real problem with hlCover() is not what I thought
at the time, but more that it seems to have been designed with only
AND tsquery semantics in mind. It doesn't work quite right for OR,
and even less so for NOT or phrase queries. However, we can improve
that situation by building a variant of TS_execute() that returns a
list of match locations. We already get an ExecPhraseData struct
representing match locations for the primitive case of a simple match,
as well as one for a phrase match; we just need to add some logic to
combine these for AND and OR operators. The result is a list of
ExecPhraseDatas, which hlCover can regard as having simple AND
semantics, so that its old algorithm works correctly.
There's still a lot not to like about ts_headline's behavior, but
I think the remaining issues have to do with the heuristics used
in mark_hl_words and mark_hl_fragments (which, likewise, were not
revisited when phrase search was added). Improving those is a task
for another day.
Patch by me; thanks to Alvaro Herrera for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/840.1669405935@sss.pgh.pa.us
The rule system needs "old" and/or "new" pseudo-RTEs in rule actions
that are ON INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE. Historically it's put such entries
into the ON SELECT rules of views as well, but those are really quite
vestigial. The only thing we've used them for is to carry the
view's relid forward to AcquireExecutorLocks (so that we can
re-lock the view to verify it hasn't changed before re-using a plan)
and to carry its relid and permissions data forward to execution-time
permissions checks. What we can do instead of that is to retain
these fields of the RTE_RELATION RTE for the view even after we
convert it to an RTE_SUBQUERY RTE. This requires a tiny amount of
extra complication in the planner and AcquireExecutorLocks, but on
the other hand we can get rid of the logic that moves that data from
one place to another.
The principal immediate benefit of doing this, aside from a small
saving in the pg_rewrite data for views, is that these pseudo-RTEs
no longer trigger ruleutils.c's heuristic about qualifying variable
names when the rangetable's length is more than 1. That results
in quite a number of small simplifications in regression test outputs,
which are all to the good IMO.
Bump catversion because we need to dump a few more fields of
RTE_SUBQUERY RTEs. While those will always be zeroes anyway in
stored rules (because we'd never populate them until query rewrite)
they are useful for debugging, and it seems like we'd better make
sure to transmit such RTEs accurately in plans sent to parallel
workers. I don't think the executor actually examines these fields
after startup, but someday it might.
This is a second attempt at committing 1b4d280ea. The difference
from the first time is that now we can add some filtering rules to
AdjustUpgrade.pm to allow cross-version upgrade testing to pass
despite all the cosmetic changes in CREATE VIEW outputs.
Amit Langote (filtering rules by me)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEf7gPN4Hn+LoZ4tP2q_Qt7n3vw7-6fJKOf92tSEnX6Gg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/891521.1673657296@sss.pgh.pa.us
Avoid explicitly grouping by columns that we know are redundant
for sorting, for example we need group by only one of x and y in
SELECT ... WHERE x = y GROUP BY x, y
This comes up more often than you might think, as shown by the
changes in the regression tests. It's nearly free to detect too,
since we are just piggybacking on the existing logic that detects
redundant pathkeys. (In some of the existing plans that change,
it's visible that a sort step preceding the grouping step already
didn't bother to sort by the redundant column, making the old plan
a bit silly-looking.)
To do this, build processed_groupClause and processed_distinctClause
lists that omit any provably-redundant sort items, and consult those
not the originals where relevant. This means that within the
planner, one should usually consult root->processed_groupClause or
root->processed_distinctClause if one wants to know which columns
are to be grouped on; but to check whether grouping or distinct-ing
is happening at all, check non-NIL-ness of parse->groupClause or
parse->distinctClause. This is comparable to longstanding rules
about handling the HAVING clause, so I don't think it'll be a huge
maintenance problem.
nodeAgg.c also needs minor mods, because it's now possible to generate
AGG_PLAIN and AGG_SORTED Agg nodes with zero grouping columns.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo and David Rowley for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/185315.1672179489@sss.pgh.pa.us
Add leader_pid to pg_stat_subscription. leader_pid is the process ID of
the leader apply worker if this process is a parallel apply worker. If
this field is NULL, it indicates that the process is a leader apply
worker or a synchronization worker. The new column makes it easier to
distinguish parallel apply workers from other kinds of workers and helps
to identify the leader for the parallel workers corresponding to a
particular subscription.
Additionally, update the leader_pid column in pg_stat_activity as well to
display the PID of the leader apply worker for parallel apply workers.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila, Shveta Mallik
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Presently, restore_command uses a different code path than
archive_cleanup_command and recovery_end_command. These code paths
are similar and can be easily combined, as long as it is possible to
identify if a command should:
- Issue a FATAL on signal.
- Exit immediately on SIGTERM.
While on it, this removes src/common/archive.c and its associated
header. Since the introduction of c96de2c, BuildRestoreCommand() has
become a simple wrapper of replace_percent_placeholders() able to call
make_native_path(). This simplifies shell_restore.c as long as
RestoreArchivedFile() includes a call to make_native_path().
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221227192449.GA3672473@nathanxps13
This makes sure that the internal logic of these functions does not
attempt to change the value of the arguments constified, and it removes
one unconstify() in basic_archive.c.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan, Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230114231126.GA2580330@nathanxps13
Most callers of BufFileRead() want to check whether they read the full
specified length. Checking this at every call site is very tedious.
This patch provides additional variants BufFileReadExact() and
BufFileReadMaybeEOF() that include the length checks.
I considered changing BufFileRead() itself, but this function is also
used in extensions, and so changing the behavior like this would
create a lot of problems there. The new names are analogous to the
existing LogicalTapeReadExact().
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/f3501945-c591-8cc3-5ef0-b72a2e0eaa9c@enterprisedb.com
The code specific to the execution of archive_cleanup_command,
recovery_end_command and restore_command is moved to a new file named
shell_restore.c. The code is split into three functions:
- shell_restore(), that attempts the execution of a shell-based
restore_command.
- shell_archive_cleanup(), for archive_cleanup_command.
- shell_recovery_end(), for recovery_end_command.
This introduces no functional changes, with failure patterns and logs
generated in consequence being the same as before (one case actually
generates one less DEBUG2 message "could not restore" when a restore
command succeeds but the follow-up stat() to check the size fails, but
that only matters with a elevel high enough).
This is preparatory work for allowing recovery modules, a facility
similar to archive modules, with callbacks shaped similarly to the
functions introduced here.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221227192449.GA3672473@nathanxps13
While system_user was stored as an AuthToken in IdentLine, pg_user was
stored as a plain string. This commit changes the code as we start
storing pg_user as an AuthToken too.
This does not have any functional changes, as all the operations on
pg_user only use the string from the AuthToken. There is no regexp
compiled and no check based on its quoting, yet. This is in preparation
of more features that intend to extend its capabilities, like support
for regexps and group membership.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQRNow4MwkBjgPxywXdJU_K3a9+Pm78JB7De3yQwwkTDew@mail.gmail.com
In commit 8bf6ec3ba I assumed that no code path could reach
ExecGetExtraUpdatedCols without having gone through
ExecInitStoredGenerated. That turns out not to be the case in
logical replication: if there's an ON UPDATE trigger on the target
table, trigger.c will call this code before anybody has set up its
generated columns. Having seen that, I don't have a lot of faith in
there not being other such paths. ExecGetExtraUpdatedCols can call
ExecInitStoredGenerated for itself, as long as we are willing to
assume that it is only called in CMD_UPDATE operations, which on
the whole seems like a safer leap of faith.
Per report from Vitaly Davydov.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d259d69652b8c2ff50e14cda3c236c7f@postgrespro.ru
Commit 60684dd8 left loose ends when it came to maintaining toast
tables or partitions.
For toast tables, simply skip the privilege check if the toast table
is an indirect target of the maintenance command, because the main
table privileges have already been checked.
For partitions, allow the maintenance command if the user has the
MAINTAIN privilege on the partition or any parent.
Also make CLUSTER emit "skipping" messages when the user doesn't have
privileges, similar to VACUUM.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reported-by: Pavel Luzanov
Reviewed-by: Pavel Luzanov, Ted Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230113231339.GA2422750@nathanxps13
We don't allow different column lists for the same table in the different
publications of the single subscription. A publication with a column list
except for dropped and generated columns should be considered the same as
a publication with no column list (which implicitly includes all columns
as part of the columns list). However, as we were not excluding the
dropped and generated columns from the column list combining such
publications leads to an error "cannot use different column lists for
table ...".
We decided not to backpatch this fix as there is a risk of users seeing
this as a behavior change and also we didn't see any field report of this
case.
Author: Shi yu
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSZPR01MB631091CCBC56F195B1B9ACB0FDFE9@OSZPR01MB6310.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Const qualifiers ensure that we don't do something stupid in the
function implementation. Additionally they clarify the interface. As
an example:
void
slist_delete(slist_head *head, const slist_node *node)
Here one can instantly tell that node->next is not going to be set to
NULL. Finally, const qualifiers potentially allow the compiler to do
more optimizations. This being said, no benchmarking was done for
this patch.
The functions that return non-const pointers like slist_next_node(),
dclist_next_node() etc. are not affected by the patch intentionally.
Author: Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TM2%3D08mNKD9aJg8vEY9hd%2BG4L7%2BNvh30UiNT3kShgRgNg%40mail.gmail.com
The code that handles authentication for user maps was pretty confusing
with its choice of variable names. It involves two types of users: a
system user and a Postgres user (well, role), and these were not named
consistently throughout the code that processes the user maps loaded
from pg_ident.conf at authentication.
This commit changes the following things to improve the situation:
- Rename "pg_role" to "pg_user" and "token" to "system_user" in
IndetLine. These choices are more consistent with the pg_ident.conf
example in the docs, as well. "token" has been introduced recently in
fc579e1, and it is way worse than the choice before that, "ident_user".
- Switch the order of the fields in IdentLine to map with the order of
the items in the ident files, as of map name, system user and PG user.
- In check_ident_usermap(), rename "regexp_pgrole" to "expanded_pg_user"
when processing a regexp for the system user entry in a user map. This
variable does not store a regular expression at all: it would be either
a string or a substitution to \1 if the Postgres role is specified as
such.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQTkwELHUOAKhvdA+m3tWbUQySHHkExJV8GAZ1pwgbEgXg@mail.gmail.com
A comment in hba.h mentioned that AuthTokens are used when building the
IdentLines from pg_ident.conf, but since 8fea868 that has added support
of regexps for databases and roles in pg_hba.conf, it is also the case
of HBA files. This refreshes the comment to refer to both HBA and ident
files.
Issue spotted while going through a different patch.
This reverts commit 1b4d280ea1.
It's broken the buildfarm members that run cross-version-upgrade tests,
because they're not prepared to deal with cosmetic differences between
CREATE VIEW commands emitted by older servers and HEAD. Even if we had
a solution to that, which we don't, it'd take some time to roll it out
to the affected animals. This improvement isn't valuable enough to
justify addressing that problem on an emergency basis, so revert it
for now.
Switch to a design similar to regular backends, instead of the previous
arrangement where signal handlers did non-trivial state management and
called fork(). The main changes are:
* The postmaster now has its own local latch to wait on. (For now, we
don't want other backends setting its latch directly, but that could
probably be made to work with more research on robustness.)
* The existing signal handlers are cut in two: a handle_pm_XXX() part
that just sets pending_pm_XXX flags and the latch, and a
process_pm_XXX() part that runs later when the latch is seen.
* Signal handlers are now installed with the regular pqsignal()
function rather than the special pqsignal_pm() function; historical
portability concerns about the effect of SA_RESTART on select() are no
longer relevant, and we don't need to block signals anymore.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BZ-HpOj1JsO9eWUP%2Bar7npSVinsC_npxSy%2BjdOMsx%3DGg%40mail.gmail.com
The rule system needs "old" and/or "new" pseudo-RTEs in rule actions
that are ON INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE. Historically it's put such entries
into the ON SELECT rules of views as well, but those are really quite
vestigial. The only thing we've used them for is to carry the
view's relid forward to AcquireExecutorLocks (so that we can
re-lock the view to verify it hasn't changed before re-using a plan)
and to carry its relid and permissions data forward to execution-time
permissions checks. What we can do instead of that is to retain
these fields of the RTE_RELATION RTE for the view even after we
convert it to an RTE_SUBQUERY RTE. This requires a tiny amount of
extra complication in the planner and AcquireExecutorLocks, but on
the other hand we can get rid of the logic that moves that data from
one place to another.
The principal immediate benefit of doing this, aside from a small
saving in the pg_rewrite data for views, is that these pseudo-RTEs
no longer trigger ruleutils.c's heuristic about qualifying variable
names when the rangetable's length is more than 1. That results
in quite a number of small simplifications in regression test outputs,
which are all to the good IMO.
Bump catversion because we need to dump a few more fields of
RTE_SUBQUERY RTEs. While those will always be zeroes anyway in
stored rules (because we'd never populate them until query rewrite)
they are useful for debugging, and it seems like we'd better make
sure to transmit such RTEs accurately in plans sent to parallel
workers. I don't think the executor actually examines these fields
after startup, but someday it might.
Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEf7gPN4Hn+LoZ4tP2q_Qt7n3vw7-6fJKOf92tSEnX6Gg@mail.gmail.com
There are a number of places where a shell command is constructed with
percent-placeholders (like %x). It's cumbersome to have to open-code
this several times. This factors out this logic into a separate
function. This also allows us to ensure consistency for and document
some subtle behaviors, such as what to do with unrecognized
placeholders.
The unified handling is now that incorrect and unknown placeholders
are an error, where previously in most cases they were skipped or
ignored. This affects the following settings:
- archive_cleanup_command
- archive_command
- recovery_end_command
- restore_command
- ssl_passphrase_command
The following settings are part of this refactoring but already had
stricter error handling and should be unchanged in their behavior:
- basebackup_to_shell.command
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5238bbed-0b01-83a6-d4b2-7eb0562a054e%40enterprisedb.com
Can be set to the empty string, or to either or both of "set" or
"inherit". If set to a non-empty value, a non-superuser who creates
a role (necessarily by relying up the CREATEROLE privilege) will
grant that role back to themselves with the specified options.
This isn't a security feature, because the grant that this feature
triggers can also be performed explicitly. Instead, it's a user experience
feature. A superuser would necessarily inherit the privileges of any
created role and be able to access all such roles via SET ROLE;
with this patch, you can configure createrole_self_grant = 'set, inherit'
to provide a similar experience for a user who has CREATEROLE but not
SUPERUSER.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobN59ct+Emmz6ig1Nua2Q-_o=r6DSD98KfU53kctq_kQw@mail.gmail.com
This allows left join removals and unique joins to work with partitioned
tables. The planner just lacked sufficient proofs that a given join
would not cause any row duplication. Unique indexes currently serve as
that proof, so have get_relation_info() populate the indexlist for
partitioned tables too.
Author: Arne Roland
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Zhihong Yu, Amit Langote, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c3b2408b7a39433b8230bbcd02e9f302@index.de
Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in
multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon
logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply
worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the
commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To
improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to
be applied via parallel workers.
In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as
soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker
will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply
worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary
files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to
send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to
"partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all
remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to
read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking
way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel
apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the
transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at
commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading
from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker
available.
This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the
user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel
apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming
parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means
the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available.
The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled
to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour).
In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT
message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be
used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the
streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed
to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for
publications on servers < PG16.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Waken related worker processes immediately at commit of a transaction
that has performed ALTER SUBSCRIPTION (including the RENAME and
OWNER variants). This reduces the response time for such operations.
In the real world that might not be worth much, but it shaves several
seconds off the runtime for the subscription test suite.
In the case of PREPARE, we just throw away this notification state;
it doesn't seem worth the work to preserve it. The workers will
still react after the eventual COMMIT PREPARED, but not as quickly.
Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221122004119.GA132961@nathanxps13
VACUUM normally ends by running vac_update_datfrozenxid(), which
requires a scan of pg_class. Therefore, if one attempts to vacuum a
database one table at a time --- as vacuumdb has done since v12 ---
we will spend O(N^2) time in vac_update_datfrozenxid(). That causes
serious performance problems in databases with tens of thousands of
tables, and indeed the effect is measurable with only a few hundred.
To add insult to injury, only one process can run
vac_update_datfrozenxid at the same time per DB, so this behavior
largely defeats vacuumdb's -j option.
Hence, invent options SKIP_DATABASE_STATS and ONLY_DATABASE_STATS
to allow applications to postpone vac_update_datfrozenxid() until the
end of a series of VACUUM requests, and teach vacuumdb to use them.
Per bug #17717 from Gunnar L. Sadly, this answer doesn't seem
like something we'd consider back-patching, so the performance
problem will remain in v12-v15.
Tom Lane and Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17717-6c50eb1c7d23a886@postgresql.org
We were identifying the updatable generated columns of inheritance
children by transposing the calculation made for their parent.
However, there's nothing that says a traditional-inheritance child
can't have generated columns that aren't there in its parent, or that
have different dependencies than are in the parent's expression.
(At present it seems that we don't enforce that for partitioning
either, which is likely wrong to some degree or other; but the case
clearly needs to be handled with traditional inheritance.)
Hence, drop the very-klugy-anyway "extraUpdatedCols" RTE field
in favor of identifying which generated columns depend on updated
columns during executor startup. In HEAD we can remove
extraUpdatedCols altogether; in back branches, it's still there but
always empty. Another difference between the HEAD and back-branch
versions of this patch is that in HEAD we can add the new bitmap field
to ResultRelInfo, but that would cause an ABI break in back branches.
Like 4b3e37993, add a List field at the end of struct EState instead.
Back-patch to v13. The bogus calculation is also being made in v12,
but it doesn't have the same visible effect because we don't use it
to decide which generated columns to recalculate; as a consequence of
which the patch doesn't apply easily. I think that there might still
be a demonstrable bug associated with trigger firing conditions, but
that's such a weird corner-case usage that I'm content to leave it
unfixed in v12.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFshLKNvQUd1DgwJ-7tsTp=dwv7KZqXC4j2wYBV1aCDUA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2793383.1672944799@sss.pgh.pa.us
pg_xact lookups are relatively expensive. Move the xmin/xmax commit
status checks from the point that freeze plans are prepared to the point
that they're actually executed. Otherwise we'll repeat many commit
status checks whenever multiple successive VACUUM operations scan the
same pages and decide against freezing each time, which is a waste of
cycles.
Oversight in commit 1de58df4, which added page-level freezing.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkZpe4K6qMfEt8H4qYJCKc2R7TPvKsBva7jc9w7iGXQSw@mail.gmail.com
Improve comments added by commit 1de58df4 which describe the
lazy_scan_prune "freeze the page" path. These newly revised comments
are based on suggestions from Jeff Davis.
In passing, remove nearby visibility_cutoff_xid comments left over from
commit 6daeeb1f.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ebc857107fe3edd422ef8a65191ca4a8da568b9b.camel@j-davis.com
While on it, newlines are removed from the end of two elog() strings.
The others are simple grammar mistakes. One comment in pg_upgrade
referred incorrectly to sequences since a7e5457.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221230231257.GI1153@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 11
New versions of perl trigger warnings within perl.h with our compiler
flags. At least -Wdeclaration-after-statement, -Wshadow=compatible-local are
known to be problematic.
To avoid these warnings, conditionally use #pragma GCC system_header before
including plperl.h.
Alternatively, we could add the include paths for problematic headers with
-isystem, but that is a larger hammer and is harder to search for.
A more granular alternative would be to use #pragma GCC diagnostic
push/ignored/pop, but gcc warns about unknown warnings being ignored, so every
to-be-ignored-temporarily compiler warning would require its own pg_config.h
symbol and #ifdef.
As the warnings are voluminous, it makes sense to backpatch this change. But
don't do so yet, we first want gather buildfarm coverage - it's e.g. possible
that some compiler claiming to be gcc compatible has issues with the pragma.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221228182455.hfdwd22zztvkojy2@awork3.anarazel.de
Teach VACUUM to decide on whether or not to trigger freezing at the
level of whole heap pages. Individual XIDs and MXIDs fields from tuple
headers now trigger freezing of whole pages, rather than independently
triggering freezing of each individual tuple header field.
Managing the cost of freezing over time now significantly influences
when and how VACUUM freezes. The overall amount of WAL written is the
single most important freezing related cost, in general. Freezing each
page's tuples together in batch allows VACUUM to take full advantage of
the freeze plan WAL deduplication optimization added by commit 9e540599.
Also teach VACUUM to trigger page-level freezing whenever it detects
that heap pruning generated an FPI. We'll have already written a large
amount of WAL just to do that much, so it's very likely a good idea to
get freezing out of the way for the page early. This only happens in
cases where it will directly lead to marking the page all-frozen in the
visibility map.
In most cases "freezing a page" removes all XIDs < OldestXmin, and all
MXIDs < OldestMxact. It doesn't quite work that way in certain rare
cases involving MultiXacts, though. It is convenient to define "freeze
the page" in a way that gives FreezeMultiXactId the leeway to put off
the work of processing an individual tuple's xmax whenever it happens to
be a MultiXactId that would require an expensive second pass to process
aggressively (allocating a new multi is especially worth avoiding here).
FreezeMultiXactId is eager when processing is cheap (as it usually is),
and lazy in the event of an individual multi that happens to require
expensive second pass processing. This avoids regressions related to
processing of multis that page-level freezing might otherwise cause.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkFok_6EAHuK39GaW4FjEFQsY=3J0AAd6FXk93u-Xq3Fg@mail.gmail.com
This is not really complete, but it catches most cases of practical
interest. The main omissions are:
* regtype, regprocedure, and regoperator parse type names by
calling the main grammar, so any grammar-detected syntax error
will still be a hard error. Also, if one includes a type
modifier in such a type specification, errors detected by the
typmodin function will be hard errors.
* Lookup errors are handled just by passing missing_ok = true
to the relevant catalog lookup function. Because we've used
quite a restrictive definition of "missing_ok", this means that
edge cases such as "the named schema exists, but you lack
USAGE permission on it" are still hard errors.
It would make sense to me to replace most/all missing_ok
parameters with an escontext parameter and then allow these
additional lookup failure cases to be trapped too. But that's
a job for some other day.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3342239.1671988406@sss.pgh.pa.us
This is slightly tedious because the adjustments cascade through
a couple of levels of subroutines, but it's not very hard.
I chose to avoid changing function signatures more than absolutely
necessary, by passing the escontext pointer in existing structs
where possible.
tsquery's nuisance NOTICEs about empty queries are suppressed in
soft-error mode, since they're not errors and we surely don't want
them to be shown to the user anyway. Maybe that whole behavior
should be reconsidered.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3824377.1672076822@sss.pgh.pa.us
Historically these input functions just called strtoul or strtoull
and returned the result, with no error detection whatever. Upgrade
them to reject garbage input and out-of-range values, similarly to
our other numeric input routines.
To share the code for this with type oid, adjust the existing
"oidin_subr" to be agnostic about the SQL name of the type it is
handling, and move it to numutils.c; then clone it for 64-bit types.
Because the xid types previously accepted hex and octal input by
reason of calling strtoul[l] with third argument zero, I made the
common subroutine do that too, with the consequence that type oid
now also accepts hex and octal input. In view of 6fcda9aba, that
seems like a good thing.
While at it, simplify the existing over-complicated handling of
syntax errors from strtoul: we only need one ereturn not three.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3526121.1672000729@sss.pgh.pa.us
This enables streaming or serializing changes immediately in logical
decoding. This parameter is intended to be used to test logical decoding
and replication of large transactions for which otherwise we need to
generate the changes till logical_decoding_work_mem is reached.
This helps in reducing the timing of existing tests related to logical
replication of in-progress transactions and will help in writing tests for
for the upcoming feature for parallelly applying large in-progress
transactions.
Author: Shi yu
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Shveta Mallik, Amit Kapila, Dilip Kumar, Kuroda Hayato, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSZPR01MB63104E7449DBE41932DB19F1FD1B9@OSZPR01MB6310.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
ed1a88dda added support functions for the ntile(), percent_rank() and
cume_dist() window functions but neglected to actually add these support
functions to the pg_proc entry for the corresponding window function.
Also, take this opportunity to add these window functions to one of the
regression tests added in ed1a88dda to give the support functions a little
bit of exercise. If I'd done that in the first place then the omission
would have been more obvious.
Bump the catversion, again.
An epoll fd belonging to the parent should be closed in the child. A
kqueue fd is automatically closed by fork(), but we should still adjust
our counter. For poll and Windows systems, nothing special is required.
On all systems we free the memory.
No caller yet, but we'll need this if we start using WaitEventSet in the
postmaster as planned.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BZ-HpOj1JsO9eWUP%2Bar7npSVinsC_npxSy%2BjdOMsx%3DGg%40mail.gmail.com
To be able to handle incoming connections on a server socket with
the WaitEventSet API, we'll need a new kind of event to indicate that
the the socket is ready to accept a connection.
On Unix, it's just the same as WL_SOCKET_READABLE, but on Windows there
is a different underlying kernel event that we need to map our
abstraction to.
No user yet, but a proposed patch would use this.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BZ-HpOj1JsO9eWUP%2Bar7npSVinsC_npxSy%2BjdOMsx%3DGg%40mail.gmail.com
The former name was discussed as being confusing, so use "split", as per
a suggestion from Magnus Hagander.
While on it, one of the output arguments is renamed from "segno" to
"segment_number", as per a suggestion from Kyotaro Horiguchi.
The documentation is updated to reflect all these changes.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEytQVaOOhGdoh0D7hGwe3fuKcRF6NthsSW7ww04EmtFgQ@mail.gmail.com
WindowFuncs such as row_number() don't care if it's called with ROWS
UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW or with RANGE UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND
CURRENT ROW. The latter is less efficient as the RANGE option requires
that the executor check for peer rows, so using the ROW option instead
would cause less overhead. Because RANGE is part of the default frame
options for WindowClauses, it means WindowAgg is, by default, working much
harder than it needs to for window functions where the ROWS / RANGE option
has no effect on the window function's result.
On a test query from the discussion thread, a performance improvement of
344% was seen by using ROWS instead of RANGE.
Here we add a new support function node type to allow support functions to
be called for window functions so that the most optimal version of the
frame options can be set. The planner has been adjusted so that the frame
options are changed only if all window functions sharing the same window
clause agree on what the optimized frame options are.
Here we give the ability for row_number(), rank(), dense_rank(),
percent_rank(), cume_dist() and ntile() to alter their WindowClause's
frameOptions.
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing, Erwin Brandstetter, Zhihong Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGHENJ7LBBszxS+SkWWFVnBmOT2oVsBhDMB1DFrgerCeYa_DyA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvohAKEtTXxq7Pc-ic2dKT8oZfbRKeEJP64M0B6+S88z+A@mail.gmail.com
Use a dedicated struct for the XID/MXID cutoffs used by VACUUM, such as
FreezeLimit and OldestXmin. This state is initialized in vacuum.c, and
then passed around by code from vacuumlazy.c to heapam.c freezing
related routines. The new convention is that everybody works off of the
same cutoff state, which is passed around via pointers to const.
Also simplify some of the logic for dealing with frozen xmin in
heap_prepare_freeze_tuple: add dedicated "xmin_already_frozen" state to
clearly distinguish xmin XIDs that we're going to freeze from those that
were already frozen from before. That way the routine's xmin handling
code is symmetrical with the existing xmax handling code. This is
preparation for an upcoming commit that will add page level freezing.
Also refactor the control flow within FreezeMultiXactId(), while adding
stricter sanity checks. We now test OldestXmin directly, instead of
using FreezeLimit as an inexact proxy for OldestXmin. This is further
preparation for the page level freezing work, which will make the
function's caller cede control of page level freezing to the function
where appropriate (where heap_prepare_freeze_tuple sees a tuple that
happens to contain a MultiXactId in its xmax).
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznS9TxXmz2_=SY+SyJyDFbiOftKofM9=aDo68BbXNBUMA@mail.gmail.com
The previous coding of VA_ARGS_NARGS() always returned 1 on Visual
Studio, because it treats __VA_ARGS__ as a single token unless you jump
through extra hoops. Newer compilers have an option to fix that. Add a
comment about that so that we can remember to clean this up in the
future when our minimum MSVC version advances.
Author: Victor Spirin <v.spirin@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f450fc57-a147-19d0-e50c-33571c52cc13%40postgrespro.ru
This introduces palloc_aligned() and MemoryContextAllocAligned() which
allow callers to obtain memory which is allocated to the given size and
also aligned to the specified alignment boundary. The alignment
boundaries may be any power-of-2 value. Currently, the alignment is
capped at 2^26, however, we don't expect values anything like that large.
The primary expected use case is to align allocations to perhaps CPU
cache line size or to maybe I/O page size. Certain use cases can benefit
from having aligned memory by either having better performance or more
predictable performance.
The alignment is achieved by requesting 'alignto' additional bytes from
the underlying allocator function and then aligning the address that is
returned to the requested alignment. This obviously does waste some
memory, so alignments should be kept as small as what is required.
It's also important to note that these alignment bytes eat into the
maximum allocation size. So something like:
palloc_aligned(MaxAllocSize, 64, 0);
will not work as we cannot request MaxAllocSize + 64 bytes.
Additionally, because we're just requesting the requested size plus the
alignment requirements from the given MemoryContext, if that context is
the Slab allocator, then since slab can only provide chunks of the size
that's specified when the slab context is created, then this is not going
to work. Slab will generate an error to indicate that the requested size
is not supported.
The alignment that is requested in palloc_aligned() is stored along with
the allocated memory. This allows the alignment to remain intact through
repalloc() calls.
Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Maxim Orlov, Andres Freund, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpxLPUMV1mhxs6g7GNwCP6Cs6hfnYQL5ffJQTuFAuxt8A%40mail.gmail.com
This is the guts of float4in, callable as a routine to input floats,
which will be useful in an upcoming patch for allowing soft errors in
the seg module's input function.
A similar operation was performed some years ago for float8in in
commit 50861cd683.
Reviewed by Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cee4e426-d014-c0b7-aa22-a659f2cd9130@dunslane.net
1349d279 added query planner support to allow more efficient execution of
aggregate functions which have an ORDER BY or a DISTINCT clause. Prior to
that commit, the planner would only request that the lower planner produce
a plan with the order required for the GROUP BY clause and it would be
left up to nodeAgg.c to perform the final sort of records within each
group so that the aggregate transition functions were called in the
correct order. Now that the planner requests the lower planner produce a
plan with the GROUP BY and the ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregates in mind,
there is the possibility that the planner chooses a plan which could be
less efficient than what would have been produced before 1349d279.
While developing 1349d279, I had in mind that Incremental Sort would help
us in cases where an index exists only on the GROUP BY column(s).
Incremental Sort would just replace the implicit tuplesorts which are
being performed in nodeAgg.c. However, because the planner has the
flexibility to instead choose a plan which just performs a full sort on
both the GROUP BY and ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregate columns, there is
potential for the planner to make a bad choice. The costing for
Incremental Sort is not perfect as it assumes an even distribution of rows
to sort within each sort group.
Here we add an escape hatch in the form of the enable_presorted_aggregate
GUC. This will allow users to get the pre-PG16 behavior in cases where
they have no other means to convince the query planner to produce a plan
which only sorts on the GROUP BY column(s).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvr1Sm+g9hbv4REOVuvQKeDWXcKUAhmbK5K+dfun0s9CvA@mail.gmail.com
This function takes in input a WAL segment name and returns a tuple made
of the segment sequence number (dependent on the WAL segment size of the
cluster) and its timeline, as of a thin SQL wrapper around the existing
XLogFromFileName().
This function has multiple usages, like being able to compile a LSN from
a file name and an offset, or finding the timeline of a segment without
having to do to some maths based on the first eight characters of the
segment.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Maxim Orlov, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACWV=FCddsxcGbVOA=cvPyMr75YCFbSQT6g4KDj=gcJK4g@mail.gmail.com
SCRAM_KEY_LEN was a variable used in the internal routines of SCRAM to
size a set of fixed-sized arrays used in the SHA and HMAC computations
during the SASL exchange or when building a SCRAM password. This had a
hard dependency on SHA-256, reducing the flexibility of SCRAM when it
comes to the addition of more hash methods. A second issue was that
SHA-256 is assumed as the cryptohash method to use all the time.
This commit renames SCRAM_KEY_LEN to a more generic SCRAM_KEY_MAX_LEN,
which is used as the size of the buffers used by the internal routines
of SCRAM. This is aimed at tracking centrally the maximum size
necessary for all the hash methods supported by SCRAM. A global
variable has the advantage of keeping the code in its simplest form,
reducing the need of more alloc/free logic for all the buffers used in
the hash calculations.
A second change is that the key length (SHA digest length) and hash
types are now tracked by the state data in the backend and the frontend,
the common portions being extended to handle these as arguments by the
internal routines of SCRAM. There are a few RFC proposals floating
around to extend the SCRAM protocol, including some to use stronger
cryptohash algorithms, so this lifts some of the existing restrictions
in the code.
The code in charge of parsing and building SCRAM secrets is extended to
rely on the key length and on the cryptohash type used for the exchange,
assuming currently that only SHA-256 is supported for the moment. Note
that the mock authentication simply enforces SHA-256.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Jonathan Katz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5k3Qiweo/1g9CG6@paquier.xyz
A new function pg_stat_get_backend_subxact() can be used to get
information about the number of subtransactions in the cache of
a particular backend and whether that cache has overflowed. This
can be useful for tracking down performance problems that can
result from overflowed snapshots.
Dilip Kumar, reviewed by Zhihong Yu, Nikolay Samokhvalov,
Justin Pryzby, Nathan Bossart, Ashutosh Sharma, Julien
Rouhaud. Additional design comments from Andres Freund,
Tom Lane, Bruce Momjian, and David G. Johnston.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-ut0uwkRJDQJeDPXpVyTWD46m3gt3JDToE02hTfONEN=Q@mail.gmail.com
The building of command completion tags could often be seen showing up in
profiles when running high tps workloads.
The query completion tags were being built with snprintf, which is slow at
the best of times when compared with more manual ways of formatting
strings. Here we introduce BuildQueryCompletionString() to do this job
for us. We also now store the completion tag's strlen in the
CommandTagBehavior struct so that we can quickly memcpy this number of
bytes into the completion tag string. Appending the rows affected is done
via pg_ulltoa_n. BuildQueryCompletionString returns the length of the
built string. This saves us having to call strlen to figure out how many
bytes to pass to pq_putmessage().
Author: David Rowley, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHoyFK-Xwqc-iY52shj0G+8K9FJpse+FuZ36XBKy78wDVnd=Qg@mail.gmail.com
This is mostly straightforward, except that if the range type
has a canonical function, that might throw an error during range
input. (Such errors probably only occur for edge cases: in the
in-core canonical functions, it happens only if a bound has the
maximum valid value for the underlying type.) Hence, this patch
extends the soft-error regime to allow canonical functions to
return errors softly as well. Extensions implementing range
canonical functions will need modification anyway because of the
API change for range_serialize(); while at it, they might want
to do something similar to what's been done here in the in-core
canonical functions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3284599.1671075185@sss.pgh.pa.us
Because we added StaticAssertStmt() first before StaticAssertDecl(),
some uses as well as the instructions in c.h are now a bit backwards
from the "native" way static assertions are meant to be used in C.
This updates the guidance and moves some static assertions to better
places.
Specifically, since the addition of StaticAssertDecl(), we can put
static assertions at the file level. This moves a number of static
assertions out of function bodies, where they might have been stuck
out of necessity, to perhaps better places at the file level or in
header files.
Also, when the static assertion appears in a position where a
declaration is allowed, then using StaticAssertDecl() is more native
than StaticAssertStmt().
Reviewed-by: John Naylor <john.naylor@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/941a04e7-dd6f-c0e4-8cdf-a33b3338cbda%40enterprisedb.com
This referred to the size of the buffers for k_ipad and k_opad in HMAC
computations. This is unused since e6bdfd9, where SCRAM has switched to
the cryptohash routines for its HMAC calculations rather than its own
maths.
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5gGMjXhyp0oK0mH@paquier.xyz
Commits f92944137 et al. made IsInTransactionBlock() set the
XACT_FLAGS_NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT flag before returning "false",
on the grounds that that kept its API promises equivalent to those of
PreventInTransactionBlock(). This turns out to be a bad idea though,
because it allows an ANALYZE in a pipelined series of commands to
cause an immediate commit, which is unexpected.
Furthermore, if we return "false" then we have another issue,
which is that ANALYZE will decide it's allowed to do internal
commit-and-start-transaction sequences, thus possibly unexpectedly
committing the effects of previous commands in the pipeline.
To fix the latter situation, invent another transaction state flag
XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING, which explicitly records the fact that we
have executed some extended-protocol command and not yet seen a
commit for it. Then, require that flag to not be set before allowing
InTransactionBlock() to return "false".
Having done that, we can remove its setting of NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT
without fear of causing problems. This means that the API guarantees
of IsInTransactionBlock now diverge from PreventInTransactionBlock,
which is mildly annoying, but it seems OK given the very limited usage
of IsInTransactionBlock. (In any case, a caller preferring the old
behavior could always set NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT for itself.)
For consistency also require XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING to not be set
in PreventInTransactionBlock. This too is meant to prevent commands
such as CREATE DATABASE from silently committing previous commands
in a pipeline.
Per report from Peter Eisentraut. As before, back-patch to all
supported branches (which sadly no longer includes v10).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/65a899dd-aebc-f667-1d0a-abb89ff3abf8@enterprisedb.com
During ALTER TABLE execution, when prep-time handling of subcommands of
certain types determine that execution-time handling requires recursion,
they signal this by changing the subcommand type to a special value.
This can be done in a simpler way by using a separate flag introduced by
commit ec0925c22a, so do that.
Catversion bumped. It's not clear to me that ALTER TABLE subcommands
are stored anywhere in catalogs (CREATE FUNCTION rejects it in BEGIN
ATOMIC function bodies), but we do have both write and read support for
them, so be safe.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220929090033.zxuaezcdwh2fgfjb@alvherre.pgsql
This requires a bit of further infrastructure-extension to allow
trapping errors reported by numeric_in and pg_unicode_to_server,
but otherwise it's pretty straightforward.
In the case of jsonb_in, we are only capturing errors reported
during the initial "parse" phase. The value-construction phase
(JsonbValueToJsonb) can also throw errors if assorted implementation
limits are exceeded. We should improve that, but it seems like a
separable project.
Andrew Dunstan and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bac9841-fe07-713d-fa42-606c225567d6@dunslane.net
Formerly, semantic action functions for the JSON parser returned void,
so that there was no way for them to affect the parser's behavior.
That means in particular that they can't force an error exit except by
longjmp'ing. That won't do in the context of our project to make input
functions return errors softly. Hence, change them to return the same
JsonParseErrorType enum value as the parser itself uses. If an action
function returns anything besides JSON_SUCCESS, the parse is abandoned
and that error code is returned.
Action functions can thus easily return the same error conditions that
the parser already knows about. As an escape hatch for expansion, also
invent a code JSON_SEM_ACTION_FAILED that the core parser does not know
the exact meaning of. When returning this code, an action function
must use some out-of-band mechanism for reporting the error details.
This commit simply makes the API change and causes all the existing
action functions to return JSON_SUCCESS, so that there is no actual
change in behavior here. This is long enough and boring enough that
it seemed best to commit it separately from the changes that make
real use of the new mechanism.
In passing, remove a duplicate assignment of
transform_string_values_scalar.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1436686.1670701118@sss.pgh.pa.us
Replace the error trapping scheme introduced in 5bc450629 with our
shiny new errsave/ereturn mechanism. This doesn't have any real
functional impact (although I think that the new coding is able
to report a few more errors softly than v15 did). And I doubt
there's any measurable performance difference either. But this
gets rid of an ad-hoc, one-of-a-kind design in favor of a mechanism
that will be widely used going forward, so it should be a net win
for code readability.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
This patch converts the input functions for date, time, timetz,
timestamp, timestamptz, and interval to the new soft-error style.
There's some related stuff in formatting.c that remains to be
cleaned up, but that seems like a separable project.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
Pay down some ancient technical debt (dating to commit 022fd9966):
fix a couple of places in datetime parsing that were throwing
ereport's immediately instead of returning a DTERR code that could be
interpreted by DateTimeParseError. The reason for that was that there
was no mechanism for passing any auxiliary data (such as a zone name)
to DateTimeParseError, and these errors seemed to really need it.
Up to now it didn't matter that much just where the error got thrown,
but now we'd like to have a hard policy that datetime parse errors
get thrown from just the one place.
Hence, invent a "DateTimeErrorExtra" struct that can be used to
carry any extra values needed for specific DTERR codes. Perhaps
in the future somebody will be motivated to use this to improve
the specificity of other DateTimeParseError messages, but for now
just deal with the timezone-error cases.
This is on the way to making the datetime input functions report
parse errors softly; but it's really an independent change, so
commit separately.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
More could be done in this line, but I just grabbed some low-hanging
fruit. Principal objective was to remove the need for several ugly
unconstify() usages in formatting.c.
This patch converts the input functions for bool, int2, int4, int8,
float4, float8, numeric, and contrib/cube to the new soft-error style.
array_in and record_in are also converted. There's lots more to do,
but this is enough to provide proof-of-concept that the soft-error
API is usable, as well as reference examples for how to convert
input functions.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
pg_input_is_valid() returns boolean, while pg_input_error_message()
returns the primary error message if the input is bad, or NULL
if the input is OK. The main reason for having two functions is
so that we can test both the details-wanted and the no-details-wanted
code paths.
Although these are primarily designed with testing in mind,
it could well be that they'll be useful to end users as well.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
Postgres' standard mechanism for reporting errors (ereport() or elog())
is used for all sorts of error conditions. This means that throwing
an exception via ereport(ERROR) requires an expensive transaction or
subtransaction abort and cleanup, since the exception catcher dare not
make many assumptions about what has gone wrong. There are situations
where we would rather have a lighter-weight mechanism for dealing
with errors that are known to be safe to recover from without a full
transaction cleanup. This commit creates infrastructure to let us
adapt existing error-reporting code for that purpose. See the
included documentation changes for details. Follow-on commits will
provide test code and usage examples.
The near-term plan is to convert most if not all datatype input
functions to report invalid input "softly". This will enable
implementing some SQL/JSON features cleanly and without the cost
of subtransactions, and it will also allow creating COPY options
to deal with bad input without cancelling the whole COPY.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks also to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
The USER SET flag specifies that the variable should be set on behalf of an
ordinary role. That lets ordinary roles set placeholder variables, which
permission requirements are not known yet. Such a value wouldn't be used if
the variable finally appear to require superuser privileges.
The new flags are stored in the pg_db_role_setting.setuser array. Catversion
is bumped.
This commit is inspired by the previous work by Steve Chavez.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdsLd6E--epnGqXENqLP6dLwuNZrPMcNYb3wJ87WR7UBOQ%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov, Steve Chavez
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov, Steve Chavez
Make the argument types of the File API match stdio better:
- Change the data buffer to void *, from char *.
- Change FileWrite() data buffer to const on top of that.
- Change amounts to size_t, from int.
In passing, change the FilePrefetch() amount argument from int to
off_t, to match the underlying posix_fadvise().
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/11dda853-bb5b-59ba-a746-e168b1ce4bdb%40enterprisedb.com
In commit ffbb7e65a, I added a ModifyTableState member to ResultRelInfo
to save the owning ModifyTableState for use by nodeModifyTable.c when
performing batch inserts, but as pointed out by Tom Lane, that changed
the array stride of es_result_relations, and that would break any
previously-compiled extension code that accesses that array. Fix by
removing that member from ResultRelInfo and instead adding a List member
at the end of EState to save such ModifyTableStates.
Per report from Tom Lane. Back-patch to v14, like the previous commit;
I chose to apply the patch to HEAD as well, to make back-patching easy.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/4065383.1669395453%40sss.pgh.pa.us
After restart, we don't perform streaming of an in-progress transaction if
it was previously decoded and confirmed by the client. To achieve that we
were comparing the END location of the WAL record being decoded with the
WAL location we have already decoded and confirmed by the client. While
decoding the commit record, to decide whether to process and send the
complete transaction, we compare its START location with the WAL location
we have already decoded and confirmed by the client. Now, if we need to
queue some change in the transaction while decoding the commit record
(e.g. snapshot), it is possible that we decide to stream the transaction
but later commit processing decides to skip it. In such a case, we would
needlessly send the changes and later when we decide to skip it, we will
send stream abort.
We also sometimes decide to stream the changes when we actually just need
to process them locally like a change for invalidations. This will lead us
to send empty streams. To avoid this, while queuing each change for
decoding, we remember whether the transaction has any change that actually
needs to be sent downstream and use that information later to decide
whether to stream the transaction or not.
Note, we can't avoid all cases where we have to send empty streams like
the case where the plugin later decides that the change is not
publishable. However, we will no longer need to send stream_abort when we
skip sending a particular transaction.
Author: Dilip Kumar
Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Ashutosh Bapat, Shi yu, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-tHK=7LzfrPs8fbT2ksrOJGQbzywcgXst2bM9-rJJAAUg@mail.gmail.com
Generate a Makefile.global that's complete enough for PGXS to work for some
extensions. It is likely that this compatibility layer will not suffice for
every extension and not all platforms - we can expand it over time.
This allows extensions to use a single buildsystem across all the supported
postgres versions. Once all supported PG versions support meson, we can remove
the compatibility layer.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221005200710.luvw5evhwf6clig6@awork3.anarazel.de
The same code pattern is repeated 21 times for int64 counters (0 for
missing entry) and 5 times for doubles (0 for missing entry) on database
entries. This code is switched to use macros for the basic code
instead, shaving a few hundred lines of originally-duplicated code
patterns. The function names remain the same, but some fields of
PgStat_StatDBEntry have to be renamed to cope with the new style.
This is in the same spirit as 83a1a1b.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y46stlxQ2LQE20Na@paquier.xyz
Currently, information about the permissions to be checked on relations
mentioned in a query is stored in their range table entries. So the
executor must scan the entire range table looking for relations that
need to have permissions checked. This can make the permission checking
part of the executor initialization needlessly expensive when many
inheritance children are present in the range range. While the
permissions need not be checked on the individual child relations, the
executor still must visit every range table entry to filter them out.
This commit moves the permission checking information out of the range
table entries into a new plan node called RTEPermissionInfo. Every
top-level (inheritance "root") RTE_RELATION entry in the range table
gets one and a list of those is maintained alongside the range table.
This new list is initialized by the parser when initializing the range
table. The rewriter can add more entries to it as rules/views are
expanded. Finally, the planner combines the lists of the individual
subqueries into one flat list that is passed to the executor for
checking.
To make it quick to find the RTEPermissionInfo entry belonging to a
given relation, RangeTblEntry gets a new Index field 'perminfoindex'
that stores the corresponding RTEPermissionInfo's index in the query's
list of the latter.
ExecutorCheckPerms_hook has gained another List * argument; the
signature is now:
typedef bool (*ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type) (List *rangeTable,
List *rtePermInfos,
bool ereport_on_violation);
The first argument is no longer used by any in-core uses of the hook,
but we leave it in place because there may be other implementations that
do. Implementations should likely scan the rtePermInfos list to
determine which operations to allow or deny.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGjJDmUhDSfv-U2qhKJjt9ST7Xh9JXC_irsAQ1TAUsJYg@mail.gmail.com
The same code pattern is repeated 17 times for int64 counters (0 for
missing entry) and 5 times for timestamps (NULL for missing entry) on
table entries. This code is switched to use a macro for the basic code
instead, shaving a few hundred lines of originally-duplicated code. The
function names remain the same, but some fields of PgStat_StatTabEntry
have to be renamed to cope with the new style.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https:/postgr.es/m/20221204173207.GA2669116@nathanxps13
A couple of places weren't up to speed for this. By sheer good
luck, we didn't fail but just selected a non-memoized join plan,
at least in the test case we have. Nonetheless, it's a bug,
and I'm not quite sure that it couldn't have worse consequences
in other examples. So back-patch to v14 where Memoize came in.
Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs48GkNom272sfp0-WeD6_0HSR19BJ4H1c9ZKSfbVnJsvRg@mail.gmail.com
Just because I'm a neatnik, and I'm currently working on
code in this area. It annoys me to not be able to pgindent
my patches without working around unrelated changes.
It seems better to deal with this by explicit annotations on the
fields in question, instead of magic knowledge embedded in the
script. While that creates a risk-of-omission from failing to
annotate fields, the preceding commit should catch any such
oversights.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/263413.1669513145@sss.pgh.pa.us
ri_RootToPartitionMap is currently only initialized for tuple routing
target partitions, though a future commit will need the ability to use
it even for the non-partition child tables, so make adjustments to the
decouple it from the partitioning code.
Also, make it lazily initialized via ExecGetRootToChildMap(), making
that function its preferred access path. Existing third-party code
accessing it directly should no longer do so; consequently, it's been
renamed to ri_RootToChildMap, which also makes it consistent with
ri_ChildToRootMap.
ExecGetRootToChildMap() houses the logic of setting the map appropriately
depending on whether a given child relation is partition or not.
To support this, also add a separate entry point for TupleConversionMap
creation that receives an AttrMap. No new code here, just split an
existing function in two.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEYUhDXSK5BTvG_xk=eaAEJCD4GS3C6uH7ybBvv+Z_Tmg@mail.gmail.com
For Updates and Deletes, we were not honoring the columns list for old
tuple values while sending tuple data via pgoutput. This results in
pgoutput emitting more columns than expected.
This is not a problem for built-in logical replication as we simply ignore
additional columns based on the relation information sent previously which
didn't have those columns. However, some other users of pgoutput plugin
may expect the columns as per the column list. Also, sending extra columns
unnecessarily consumes network bandwidth defeating the purpose of the
column list feature.
Reported-by: Gunnar Morling
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 15
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADGJaX9kiRZ-OH0EpWF5Fkyh1ZZYofoNRCrhapBfdk02tj5EKg@mail.gmail.com
The planner will now add a given PartitioPruneInfo to
PlannedStmt.partPruneInfos instead of directly to the
Append/MergeAppend plan node. What gets set instead in the
latter is an index field which points to the list element
of PlannedStmt.partPruneInfos containing the PartitioPruneInfo
belonging to the plan node.
A later commit will make AcquireExecutorLocks() do the initial
partition pruning to determine a minimal set of partitions to be
locked when validating a plan tree and it will need to consult the
PartitioPruneInfos referenced therein to do so. It would be better
for the PartitioPruneInfos to be accessible directly than requiring
a walk of the plan tree to find them, which is easier when it can be
done by simply iterating over PlannedStmt.partPruneInfos.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFGkMSge6TgC9KQzde0ohpAycLQuV7ooitEEpbKB0O_mg@mail.gmail.com
A future commit will move the checkAsUser field from RangeTblEntry
to a new node that, unlike RTEs, will only be created for tables
mentioned in the query but not for the inheritance child relations
added to the query by the planner. So, checkAsUser value for a
given child relation will have to be obtained by referring to that
for its ancestor mentioned in the query.
In preparation, it seems better to expand the use of RelOptInfo.userid
during planning in place of rte->checkAsUser so that there will be
fewer places to adjust for the above change.
Given that the child-to-ancestor mapping is not available during the
execution of a given "child" ForeignScan node, add a checkAsUser
field to ForeignScan to carry the child relation's RelOptInfo.userid.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGFCs2uq7VRKi7g+FFKbP6Ea_2_HkgZb2HPhUfaAKT3ng@mail.gmail.com
This commit moves the code in charge of deparsing the method and detail
strings fed later to parse_compress_specification() to a common routine,
where the backward-compatible case of only an integer being found (N
= 0 => "none", N > 1 => gzip at level N) is handled.
Note that this has a side-effect for pg_basebackup, as we now attempt to
detect "server-" and "client-" before checking for the integer-only
pre-14 grammar, where values like server-N and client-N (without the
follow-up detail string) are now valid rather than failing because of an
unsupported method name. Past grammars are still handled the same way,
but these flavors are now authorized, and would now switch to consider N
= 0 as no compression and N > 1 as gzip with the compression level used
as N, with the caller still controlling if the compression method should
be done server-side, client-side or is unspecified. The documentation
of pg_basebackup is updated to reflect that.
This benefits other code paths that would like to rely on the same logic
as pg_basebackup and pg_receivewal with option values used for
compression specifications, one area discussed lately being pg_dump.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/O4mutIrCES8ZhlXJiMvzsivT7ztAMja2lkdL1LJx6O5f22I2W8PBIeLKz7mDLwxHoibcnRAYJXm1pH4tyUNC4a8eDzLn22a6Pb1S74Niexg=@pm.me
Previously, we'd compress only when the active range of array entries
reached Max(4 * PROCARRAY_MAXPROCS, 2 * pArray->numKnownAssignedXids).
If max_connections is large, the first term could result in not
compressing for a long time, resulting in much wastage of cycles in
hot-standby backends scanning the array to take snapshots. Get rid
of that term, and just bound it to 2 * pArray->numKnownAssignedXids.
That however creates the opposite risk, that we might spend too much
effort compressing. Hence, consider compressing only once every 128
commit records. (This frequency was chosen by benchmarking. While
we only tried one benchmark scenario, the results seem stable over
a fairly wide range of frequencies.)
Also, force compression when processing RecoveryInfo WAL records
(which should be infrequent); the old code could perform compression
then, but would do so only after the same array-range check as for
the transaction-commit path.
Also, opportunistically run compression if the startup process is about
to wait for WAL, though not oftener than once a second. This should
prevent cases where we waste lots of time by leaving the array
not-compressed for long intervals due to low WAL traffic.
Lastly, add a simple check to keep us from uselessly compressing
when the array storage is already compact.
Back-patch, as the performance problem is worse in pre-v14 branches
than in HEAD.
Simon Riggs and Michail Nikolaev, with help from Tom Lane and
Andres Freund.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALdSSPgahNUD_=pB_j=1zSnDBaiOtqVfzo8Ejt5J_k7qZiU1Tw@mail.gmail.com
When it's given as true, return a 0 in the position of the missing
column rather than raising an error.
This is currently unused, but it allows us to reimplement column
permission checking in a subsequent commit. It seems worth breaking
into a separate commit because it affects unrelated code.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFfiai=qBxPDTjaio_ZcaqUKh+FC=prESrB8ogZgFNNNQ@mail.gmail.com
Previously, an idle startup (recovery) process would wake up every 5
seconds to have a chance to poll for promote_trigger_file, even if that
GUC was not configured. That promotion triggering mechanism was
effectively superseded by pg_ctl promote and pg_promote() a long time
ago. There probably aren't many users left and it's very easy to change
to the modern mechanisms, so we agreed to remove the feature.
This is part of a campaign to reduce wakeups on idle systems.
Author: Simon Riggs <simon.riggs@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Ian Lawrence Barwick <barwick@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-FsjnzVOQGBpQ589%3DnWuL1Ex0Ykn74Nh1hEjp2usZSR5g%40mail.gmail.com
This provides two new predefined roles: pg_vacuum_all_tables and
pg_analyze_all_tables. Roles which have been granted these roles can
perform vacuum or analyse respectively on any or all tables as if they
were a superuser. This removes the need to grant superuser privilege to
roles just so they can perform vacuum and/or analyze.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Currently a table can only be vacuumed or analyzed by its owner or
a superuser. This can now be extended to any user by means of an
appropriate GRANT.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Commit b663a4136, which allowed FDWs to INSERT rows in bulk, added to
nodeModifyTable.c code to flush pending inserts to the foreign-table
result relation(s) before completing processing of the ModifyTable node,
but the code failed to take into account the case where the INSERT query
has modifying CTEs, leading to incorrect results.
Also, that commit failed to flush pending inserts before firing BEFORE
ROW triggers so that rows are visible to such triggers.
In that commit we scanned through EState's
es_tuple_routing_result_relations or es_opened_result_relations list to
find the foreign-table result relations to which pending inserts are
flushed, but that would be inefficient in some cases. So to fix, 1) add
a List member to EState to record the insert-pending result relations,
and 2) modify nodeModifyTable.c so that it adds the foreign-table result
relation to the list in ExecInsert() if appropriate, and flushes pending
inserts properly using the list where needed.
While here, fix a copy-and-pasteo in a comment in ExecBatchInsert(),
which was added by that commit.
Back-patch to v14 where that commit appeared.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPmGK16qutyCmyJJzgQOhfBq%3DNoGDqTB6O0QBZTihrbqre%2BoxA%40mail.gmail.com
The code has been assuming already in a few places that the initial
recursion nesting depth is 0, and the recent changes in hba.c (mainly
783e8c6) have relies on this assumption in more places. The maximum
recursion nesting level is assumed to be 10 for hba.c and GUCs.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221124090724.n7amf5kpdhx6vb76@jrouhaud
pg_hba.conf and pg_ident.conf gain support for three record keywords:
- "include", to include a file.
- "include_if_exists", to include a file, ignoring it if missing.
- "include_dir", to include a directory of files. These are classified
by name (C locale, mostly) and need to be prefixed by ".conf", hence
following the same rules as GUCs.
This commit relies on the refactoring pieces done in efc9816, ad6c528,
783e8c6 and 1b73d0b, adding a small wrapper to build a list of
TokenizedAuthLines (tokenize_include_file), and the code is shaped to
offer some symmetry with what is done for GUCs with the same options.
pg_hba_file_rules and pg_ident_file_mappings gain a new field called
file_name, to track from which file a record is located, taking
advantage of the addition of rule_number in c591300 to offer an
organized view of the HBA or ident records loaded.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
When building hash indexes using the spool method, tuples are added to the
index page in hashkey order. Because of this, we can safely skip
performing the binary search on the existing tuples on the page to find
the location to insert the tuple based on its hashkey value. For this
case, we can just always put the tuple at the end of the item array as the
tuples will always arrive in hashkey order.
Testing has shown that this can improve hash index build speeds by 5-15%
with a unique set of integer values.
Author: Simon Riggs
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Tested-by: David Zhang, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-GBc5JoG0AneUGPZZW3o4OK5LjBGeKe_icpC3R1McrZWQ@mail.gmail.com
The list of TokenizedAuthLines generated at parsing for the HBA and
ident files is now stored in a static context called tokenize_context,
where only all the parsed tokens are stored. This context is created
when opening the first authentication file of a HBA/ident set (hba_file
or ident_file), and is cleaned up once we are done all the work around
it through a new routine called free_auth_file(). One call of
open_auth_file() should have one matching call of free_auth_file(), the
creation and deletion of the tokenization context is controlled by the
recursion depth of the tokenization.
Rather than having tokenize_auth_file() return a memory context that
includes all the records, the tokenization logic now creates and deletes
one memory context each time this function is called. This will
simplify recursive calls to this routine for the upcoming inclusion
record logic.
While on it, rename tokenize_inc_file() to tokenize_expand_file() as
this would conflict with the upcoming patch that will add inclusion
records for HBA/ident files. An '@' file has its tokens added to an
existing list.
Reloading HBA/indent configuration in a tight loop shows no leaks, as of
one type of test done (with and without -DEXEC_BACKEND).
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y324HvGKiWxW2yxe@paquier.xyz
Some custom table access method may have their tuple format and use custom
executor nodes for their custom scan types. The ability to set a custom slot
would save them from tuple format conversion. Other users of custom executor
nodes may also benefit.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfduJUU6ToecvTyRE_yjxTS80FyPpct4OHaLFk3OEheMTNA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov
We're running out of bits for new permissions. This change doubles the
number of permissions we can accomodate from 16 to 32, so the
forthcoming new ones for vacuum/analyze don't exhaust the pool.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Pass VACUUM parameters (VacuumParams state) to vacuum_set_xid_limits()
directly, rather than passing most individual VacuumParams fields as
separate arguments.
Also make vacuum_set_xid_limits() output parameter symbol names match
those used by its vacuumlazy.c caller.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=TE7gW5DgSahDkf0UEZigFGAoHNNN6EvSrdzC=Kn+hrA@mail.gmail.com
The lwlock wait queue scalability issue fixed in a4adc31f69 was quite hard to
find because of the exponential backoff and because we adjust spins_per_delay
over time within a backend.
To make it easier to find similar issues in the future, add a wait event for
the pg_usleep() in perform_spin_delay(). Showing a wait event while spinning
without sleeping would increase the overhead of spinlocks, which we do not
want.
We may at some later point want to have more granular wait events, but that'd
be a substantial amount of work. This provides at least some insights into
something currently hard to observe.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
https://postgr.es/m/20221120204310.xywrhyxyytsajuuq@awork3.anarazel.de
The Hunspell project moved from Sourceforge to Github sometime
in 2016, so update our links to match the new URL. Backpatch
the doc changes to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DC9A662A-360D-4125-A453-5A6CB9C6C4B4@yesql.se
Backpatch-through: v11
I just spent an annoying amount of time reverse-engineering the
100%-undocumented API between ts_headline and the text search
parser's prsheadline function. Add some commentary about that
while it's fresh in mind. Also remove some unused macros in
wparser_def.c.
While at it, I noticed that when commit 78e73e875 added a
CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS call in TS_execute_recurse, it missed
doing so in the parallel function TS_phrase_execute, which
surely needs one just as much.
Back-patch because of the missing CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS.
Might as well back-patch the rest of this too.
The postmaster normally sends SIGQUIT to force-terminate its
child processes after a child crash or immediate-stop request.
If that doesn't result in child exit within a few seconds,
we follow it up with SIGKILL. This patch provides GUC flags
that allow either of these signals to be replaced with SIGABRT.
On typically-configured Unix systems, that will result in a
core dump being produced for each such child. This can be
useful for debugging problems, although it's not something you'd
want to have on in production due to the risk of disk space
bloat from lots of core files.
The old postmaster -T switch, which sent SIGSTOP in place of
SIGQUIT, is changed to be the same as send_abort_for_crash.
As far as I can tell from the code comments, the intent of
that switch was just to block things for long enough to force
core dumps manually, which seems like an unnecessary extra step.
(Maybe at the time, there was no way to get most kernels to
produce core files with per-PID names, requiring manual core
file renaming after each one. But now it's surely the hard way.)
I also took the opportunity to remove the old postmaster -n
(skip shmem reinit) switch, which hasn't actually done anything
in decades, though the documentation still claimed it did.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2251016.1668797294@sss.pgh.pa.us
This switch impacts 9 patterns related to a SQL-mandated special syntax
for function calls:
- LOCALTIME [ ( typmod ) ]
- LOCALTIMESTAMP [ ( typmod ) ]
- CURRENT_TIME [ ( typmod ) ]
- CURRENT_TIMESTAMP [ ( typmod ) ]
- CURRENT_DATE
Five new entries are added to pg_proc to compensate the removal of
SQLValueFunction to provide backward-compatibility and making this
change transparent for the end-user (for example for the attribute
generated when a keyword is specified in a SELECT or in a FROM clause
without an alias, or when specifying something else than an Iconst to
the parser).
The parser included a set of checks coming from the files in charge of
holding the C functions used for the SQLValueFunction calls (as of
transformSQLValueFunction()), which are now moved within each function's
execution path, so this reduces the dependencies between the execution
and the parsing steps. As of this change, all the SQL keywords use the
same paths for their work, relying only on COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX. Like
fb32748, no performance difference has been noticed, while the perf
profiles get reduced with ExecEvalSQLValueFunction() gone.
Bump catalog version.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker, Ted Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YzaG3MoryCguUOym@paquier.xyz
Until now LWLockDequeueSelf() sequentially searched the list of waiters to see
if the current proc is still is on the list of waiters, or has already been
removed. In extreme workloads, where the wait lists are very long, this leads
to a quadratic behavior. #backends iterating over a list #backends
long. Additionally, the likelihood of needing to call LWLockDequeueSelf() in
the first place also increases with the increased length of the wait queue, as
it becomes more likely that a lock is released while waiting for the wait list
lock, which is held for longer during lock release.
Due to the exponential back-off in perform_spin_delay() this is surprisingly
hard to detect. We should make that easier, e.g. by adding a wait event around
the pg_usleep() - but that's a separate patch.
The fix is simple - track whether a proc is currently waiting in the wait list
or already removed but waiting to be woken up in PGPROC->lwWaiting.
In some workloads with a lot of clients contending for a small number of
lwlocks (e.g. WALWriteLock), the fix can substantially increase throughput.
As the quadratic behavior arguably is a bug, we might want to decide to
backpatch this fix in the future.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221027165914.2hofzp4cvutj6gin@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXktNbG=K8Xi7PSqbofTZozavhaxjatVc14iYaLu4Maag@mail.gmail.com
This commit changes six SQL keywords to use COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX rather
than relying on SQLValueFunction:
- CURRENT_ROLE
- CURRENT_USER
- USER
- SESSION_USER
- CURRENT_CATALOG
- CURRENT_SCHEMA
Among the six, "user", "current_role" and "current_catalog" require
specific SQL functions to allow ruleutils.c to map them to the SQL
keywords these require when using COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX. Having
pg_proc.proname match with the keyword ensures that the compatibility
remains the same when projecting any of these keywords in a FROM clause
to an attribute name when an alias is not specified. This is covered by
the tests added in 2e0d80c, making sure that a correct mapping happens
with each SQL keyword. The three others (current_schema, session_user
and current_user) already have pg_proc entries for this job, so this
brings more consistency between the way such keywords are treated in the
parser, the executor and ruleutils.c.
SQLValueFunction is reduced to half its contents after this change,
simplifying its logic a bit as there is no need to enforce a C collation
anymore for the entries returning a name as a result. I have made a few
performance tests, with a million-ish calls to these keywords without
seeing a difference in run-time or in perf profiles
(ExecEvalSQLValueFunction() is removed from the profiles). The
remaining SQLValueFunctions are now related to timestamps and dates.
Bump catalog version.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YzaG3MoryCguUOym@paquier.xyz
Similar to how the INHERIT option controls whether or not the
permissions of the granted role are automatically available to the
grantee, the new SET permission controls whether or not the grantee
may use the SET ROLE command to assume the privileges of the granted
role.
In addition, the new SET permission controls whether or not it
is possible to transfer ownership of objects to the target role
or to create new objects owned by the target role using commands
such as CREATE DATABASE .. OWNER. We could alternatively have made
this controlled by the INHERIT option, or allow it when either
option is given. An advantage of this approach is that if you
are granted a predefined role with INHERIT TRUE, SET FALSE, you
can't go and create objects owned by that role.
The underlying theory here is that the ability to create objects
as a target role is not a privilege per se, and thus does not
depend on whether you inherit the target role's privileges. However,
it's surely something you could do anyway if you could SET ROLE
to the target role, and thus making it contingent on whether you
have that ability is reasonable.
Design review by Nathan Bossat, Wolfgang Walther, Jeff Davis,
Peter Eisentraut, and Stephen Frost.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmob+zDSRS6JXYrgq0NWdzCXuTNzT5eK54Dn2hhgt17nm8A@mail.gmail.com
Standardize on the name snapshotConflictHorizon for all XID fields from
WAL records that generate recovery conflicts when in hot standby mode.
This supersedes the previous latestRemovedXid naming convention.
The new naming convention places emphasis on how the values are actually
used by REDO routines. How the values are generated during original
execution (details of which vary by record type) is deemphasized. Users
of tools like pg_waldump can now grep for snapshotConflictHorizon to see
all potential sources of recovery conflicts in a standardized way,
without necessarily having to consider which specific record types might
be involved.
Also bring a couple of WAL record types that didn't follow any kind of
naming convention into line. These are heapam's VISIBLE record type and
SP-GiST's VACUUM_REDIRECT record type. Now every WAL record whose REDO
routine calls ResolveRecoveryConflictWithSnapshot() passes through the
snapshotConflictHorizon field from its WAL record. This is follow-up
work to the refactoring from commit 9e540599 that made FREEZE_PAGE WAL
records use a standard snapshotConflictHorizon style XID cutoff.
No bump in XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC, since the underlying format of affected WAL
records doesn't change.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm2CQUmViUq7Opgk=McVREHSOorYaAjR1ZpLYkRN7_dPw@mail.gmail.com
Implement a data structure that is a List of Bitmapsets, which is
essentially a 2-D boolean array except that the rows need not all
be the same width. Operations such as union and intersection are
meaningful for these, just as they are for Bitmapsets. Eventually
we might build many of the same operations that we have written for
Bitmapsets, but for the first use-case we just need a few.
That first use-case is for antijoin detection: reduce_outer_joins
needs to find the set of Vars that are certain to be non-null in a
successfully joined (not null-extended) left join row, and also
find the set of Vars subject to higher-level IS NULL constraints,
and intersect them. We had been doing this by making Lists of
the Var nodes and then using list_intersect, which works but is
pretty inefficient compared to a bitmapset-like intersection.
Potentially it's O(N^2) if there are a lot of Vars involved,
which fortunately there generally aren't; still it's not great.
Moreover, that method requires the Vars of interest to be exactly
equal() in the join condition and the upper IS NULL condition,
which is problematic for my WIP patch that labels Vars according
to which outer joins have possibly nulled them.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/892228.1668437838@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs4-mvPPCJ1W6iK6dD5HiNwoJdi6mZp=-7mE8N9Sh+cd0tQ@mail.gmail.com
Make heapam WAL records that describe freezing performed by VACUUM more
space efficient by storing each distinct "freeze plan" once, alongside
an array of associated page offset numbers (one per freeze plan). The
freeze plans required for most heap pages tend to naturally have a great
deal of redundancy, so this technique is very effective in practice. It
often leads to freeze WAL records that are less than 20% of the size of
equivalent WAL records generated using the previous approach.
The freeze plan concept was introduced by commit 3b97e6823b, which fixed
bugs in VACUUM's handling of MultiXacts. We retain the concept of
freeze plans, but go back to using page offset number arrays. There is
no loss of generality here because deduplication is an additive process
that gets applied mechanically when FREEZE_PAGE WAL records are built.
More than anything else, freeze plan deduplication is an optimization
that reduces the marginal cost of freezing additional tuples on pages
that will need to have at least one or two tuples frozen in any case.
Ongoing work that adds page-level freezing to VACUUM will take full
advantage of the improved cost profile through batching.
Also refactor some of the details surrounding recovery conflicts needed
to REDO freeze records in passing: make original execution responsible
for generating a standard latestRemovedXid cutoff, rather than working
backwards to get the same cutoff in the REDO routine. Bugfix commit
66fbcb0d2e did it the other way around, which is equivalent but obscures
what's going on.
Also rename the cutoff field from the WAL record/struct (rename the
field cutoff_xid to latestRemovedXid to match similar WAL records).
Processing of conflicts by REDO routines is already completely uniform,
so tools like pg_waldump should present the information driving the
process uniformly. There are two remaining WAL record types that still
don't quite follow this convention (heapam's VISIBLE record type and
SP-GiST's VACUUM_REDIRECT record type). They can be brought into line
by later work that totally standardizes how the cutoffs are presented.
Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=XytErMnb8FAyFd+OQEbiipB0Q2FmFdXrggPL4VBnRYQ@mail.gmail.com
This adds a check on the recursion depth when including authentication
configuration files, something that has never been done when processing
'@' files for database and user name lists in pg_hba.conf. On HEAD,
this was leading to a rather confusing error, as of:
FATAL: exceeded maxAllocatedDescs (NN) while trying to open file "/path/blah.conf"
This refactors the code so as the error reported is now the following,
which is the same as for GUCs:
FATAL: could not open file "/path/blah.conf": maximum nesting depth exceeded
This reduces a bit the verbosity of the error message used for files
included in user and database lists, reporting only the file name of
what's failing to load, without mentioning the relative or absolute path
specified after '@' in a HBA file. The absolute path is built upon what
'@' defines anyway, so there is no actual loss of information. This
makes the future inclusion logic much simpler. A follow-up patch will
add an error context to be able to track on which line of which file the
inclusion is failing, to close the loop, providing all the information
needed to know the full chain of events.
This logic has been extracted from a larger patch written by Julien,
rewritten by me to have a unique code path calling AllocateFile() on
authentication files, and is useful on its own. This new interface
will be used later for authentication files included with
@include[_dir,_if_exists], in a follow-up patch.
Author: Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/Y2xUBJ+S+Z0zbxRW@paquier.xyz
Add a NodeTag field to struct Bitmapset. This is free because of
alignment considerations on 64-bit hardware. While it adds some
space on 32-bit machines, we aren't optimizing for that case anymore.
The advantage is that data structures such as Lists of Bitmapsets
are now first-class objects to the Node infrastructure, and don't
require special-case code to handle.
This patch includes removal of one such special case, in indxpath.c:
bms_equal_any() can now be replaced by list_member(). There may be
more existing code that could be simplified, but I didn't look very
hard. We also get to drop the read_write_ignore annotations on a
couple of RelOptInfo fields.
The outfuncs/readfuncs support is arranged so that nothing changes
in the string representation of a Bitmapset field; therefore, this
doesn't need a catversion bump.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/109089.1668197158@sss.pgh.pa.us
Instead of dozens of mostly-duplicate pg_foo_aclcheck() functions,
write one common function object_aclcheck() that can handle almost all
of them. We already have all the information we need, such as which
system catalog corresponds to which catalog table and which column is
the ACL column.
There are a few pg_foo_aclcheck() that don't work via the generic
function and have special APIs, so those stay as is.
I also changed most pg_foo_aclmask() functions to static functions,
since they are not used outside of aclchk.c.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/95c30f96-4060-2f48-98b5-a4392d3b6066@enterprisedb.com
Instead of dozens of mostly-duplicate pg_foo_ownercheck() functions,
write one common function object_ownercheck() that can handle almost
all of them. We already have all the information we need, such as
which system catalog corresponds to which catalog table and which
column is the owner column.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/95c30f96-4060-2f48-98b5-a4392d3b6066@enterprisedb.com
It's safe to mark this as immutable, because it does not depend
on the timezone GUC setting. Oversight in commit 600b04d6b.
(There's an argument that timezone definitions do change from
time to time, but we have not worried about that in marking
other timestamp-related functions; for example AT TIME ZONE
has always been considered immutable. The situation is no
worse than our problems with time-varying locales, surely.)
Przemysław Sztoch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eaa3fabe-50fc-bbe8-b096-ce62ddadab85@sztoch.pl
This routine is designed to write zeros to a file using vectored I/O,
for a size given by its caller, being useful when it comes to
initializing a file with a final size already known.
XLogFileInitInternal() in xlog.c is changed to use this new routine when
initializing WAL segments with zeros (wal_init_zero enabled). Note that
the aligned buffers used for the vectored I/O writes have a size of
XLOG_BLCKSZ, and not BLCKSZ anymore, as pg_pwrite_zeros() relies on
PGAlignedBlock while xlog.c originally used PGAlignedXLogBlock.
This routine will be used in a follow-up patch to do the pre-padding of
WAL segments for pg_receivewal and pg_basebackup when these are not
compressed.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Andres Freund, Thomas Munro, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACUq7nAb7%3DbJNbK3yYmp-SZhJcXFR_pLk8un6XgDzDF3OA%40mail.gmail.com
The code in charge of listing and classifying a set of configuration
files in a directory was located in guc-file.l, being used currently for
GUCs under "include_dir". This code is planned to be used for an
upcoming feature able to include configuration files for ident and HBA
files from a directory, similarly to GUCs. In both cases, the file
names, suffixed by ".conf", have to be ordered alphabetically. This
logic is moved to a new file, called conffiles.c, so as it is easier to
share this facility between GUCs and the HBA/ident parsing logic.
Author: Julien Rouhaud, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y2IgaH5YzIq2b+iR@paquier.xyz
Commit aa0105141 repeated one of the oldest mistakes in our book:
thinking that OID is the same as int32. It isn't of course, and
unsurprisingly the first person who came along with a database
OID above 2 billion broke it. Repair.
Per bug #17677 from Sergey Pankov. Back-patch to v15.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17677-a99fa067d7ed71c9@postgresql.org
Casting the result of palloc etc. to the intended type is more per
project style anyway.
(The fact that cpluspluscheck doesn't notice these problems is
because it doesn't expand any macros, which seems like a troubling
shortcoming. Don't have a good idea about improving that.)
Back-patch to v13, which is as far as the patch applies cleanly;
doesn't seem worth working harder.
David Geier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/aa5d88a3-71f4-3455-11cf-82de0372c941@gmail.com
If we have no special-case code in s_lock.h for the current platform,
but the compiler has __sync_lock_test_and_set, use that instead of
failing. It's unlikely that anybody's __sync_lock_test_and_set
would be so awful as to be worse than our semaphore-based fallback,
but if it is, they can (continue to) use --disable-spinlocks.
This allows removal of the RISC-V special case installed by commit
c32fcac56, which generated exactly the same code but only on that
platform. Usefully, the RISC-V buildfarm animals should now test
at least the int variant of this patch.
I've manually tested both variants on ARM by dint of removing the
ARM-specific stanza. We don't want to drop that, because it already
has some special knowledge and is likely to grow more over time.
Likewise, this is not meant to preclude installing special cases
for other arches if that proves worthwhile.
Per discussion of a request to install the same code for loongarch64.
Like the previous patch, we might as well back-patch to supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/761ac43d44b84d679ba803c2bd947cc0@HSMAILSVR04.hs.handsome.com.cn
We have various requirements when using a dlist_head to keep track of the
number of items in the list. This, traditionally, has been done by
maintaining a counter variable in the calling code. Here we tidy this up
by adding "dclist", which is very similar to dlist but also keeps track of
the number of items stored in the list.
Callers may use the new dclist_count() function when they need to know how
many items are stored. Obtaining the count is an O(1) operation.
For simplicity reasons, dclist and dlist both use dlist_node as their node
type and dlist_iter/dlist_mutable_iter as their iterator type. dclists
have all of the same functionality as dlists except there is no function
named dclist_delete(). To remove an item from a list dclist_delete_from()
must be used. This requires knowing which dclist the given item is stored
in.
Additionally, here we also convert some dlists where additional code
exists to keep track of the number of items stored and to make these use
dclists instead.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrtVxr+FXEX0VbViCFKDGxA3tWDgw9oFewNXCJMmwLjLg@mail.gmail.com
This is similar to 7d25958, and this commit takes care of all the
remaining inconsistencies between the initial value used in the C
variable associated to a GUC and its default value stored in the GUC
tables (as of pg_settings.boot_val).
Some of the initial values of the GUCs updated rely on a compile-time
default. These are refactored so as the GUC table and its C declaration
use the same values. This makes everything consistent with other
places, backend_flush_after, bgwriter_flush_after, port,
checkpoint_flush_after doing so already, for example.
Extracted from a larger patch by Peter Smith. The spots updated in the
modules are from me.
Author: Peter Smith, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Tom Lane, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PtHE0XSfjjRQ6D4v7+dqzCw=d+1a64ujra4EX8aoc_Z+w@mail.gmail.com
Here we add a new 'copy' parameter to tuplesort_getdatum so that we can
instruct the function not to datumCopy() byref Datums before returning.
Similar to 91e9e89dc, this can provide significant performance
improvements in nodeSort when sorting by a single byref column and the
sort's targetlist contains only that column.
This allows us to re-enable Datum sorts for byref types which was disabled
in 3a5817695 due to a reported memory leak.
Additionally, here we slightly optimize DISTINCT aggregates so that we no
longer perform any datumCopy() when we find the current value not to be
distinct from the previous value. Previously the code would always take a
copy of the most recent Datum and pfree the previous value, even when the
values were the same. Testing shows a small but noticeable performance
increase when aggregate transitions are skipped due to the current
transition value being the same as the prior one.
Author: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqS6wC5U==k9Hd26E4EQXH3QR67-T4=Q1rQ36NGvjfVSg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqHonfe9G1cVaKeHbDx70R_zCrM3qP2AGXpGrieSKGnhA@mail.gmail.com
This commit moves pg_pwritev_with_retry(), a convenience wrapper of
pg_writev() able to handle partial writes, to common/file_utils.c so
that the frontend code is able to use it. A first use-case targetted
for this routine is pg_basebackup and pg_receivewal, for the
zero-padding of a newly-initialized WAL segment. This is used currently
in the backend when the GUC wal_init_zero is enabled (default).
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACUq7nAb7=bJNbK3yYmp-SZhJcXFR_pLk8un6XgDzDF3OA@mail.gmail.com
These numbers are strictly-monotone identifiers assigned to each rule
of pg_hba_file_rules and each map of pg_ident_file_mappings when loading
the HBA and ident configuration files, indicating the order in which
they are checked at authentication time, until a match is found.
With only one file loaded currently, this is equivalent to the line
numbers assigned to the entries loaded if one wants to know their order,
but this becomes mandatory once the inclusion of external files is
added to the HBA and ident files to be able to know in which order the
rules and/or maps are applied at authentication. Note that NULL is used
when a HBA or ident entry cannot be parsed or validated, aka when an
error exists, contrary to the line number.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
This has the advantage to limit the presence of the GUC values
hba_file and ident_file to the code paths where these files are loaded,
easing the introduction of an upcoming feature aimed at adding inclusion
logic for files and directories in HBA and ident files.
Note that this needs the addition of the source file name to HbaLine, in
addition to the line number, which is something needed by the backend in
two places of auth.c (authentication failure details and auth_id log
when log_connections is enabled).
While on it, adjust a log generated on authentication failure to report
the name of the actual HBA file on which the connection attempt matched,
where the line number and the raw line written in the HBA file were
already included. This was previously hardcoded as pg_hba.conf, which
would be incorrect when a custom value is used at postmaster startup for
the GUC hba_file.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
Specifically, when pg_basebackup is invoked with -Tx=y, don't error
out if x could plausibly be an absolute path either on Windows or on
non-Windows systems. We don't know whether the remote system is
running the same OS as the local system, so it's not appropriate to
assume that our local rule about absolute pathnames is the same as
the rule on the remote system.
Patch by me, reviewed by Tom Lane, Andrew Dunstan, and
Davinder Singh.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoY+jC3YiskomvYKDPK3FbrmsDU7_8+wMHt02HOdJeRb0g@mail.gmail.com
AuthToken gains a regular expression, and IdentLine is changed so as it
uses an AuthToken rather than tracking separately the ident user string
used for the regex compilation and its generated regex_t. In the case
of pg_ident.conf, a set of AuthTokens is built in the pre-parsing phase
of the file, and an extra regular expression is compiled when building
the list of IdentLines, after checking the sanity of the fields in a
pre-parsed entry.
The logic in charge of computing and executing regular expressions is
now done in a new set of routines called respectively
regcomp_auth_token() and regexec_auth_token() that are wrappers around
pg_regcomp() and pg_regexec(), working on AuthTokens. While on it, this
patch adds a routine able to free an AuthToken, free_auth_token(), to
simplify a bit the logic around the requirement of using a specific free
routine for computed regular expressions. Note that there are no
functional or behavior changes introduced by this commit.
The goal of this patch is to ease the use of regular expressions with
more items of pg_hba.conf (user list, database list, potentially
hostnames) where AuthTokens are used extensively. This will be tackled
later in a separate patch.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fff0d7c1-8ad4-76a1-9db3-0ab6ec338bf7@amazon.com
These routines have been renamed in a19e5ce. There is no need to keep
the compatibility declarations on HEAD, as once an extension moves to
the new routine name when compiling with v16~ the code would work the
same way when recompiled on v15. No backpatch to v15 for this one,
because ABI compatibility has to be maintained there.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221013194820.ciktb2sbbpw7cljm@awork3.anarazel.de
Per discussion, the existing routine name able to initialize a SRF
function with materialize mode is unpopular, so rename it. Equally, the
flags of this function are renamed, as of:
- SRF_SINGLE_USE_EXPECTED -> MAT_SRF_USE_EXPECTED_DESC
- SRF_SINGLE_BLESS -> MAT_SRF_BLESS
The previous function and flags introduced in 9e98583 are kept around
for compatibility purposes, so as any extension code already compiled
with v15 continues to work as-is. The declarations introduced here for
compatibility will be removed from HEAD in a follow-up commit.
The new names have been suggested by Andres Freund and Melanie
Plageman.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221013194820.ciktb2sbbpw7cljm@awork3.anarazel.de
Backpatch-through: 15
When creating a cast that uses a conversion function, we've
historically allowed the input and result types to be
binary-compatible with the function's input and result types,
rather than necessarily being identical. This means that the new
cast is logically dependent on the binary-compatible cast or casts
that it references: if those are defined by pg_cast entries, and you
try to restore the new cast without having defined them, it'll fail.
Hence, we should make pg_depend entries to record these dependencies
so that pg_dump knows that there is an ordering requirement.
This is not the only place where we allow such shortcuts; aggregate
functions for example are similarly lax, and in principle should gain
similar dependencies. However, for now it seems sufficient to fix
the cast-versus-cast case, as pg_dump's other ordering heuristics
should keep it out of trouble for other object types.
Per report from David Turoň; thanks also to Robert Haas for
preliminary investigation. I considered back-patching, but
seeing that this issue has existed for many years without
previous reports, it's not clear it's worth the trouble.
Moreover, back-patching wouldn't be enough to ensure that the
new pg_depend entries exist in existing databases anyway.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OF0A160F3E.578B15D1-ONC12588DA.003E4857-C12588DA.0045A428@notes.linuxbox.cz
In the latest version of Apple's macOS SDK, <sys/socket.h>
fails to compile if "REF" is #define'd as something.
Apple may or may not agree that this is a bug, and even if
they do accept the bug report I filed, they probably won't
fix it very quickly. In the meantime, our back branches will all
fail to compile gram.y. v15 and HEAD currently escape the problem
thanks to the refactoring done in 98e93a1fc, but that's purely
accidental. Moreover, since that patch removed a widely-visible
inclusion of <netdb.h>, back-patching it seems too likely to break
third-party code.
Instead, change the token's code name to REF_P, following our usual
convention for naming parser tokens that are likely to have symbol
conflicts. The effects of that should be localized to the grammar
and immediately surrounding files, so it seems like a safer answer.
Per project policy that we want to keep recently-out-of-support
branches buildable on modern systems, back-patch all the way to 9.2.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1803927.1665938411@sss.pgh.pa.us
It can be useful to know when a relation has last been used, e.g., when
evaluating whether an index is still required. It was already possible to
infer the time of the last usage by tracking, e.g.,
pg_stat_all_indexes.idx_scan over time. But far from everybody does so.
To make it easier to detect the last time a relation has been scanned, track
that time in each relation's pgstat entry. To minimize overhead a) the
timestamp is updated only when the backend pending stats entry is flushed to
shared stats b) the last transaction's stop timestamp is used as the
timestamp.
Bumps catalog and stats format versions.
Author: Dave Page <dpage@pgadmin.org>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bruce Momjian <bruce@momjian.us>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+OCxozrVHNFVEPkweUHMZje+t1tfY816d9MZYc6eZwOOusOaQ@mail.gmail.com
The previous patch made addition of new GUCs cheap, but other GUC
operations aren't improved and indeed get a bit slower, because
hash_seq_search() is slower than just scanning a pointer array.
However, most performance-critical GUC operations only need
to touch a relatively small fraction of the GUCs; especially
so for AtEOXact_GUC(). We can improve matters at the cost
of a bit more space by adding dlist or slist links to the
GUC data structures. This patch invents lists that track
(1) all GUCs with non-default "source";
(2) all GUCs with nonempty state stack (implying they've
been changed in the current transaction);
(3) all GUCs due for reporting to the client.
All of guc.c's performance-critical cases can make use of one or
another of these lists to avoid searching the whole hash table.
In particular, the stack list means that transaction end
doesn't take time proportional to the number of GUCs, but
only to the number changed in the current transaction.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
This gets rid of bsearch() in favor of hashed lookup. The main
advantage is that it becomes far cheaper to add new GUCs, since
we needn't re-sort the pointer array. Adding N new GUCs had
been O(N^2 log N), but now it's closer to O(N). We need to
sort only in SHOW ALL and equivalent functions, which are
hopefully not performance-critical to anybody.
Also, merge GetNumConfigOptions() into get_guc_variables(),
because in a world where the set of GUCs isn't fairly static
you really want to consider those two results as tied together
not independent.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
The only real argument for using malloc directly was that we needed
the ability to not throw error on OOM; but mcxt.c grew that feature
awhile ago.
Keeping the data in a memory context improves accountability and
debuggability --- for example, without this it's almost impossible
to detect memory leaks in the GUC code with anything less costly
than valgrind. Moreover, the next patch in this series will add a
hash table for GUC lookup, and it'd be pretty silly to be using
palloc-dependent hash facilities alongside malloc'd storage of the
underlying data.
This is a bit invasive though, in particular causing an API break
for GUC check hooks that want to modify the GUC's value or use an
"extra" data structure. They must now use guc_malloc() and
guc_free() instead of malloc() and free(). Failure to change
affected code will result in assertion failures or worse; but
thanks to recent effort in the mcxt infrastructure, it shouldn't
be too hard to diagnose such oversights (at least in assert-enabled
builds).
One note is that this changes ParseLongOption() to return short-lived
palloc'd not malloc'd data. There wasn't any caller for which the
previous definition was better.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
We lack a version of repalloc() that supports MCXT_ALLOC_NO_OOM
semantics, so invent repalloc_extended() with the usual set of
flags. repalloc_huge() becomes a legacy wrapper for that.
Also, fix dynahash.c so that it can support HASH_ENTER_NULL
requests when using the default palloc-based allocator.
The only reason it didn't do that already was the lack of the
MCXT_ALLOC_NO_OOM option when that code was written, ages ago.
While here, simplify a few overcomplicated tests in mcxt.c.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit 3d956d956 allowed the COPY, but it's done by inserting individual
rows to the foreign table, so it can be inefficient due to the overhead
caused by each round-trip to the foreign server. To improve performance
of the COPY in such a case, this patch allows batch insertion, by
extending the multi-insert machinery in CopyFrom() to the foreign-table
case so that we insert multiple rows to the foreign table at once using
the FDW callback routine added by commit b663a4136. This patch also
allows this for postgres_fdw. It is enabled by the "batch_size" option
added by commit b663a4136, which is disabled by default.
When doing batch insertion, we update progress of the COPY command after
performing the FDW callback routine, to count rows not suppressed by the
FDW as well as a BEFORE ROW INSERT trigger. For consistency, this patch
changes the timing of updating it for plain tables: previously, we
updated it immediately after adding each row to the multi-insert buffer,
but we do so only after writing the rows stored in the buffer out to the
table using table_multi_insert(), which I think would be consistent even
with non-batching mode, because in that mode we update it after writing
each row out to the table using table_tuple_insert().
Andrey Lepikhov, heavily revised by me, with review from Ian Barwick,
Andrey Lepikhov, and Zhihong Yu.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bc489202-9855-7550-d64c-ad2d83c24867%40postgrespro.ru
This file needs xlogreader.h only for the XLogReaderState typedef; but
we can dodge that by forward-declaring it. Many files use xlog.h for
reasons other than reading WAL, and it's not good to force all those
files to include xlogreader.h, so take it out.
Surprisingly, there is no fallout in core code from making this change.
Perhaps external code will have to start including xlogreader.h.
Make a common replication origin name formatting function to replace
multiple snprintf() expressions. This also includes logic previously done
by ReplicationOriginNameForTablesync().
This makes the code to generate the origin name consistent among apply
worker and tablesync worker.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-By: Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPsa8hhfSE6ozUK-ih7GkQziAVAf4f3bqiXEj2nQiu-43g%40mail.gmail.com
This is useful as a way for extensions to process COPY TO rows in the
way they see fit (say auditing, analytics, backend, etc.) without the
need to invoke an external process running as the OS user running the
backend through PROGRAM that requires superuser rights. COPY FROM
already provides a similar callback for logical replication. For COPY
TO, the callback is triggered when we are ready to send a row in
CopySendEndOfRow(), which is the same code path as when sending a row
to a frontend or a pipe/file.
A small test module, test_copy_callbacks, is added to provide some
coverage for this facility.
Author: Bilva Sanaba, Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/253C21D1-FCEB-41D9-A2AF-E6517015B7D7@amazon.com
Remove the Trap and TrapMacro macros, which were nearly unused
and confusingly had the opposite condition polarity from the
otherwise-functionally-equivalent Assert macros.
Having done that, it's very hard to justify carrying the errorType
argument of ExceptionalCondition, so drop that too, and just
let it assume everything's an Assert. This saves about 64K
of code space as of current HEAD.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3928703.1665345117@sss.pgh.pa.us
Instead of Abs() for int64, use the C standard functions labs() or
llabs() as appropriate. Define a small wrapper around them that
matches our definition of int64. (labs() is C90, llabs() is C99.)
Reviewed-by: Zhang Mingli <zmlpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4beb42b5-216b-bce8-d452-d924d5794c63%40enterprisedb.com
Previously PgStat_StatReplSlotEntry contained the slotname, which was mainly
used when writing out the stats during shutdown, to identify the slot in the
serialized data (at runtime the index in ReplicationSlotCtl->replication_slots
is used, but that can change during a restart). Unfortunately the slotname was
overwritten when the slot's stats were reset.
That turned out to only cause "real" problems if the slot was active during
the reset, triggering an assertion failure at the next
pgstat_report_replslot(). In other paths the stats were re-initialized during
pgstat_acquire_replslot().
Fix this by removing slotname from PgStat_StatReplSlotEntry. Instead we can
get the slot's name from the slot itself. Besides fixing a bug, this also is
architecturally cleaner (a name is not really statistics). This is safe
because stats, for a slot removed while shut down, will not be restored at
startup.
In 15 the slotname is not removed, but renamed, to avoid changing the stats
format. In master, bump PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.
This commit does not contain a test for the fix. I think this can only be
tested by a tap test starting pg_recvlogical in the background and checking
pg_recvlogical's output. That type of test is notoriously hard to be reliable,
so committing it shortly before the release is wrapped seems like a bad idea.
Reported-by: Jaime Casanova <jcasanov@systemguards.com.ec>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YxfagaTXUNa9ggLb@ahch-to
Backpatch: 15-, where the bug was introduced in 5891c7a8ed
Commit c6e0fe1f2 was a shade too trusting that any pointer passed
to pfree, repalloc, etc will point at a valid chunk. Notably,
passing a pointer that was actually obtained from malloc tended
to result in obscure assertion failures, if not worse. (On FreeBSD
I've seen such mistakes take down the entire cluster, seemingly as
a result of clobbering shared memory.)
To improve matters, extend the mcxt_methods[] array so that it
has entries for every possible MemoryContextMethodID bit-pattern,
with the currently unassigned ID codes pointing to error-reporting
functions. Then, fiddle with the ID assignments so that patterns
likely to be associated with bad pointers aren't valid ID codes.
In particular, we should avoid assigning bit patterns 000 (zeroed
memory) and 111 (wipe_mem'd memory).
It turns out that on glibc (Linux), malloc uses chunk headers that
have flag bits in the same place we keep MemoryContextMethodID,
and that the bit patterns 000, 001, 010 are the only ones we'll
see as long as the backend isn't threaded. So we can have very
robust detection of pfree'ing a malloc-assigned block on that
platform, at least so long as we can refrain from using up those
ID codes. On other platforms, we don't have such a good guarantee,
but keeping 000 reserved will be enough to catch many such cases.
While here, make GetMemoryChunkMethodID() local to mcxt.c, as there
seems no need for it to be exposed even in memutils_internal.h.
Patch by me, with suggestions from Andres Freund and David Rowley.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2910981.1665080361@sss.pgh.pa.us
This substantially speeds up building for windows, due to the vast amount of
headers included via windows.h. A cross build from linux targetting mingw goes
from
994.11user 136.43system 0:31.58elapsed 3579%CPU
to
422.41user 89.05system 0:14.35elapsed 3562%CPU
The wins on windows are similar-ish (but I don't have a system at hand just
now for actual numbers). Targetting other operating systems the wins are far
smaller (tested linux, macOS, FreeBSD).
For now precompiled headers are disabled by default, it's not clear how well
they work on all platforms. E.g. on FreeBSD gcc doesn't seem to have working
support, but clang does.
When doing a full build precompiled headers are only beneficial for targets
with multiple .c files, as meson builds a separate precompiled header for each
target (so that different compilation options take effect). This commit
therefore only changes target with at least two .c files to use precompiled
headers.
Because this commit adds b_pch=false to the default_options new build
directories will have precompiled headers disabled by default, however
existing build directories will continue use the default value of b_pch, which
is true.
Note that using precompiled headers with ccache requires setting
CCACHE_SLOPPINESS=pch_defines,time_macros to get hits.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKG+50eOUbN++ocDc0Qnp9Pvmou23DSXu=ZA6fepOcftKqA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c5736f70-bb6d-8d25-e35c-e3d886e4e905@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190826054000.GE7005%40paquier.xyz
MemoryContextContains is no longer reliable in the wake of c6e0fe1f2,
because there's no longer very much redundancy in chunk headers.
(It wasn't *completely* reliable even before that, as there was a
chance of a false positive if you passed it something that didn't
point to an mcxt chunk at all. But it was generally good enough.)
Hence, remove it. There is no remaining core code that requires it.
Extensions that have been using it might be able to substitute a
test like "GetMemoryChunkContext(ptr) == context", recognizing that
this explicitly requires that the pointer point to some chunk.
Tom Lane and David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1913788.1664898906@sss.pgh.pa.us
ts_locale.c omitted support for "isalnum" tests, perhaps on the
grounds that there were initially no use-cases for that. However,
both ltree and pg_trgm need such tests, and we do also have one
use-case now in the core backend. The workaround of testing
isalpha and isdigit separately seems quite inefficient, especially
when dealing with multibyte characters; so let's fill in the
missing support.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2548310.1664999615@sss.pgh.pa.us
This optional parameter can be specified in cases where there are nested
PG_TRY() statements within a function in order to stop the compiler from
issuing warnings about shadowed local variables when compiling with
-Wshadow. The optional parameter is used as a suffix on the variable
names declared within the PG_TRY(), PG_CATCH(), PG_FINALLY() and
PG_END_TRY() macros. The parameter, if specified, must be the same in
each component macro of the given PG_TRY() block.
This also adjusts the single case where we have nested PG_TRY() statements
to add a parameter to the inner-most PG_TRY().
This reduces the number of compiler warnings when compiling with
-Wshadow=compatible-local from 5 down to 1.
Author: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqWGMdB_pATeUqE=JCtNqNxObPOJ00jFEa2_sZ20j_Wvg@mail.gmail.com
In a similar effort to f01592f91, here we mostly rename shadowed local
variables to remove the warnings produced when compiling with
-Wshadow=compatible-local.
This fixes 63 warnings and leaves just 5.
Author: Justin Pryzby, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Discussion https://postgr.es/m/20220817145434.GC26426%40telsasoft.com
This reverts commit db0d67db24 and
several follow-on fixes. The idea of making a cost-based choice
of the order of the sorting columns is not fundamentally unsound,
but it requires cost information and data statistics that we don't
really have. For example, relying on procost to distinguish the
relative costs of different sort comparators is pretty pointless
so long as most such comparator functions are labeled with cost 1.0.
Moreover, estimating the number of comparisons done by Quicksort
requires more than just an estimate of the number of distinct values
in the input: you also need some idea of the sizes of the larger
groups, if you want an estimate that's good to better than a factor of
three or so. That's data that's often unknown or not very reliable.
Worse, to arrive at estimates of the number of calls made to the
lower-order-column comparison functions, the code needs to make
estimates of the numbers of distinct values of multiple columns,
which are necessarily even less trustworthy than per-column stats.
Even if all the inputs are perfectly reliable, the cost algorithm
as-implemented cannot offer useful information about how to order
sorting columns beyond the point at which the average group size
is estimated to drop to 1.
Close inspection of the code added by db0d67db2 shows that there
are also multiple small bugs. These could have been fixed, but
there's not much point if we don't trust the estimates to be
accurate in-principle.
Finally, the changes in cost_sort's behavior made for very large
changes (often a factor of 2 or so) in the cost estimates for all
sorting operations, not only those for multi-column GROUP BY.
That naturally changes plan choices in many situations, and there's
precious little evidence to show that the changes are for the better.
Given the above doubts about whether the new estimates are really
trustworthy, it's hard to summon much confidence that these changes
are better on the average.
Since we're hard up against the release deadline for v15, let's
revert these changes for now. We can always try again later.
Note: in v15, I left T_PathKeyInfo in place in nodes.h even though
it's unreferenced. Removing it would be an ABI break, and it seems
a bit late in the release cycle for that.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB586665EB5FB2C3807E893941F5579@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Up to now, the ID values returned by pg_stat_get_backend_idset() and
used by pg_stat_get_backend_activity() and allied functions were just
indexes into a local array of sessions seen by the last stats refresh.
This is problematic for a few reasons. The "ID" of a session can vary
over its existence, which is surprising. Also, while these numbers
often match the "backend ID" used for purposes like temp schema
assignment, that isn't reliably true. We can fairly cheaply switch
things around to make these numbers actually be the sessions' backend
IDs. The added test case illustrates that with this definition, the
temp schema used by a given session can be obtained given its PID.
While here, delete some dead code that guarded against getting
a NULL return from pgstat_fetch_stat_local_beentry(). That can't
happen as long as the caller is careful to pass an in-range array
index, as all the callers are. (This code may not have been dead
when written, but it surely is now.)
Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220815205811.GA250990@nathanxps13
SYSTEM_USER is a reserved keyword of the SQL specification that,
roughly described, is aimed at reporting some information about the
system user who has connected to the database server. It may include
implementation-specific information about the means by the user
connected, like an authentication method.
This commit implements SYSTEM_USER as of auth_method:identity, where
"auth_method" is a keyword about the authentication method used to log
into the server (like peer, md5, scram-sha-256, gss, etc.) and
"identity" is the authentication identity as introduced by 9afffcb (peer
sets authn to the OS user name, gss to the user principal, etc.). This
format has been suggested by Tom Lane.
Note that thanks to d951052, SYSTEM_USER is available to parallel
workers.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Joe Conway, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7e692b8c-0b11-45db-1cad-3afc5b57409f@amazon.com
We'd like to use precompiled headers on windows to reduce compile times. Right
now we rely on defining UMDF_USING_NTSTATUS before including postgres.h in a few
select places - which doesn't work with precompiled headers. Instead define
it globally.
When UMDF_USING_NTSTATUS is defined we need to explicitly include ntstatus.h,
winternl.h to get a comparable set of symbols. Right now these includes would
be required in a number of non-platform-specific .c files - to avoid that,
include them in win32_port.h. Based on my measurements that doesn't increase
compile times measurably.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220927011951.j3h4o7n6bhf7dwau@awork3.anarazel.de
Commits cf112c12 and a0dc8271 were a little too hasty in getting rid of
the pg_ prefixes where we use pread(), pwrite() and vectored variants.
We dropped support for ancient Unixes where we needed to use lseek() to
implement replacements for those, but it turns out that Windows also
changes the current position even when you pass in an offset to
ReadFile() and WriteFile() if the file handle is synchronous, despite
its documentation saying otherwise.
Switching to asynchronous file handles would fix that, but have other
complications. For now let's just put back the pg_ prefix and add some
comments to highlight the non-standard side-effect, which we can now
describe as Windows-only.
Reported-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220923202439.GA1156054%40nathanxps13
There are still some alignment-related failures in the buildfarm,
which might or might not be able to be fixed quickly, but I've also
just realized that it increased the size of many WAL records by 4 bytes
because a block reference contains a RelFileLocator. The effect of that
hasn't been studied or discussed, so revert for now.
SharedInvalSmgrMsg can't require 8-byte alignment, because then
SharedInvalidationMessage will require 8-byte alignment, which will
then cause ParseCommitRecord to fail on machines that are picky
about alignment, because it assumes that everything that gets
packed into a commit record requires only 4-byte alignment.
Another problem with 05d4cbf9b6.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/3825454.1664310917@sss.pgh.pa.us
The previous macro implementations just cast the argument to a target
type but did not check whether the input type was appropriate. The
function implementation can do better type checking of the input type.
For the *GetDatumFast() macros, converting to an inline function
doesn't work in the !USE_FLOAT8_BYVAL case, but we can use
AssertVariableIsOfTypeMacro() to get a similar level of type checking.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/8528fb7e-0aa2-6b54-85fb-0c0886dbd6ed%40enterprisedb.com
RelFileNumbers are now assigned using a separate counter, instead of
being assigned from the OID counter. This counter never wraps around:
if all 2^56 possible RelFileNumbers are used, an internal error
occurs. As the cluster is limited to 2^64 total bytes of WAL, this
limitation should not cause a problem in practice.
If the counter were 64 bits wide rather than 56 bits wide, we would
need to increase the width of the BufferTag, which might adversely
impact buffer lookup performance. Also, this lets us use bigint for
pg_class.relfilenode and other places where these values are exposed
at the SQL level without worrying about overflow.
This should remove the need to keep "tombstone" files around until
the next checkpoint when relations are removed. We do that to keep
RelFileNumbers from being recycled, but now that won't happen
anyway. However, this patch doesn't actually change anything in
this area; it just makes it possible for a future patch to do so.
Dilip Kumar, based on an idea from Andres Freund, who also reviewed
some earlier versions of the patch. Further review and some
wordsmithing by me. Also reviewed at various points by Ashutosh
Sharma, Vignesh C, Amul Sul, Álvaro Herrera, and Tom Lane.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobp7+7kmi4gkq7Y+4AM9fTvL+O1oQ4-5gFTT+6Ng-dQ=g@mail.gmail.com
Previously, these were declared in postgres_ext.h, but they are not
needed nearly so widely as the OID declarations, so that doesn't
necessarily make sense. Also, because postgres_ext.h is included
before most of c.h has been processed, the previous location creates
some problems for a pending patch.
Patch by me, reviewed by Dilip Kumar.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYc8oevMqRokZQ4y_6aRn-7XQny1JBr5DyWR_jiFtONHw@mail.gmail.com
Push the units fields over to the left so that all the single-bit
flags can be together. I considered rearranging the single-bit
flags to try to group flags with similar purposes, but eventually
decided that that involved too many judgment calls.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17385-9ee529fb091f0ce5@postgresql.org
Previously, the transaction-property GUCs such as transaction_isolation
could be reset after starting a transaction, because we marked them
as GUC_NO_RESET_ALL but still allowed a targeted RESET. That leads to
assertion failures or worse, because those properties aren't supposed
to change after we've acquired a transaction snapshot.
There are some NO_RESET_ALL variables for which RESET is okay, so
we can't just redefine the semantics of that flag. Instead introduce
a separate GUC_NO_RESET flag. Mark "seed", as well as the transaction
property GUCs, as GUC_NO_RESET.
We have to disallow GUC_ACTION_SAVE as well as straight RESET, because
otherwise a function having a "SET transaction_isolation" clause can
still break things: the end-of-function restore action is equivalent
to a RESET.
No back-patch, as it's conceivable that someone is doing something
this patch will forbid (like resetting one of these GUCs at transaction
start, or "CREATE FUNCTION ... SET transaction_read_only = 1") and not
running into problems with it today. Given how long we've had this
issue and not noticed, the side effects in non-assert builds can't be
too serious.
Per bug #17385 from Andrew Bille.
Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17385-9ee529fb091f0ce5@postgresql.org
This was used as the returned result type of the generated contents for
the backup_label and backup history files. This is replaced by a simple
string, reducing the cleanup burden of all the callers of
build_backup_content().
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YzERvNPaZivHEKZJ@paquier.xyz
This change simplifies some of the logic related to the generation and
creation of the backup_label and backup history files, which has become
unnecessarily complicated since the removal of the exclusive backup mode
in commit 39969e2. The code was previously generating the contents of
these files as a string (start phase for the backup_label and stop phase
for the backup history file), one problem being that the contents of the
backup_label string were scanned to grab some of its internal contents
at the stop phase.
This commit changes the logic so as we store the data required to build
these files in an intermediate structure named BackupState. The
backup_label file and backup history file strings are generated when
they are ready to be sent back to the client. Both files are now
generated with the same code path. While on it, this commit renames
some variables for clarity.
Two new files named xlogbackup.{c,h} are introduced in this commit, to
remove from xlog.c some of the logic around base backups. Note that
more could be moved to this new set of files.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXWwTDgJqCjdaPyfR7djwm6SrybGcrZyrvojzcsmt4FFw@mail.gmail.com
The node types A_Const, Constraint, and A_Expr had custom output
functions, but no read functions were implemented so far.
The A_Expr output format had to be tweaked a bit to make it easier to
parse.
Be a bit more cautious about applying strncmp to unterminated strings.
Also error out if an unrecognized enum value is found in each case,
instead of just printing a placeholder value. That was maybe ok for
debugging but won't work if we want to have robust round-tripping.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4159834.1657405226@sss.pgh.pa.us
Autoconf is showing its age, fewer and fewer contributors know how to wrangle
it. Recursive make has a lot of hard to resolve dependency issues and slow
incremental rebuilds. Our home-grown MSVC build system is hard to maintain for
developers not using Windows and runs tests serially. While these and other
issues could individually be addressed with incremental improvements, together
they seem best addressed by moving to a more modern build system.
After evaluating different build system choices, we chose to use meson, to a
good degree based on the adoption by other open source projects.
We decided that it's more realistic to commit a relatively early version of
the new build system and mature it in tree.
This commit adds an initial version of a meson based build system. It supports
building postgres on at least AIX, FreeBSD, Linux, macOS, NetBSD, OpenBSD,
Solaris and Windows (however only gcc is supported on aix, solaris). For
Windows/MSVC postgres can now be built with ninja (faster, particularly for
incremental builds) and msbuild (supporting the visual studio GUI, but
building slower).
Several aspects (e.g. Windows rc file generation, PGXS compatibility, LLVM
bitcode generation, documentation adjustments) are done in subsequent commits
requiring further review. Other aspects (e.g. not installing test-only
extensions) are not yet addressed.
When building on Windows with msbuild, builds are slower when using a visual
studio version older than 2019, because those versions do not support
MultiToolTask, required by meson for intra-target parallelism.
The plan is to remove the MSVC specific build system in src/tools/msvc soon
after reaching feature parity. However, we're not planning to remove the
autoconf/make build system in the near future. Likely we're going to keep at
least the parts required for PGXS to keep working around until all supported
versions build with meson.
Some initial help for postgres developers is at
https://wiki.postgresql.org/wiki/Meson
With contributions from Thomas Munro, John Naylor, Stone Tickle and others.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-By: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20211012083721.hvixq4pnh2pixr3j@alap3.anarazel.de
Make sure that function declarations use names that exactly match the
corresponding names from function definitions for several "lexer
adjacent" backend functions.
These functions were missed by recent commits because they were obscured
by clang-tidy warnings about functions whose signature is directly under
the control of the lexer (flex seems to always generate function
declarations with unnamed parameters). We probably can't fix most of
the warnings it generates for translation units that get built from .l
and .y files, but we can at least do this much.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJt9CMM9KJTMjJh_zbL5hD9oX44qdJ4aqZtjFi-zA3Tg@mail.gmail.com
Previously the following snprintf() wrappers:
* ReplicationSlotNameForTablesync()
* ReplicationOriginNameForTablesync()
... used int as a second argument of snprintf() while the actual type of it
is size_t. Although it doesn't fail at present better replace it with Size
for consistency with the rest of the system.
Author: Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-By: Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPsa8hhfSE6ozUK-ih7GkQziAVAf4f3bqiXEj2nQiu-43g%40mail.gmail.com
Visual Studio 2015+ has support for a macro to control the alignement of
structures as of __declspec(align(#)), and this commit adds a definition
of pg_attribute_aligned() based on that. It happens that this was
already used in the implementation of atomics for MSVC. Note that there
is still no definition fo pg_attribute_packed(), so this does not impact
itemptr.h.
Author: James Coleman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAaqYe-HbtZvR3msoMtk+hYW2S0e0OapzMW8icSMYTMA+mN8Aw@mail.gmail.com
expression_tree_walker and allied functions have traditionally
declared their callback functions as, say, "bool (*walker) ()"
to allow for variation in the declared types of the callback
functions' context argument. This is apparently going to be
forbidden by the next version of the C standard, and the latest
version of clang warns about that. In any case it's always
been pretty poor for error-detection purposes, so fixing it is
a good thing to do.
What we want to do is change the callback argument declarations to
be like "bool (*walker) (Node *node, void *context)", which is
correct so far as expression_tree_walker and friends are concerned,
but not change the actual callback functions. Strict compliance with
the C standard would require changing them to declare their arguments
as "void *context" and then cast to the appropriate context struct
type internally. That'd be very invasive and it would also introduce
a bunch of opportunities for future bugs, since we'd no longer have
any check that the correct sort of context object is passed by outside
callers or internal recursion cases. Therefore, we're just going
to ignore the standard's position that "void *" isn't necessarily
compatible with struct pointers. No machine built in the last forty
or so years actually behaves that way, so it's not worth introducing
bug hazards for compatibility with long-dead hardware.
Therefore, to silence these compiler warnings, introduce a layer of
macro wrappers that cast the supplied function name to the official
argument type. Thanks to our use of -Wcast-function-type, this will
still produce a warning if the supplied function is seriously
incompatible with the required signature, without going as far as
the official spec restriction does.
This method fixes the problem without any need for source code changes
outside nodeFuncs.h/.c. However, it is an ABI break because the
physically called functions now have names ending in "_impl". Hence
we can only fix it this way in HEAD. In the back branches, we'll have
to settle for disabling -Wdeprecated-non-prototype.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGKpHPDTv67Y+s6yiC8KH5OXeDg6a-twWo_xznKTcG0kSA@mail.gmail.com
Fix selfuncs.h cpluspluscheck complaint, without reintroducing a
parameter name inconsistency (restore the original declaration names,
and then make corresponding function definitions consistent with that).
Oversight in commit a601366a.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reported-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Make sure that function declarations use names that exactly match the
corresponding names from function definitions in optimizer, parser,
utility, libpq, and "commands" code, as well as in remaining library
code. Do the same for all code related to frontend programs (with the
exception of pg_dump/pg_dumpall related code).
Like other recent commits that cleaned up function parameter names, this
commit was written with help from clang-tidy. Later commits will handle
ecpg and pg_dump/pg_dumpall.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJt9CMM9KJTMjJh_zbL5hD9oX44qdJ4aqZtjFi-zA3Tg@mail.gmail.com
Make sure that function declarations use names that exactly match the
corresponding names from function definitions in storage, catalog,
access method, executor, and logical replication code, as well as in
miscellaneous utility/library code.
Like other recent commits that cleaned up function parameter names, this
commit was written with help from clang-tidy. Later commits will do the
same for other parts of the codebase.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJt9CMM9KJTMjJh_zbL5hD9oX44qdJ4aqZtjFi-zA3Tg@mail.gmail.com
Make sure that function declarations use names that exactly match the
corresponding names from function definitions. Having parameter names
that are reliably consistent in this way will make it easier to reason
about groups of related C functions from the same translation unit as a
module. It will also make certain refactoring tasks easier.
Like other recent commits that cleaned up function parameter names, this
commit was written with help from clang-tidy. Later commits will do the
same for other parts of the codebase.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJt9CMM9KJTMjJh_zbL5hD9oX44qdJ4aqZtjFi-zA3Tg@mail.gmail.com
Make regex code consistently use named parameters in function
declarations. Also make sure that parameter names from each function's
declaration match corresponding definition parameter names.
This makes Henry Spencer's regex code follow Postgres coding standards.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJt9CMM9KJTMjJh_zbL5hD9oX44qdJ4aqZtjFi-zA3Tg@mail.gmail.com
The API contract for planstate_tree_walker() callbacks is that they
take a PlanState pointer and a context pointer. Somebody figured
they could save a couple lines of code by ignoring that, and passing
ExecShutdownNode itself as the walker even though it has but one
argument. Somewhat remarkably, we've gotten away with that so far.
However, it seems clear that the upcoming C2x standard means to
forbid such cases, and compilers that actively break such code
likely won't be far behind. So spend the extra few lines of code
to do it honestly with a separate walker function.
In HEAD, we might as well go further and remove ExecShutdownNode's
useless return value. I left that as-is in back branches though,
to forestall complaints about ABI breakage.
Back-patch, with the thought that this might become of practical
importance before our stable branches are all out of service.
It doesn't seem to be fixing any live bug on any currently known
platform, however.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/208054.1663534665@sss.pgh.pa.us
Make reorderbuffer.h function declarations consistently use named
parameters. Also make sure that the declarations use names that match
corresponding names from function definitions in reorderbuffer.c. This
makes the definitions easier to follow, especially in the case of
functions that happen to have adjoining arguments of the same type.
This patch was written with help from clang-tidy. Specifically, its
"readability-inconsistent-declaration-parameter-name" check and its
"readability-named-parameter" check were used.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3955318.1663377656@sss.pgh.pa.us
The function has a bool argument named "case_insensitive", but that was
spelled "case_sensitive" in the declaration. Make them consistent now
to avoid confusion in the future.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquiër <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJt9CMM9KJTMjJh_zbL5hD9oX44qdJ4aqZtjFi-zA3Tg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 10-
For some reason we'd never decorated pg_v*printf() with
pg_attribute_printf() annotations. There is a convention for
how to label va_list-using printf functions (write zero for the
second argument), and we use that liberally elsewhere in the
code, but these core functions lacked it. It's not clear how
much useful checking the compiler can do for calls of these,
but we might as well add the annotations.
Also, sync win32security.c's log_error() with our normal convention
that pg_attribute_printf must be attached to a function's declaration
not definition. Apparently this file is only compiled with compilers
that aren't picky about that, but still it'd be better to be
consistent.
No back-patch since there's little reason to think we would catch
anything.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3492412.1663283395@sss.pgh.pa.us
Various bits of code were declaring signal handlers manually,
using "int signum" or variants of that. We evidently have no
platforms where that's actually wrong, but let's use our
SIGNAL_ARGS macro everywhere anyway. If nothing else, it's
good for finding signal handlers easily.
No need for back-patch, since this is just cosmetic AFAICS.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2684964.1663167995@sss.pgh.pa.us
This header is semi-private, being used only in files related to
raw parsing, so move to the backend directory where those files
live. This allows removal of Makefile rules that symlink gram.h to
src/include/parser, since gramparse.h can now include gram.h from
within the same directory. This has the side-effect of no longer
installing gram.h and gramparse.h, but there doesn't seem to be a
good reason to continue doing so.
Per suggestion from Andres Freund and Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20220904181759.px6uosll6zbxcum5%40awork3.anarazel.de
PG_COMPRESSION_OPTION_LEVEL is removed from the compression
specification logic, and instead the compression level is always
assigned with each library's default if nothing is directly given. This
centralizes the checks on the compression methods supported by a given
build, and always assigns a default compression level when parsing a
compression specification. This results in complaining at an earlier
stage than previously if a build supports a compression method or not,
aka when parsing a specification in the backend or the frontend, and not
when processing it. zstd, lz4 and zlib are able to handle in their
respective routines setting up the compression level the case of a
default value, hence the backend or frontend code (pg_receivewal or
pg_basebackup) has now no need to know what the default compression
level should be if nothing is specified: the logic is now done so as the
specification parsing assigns it. It can also be enforced by passing
down a "level" set to the default value, that the backend will accept
(the replication protocol is for example able to handle a command like
BASE_BACKUP (COMPRESSION_DETAIL 'gzip:level=-1')).
This code simplification fixes an issue with pg_basebackup --gzip
introduced by ffd5365, where the tarball of the streamed WAL segments
would be created as of pg_wal.tar.gz with uncompressed contents, while
the intention is to compress the segments with gzip at a default level.
The origin of the confusion comes from the handling of the default
compression level of gzip (-1 or Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION) and the value of
0 was getting assigned, which is what walmethods.c would consider
as equivalent to no compression when streaming WAL segments with its tar
methods. Assigning always the compression level removes the confusion
of some code paths considering a value of 0 set in a specification as
either no compression or a default compression level.
Note that 010_pg_basebackup.pl has to be adjusted to skip a few tests
where the shape of the compression detail string for client and
server-side compression was checked using gzip. This is a result of the
code simplification, as gzip specifications cannot be used if a build
does not support it.
Reported-by: Tom Lane
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1400032.1662217889@sss.pgh.pa.us
Backpatch-through: 15
guc.c has grown to be one of our largest .c files, making it
a bottleneck for compilation. It's also acquired a bunch of
knowledge that'd be better kept elsewhere, because of our not
very good habit of putting variable-specific check hooks here.
Hence, split it up along these lines:
* guc.c itself retains just the core GUC housekeeping mechanisms.
* New file guc_funcs.c contains the SET/SHOW interfaces and some
SQL-accessible functions for GUC manipulation.
* New file guc_tables.c contains the data arrays that define the
built-in GUC variables, along with some already-exported constant
tables.
* GUC check/assign/show hook functions are moved to the variable's
home module, whenever that's clearly identifiable. A few hard-
to-classify hooks ended up in commands/variable.c, which was
already a home for miscellaneous GUC hook functions.
To avoid cluttering a lot more header files with #include "guc.h",
I also invented a new header file utils/guc_hooks.h and put all
the GUC hook functions' declarations there, regardless of their
originating module. That allowed removal of #include "guc.h"
from some existing headers. The fallout from that (hopefully
all caught here) demonstrates clearly why such inclusions are
best minimized: there are a lot of files that, for example,
were getting array.h at two or more levels of remove, despite
not having any connection at all to GUCs in themselves.
There is some very minor code beautification here, such as
renaming a couple of inconsistently-named hook functions
and improving some comments. But mostly this just moves
code from point A to point B and deals with the ensuing
needs for #include adjustments and exporting a few functions
that previously weren't exported.
Patch by me, per a suggestion from Andres Freund; thanks also
to Michael Paquier for the idea to invent guc_funcs.c.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/587607.1662836699@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit d8594d123 updated the list of non-spacing codepoints used
for calculating display width, but in doing so inadvertently removed
some, since the script used for that commit only considered combining
characters.
For complete coverage for zero-width characters, include codepoints in
the category Cf (Format). To reflect the wider purpose, also rename files
and update comments that referred specifically to combining characters.
Some of these ranges have been missing since v12, but due to lack of
field complaints it was determined not important enough to justify adding
special-case logic the backbranches.
Kyotaro Horiguchi
Report by Pavel Stehule
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAFj8pRBE8yvpQ0FSkPCoe0Ny1jAAsAQ6j3qMgVwWvkqAoaaNmQ%40mail.gmail.com
This adds additional variants of palloc, pg_malloc, etc. that
encapsulate common usage patterns and provide more type safety.
Specifically, this adds palloc_object(), palloc_array(), and
repalloc_array(), which take the type name of the object to be
allocated as its first argument and cast the return as a pointer to
that type. There are also palloc0_object() and palloc0_array()
variants for initializing with zero, and pg_malloc_*() variants of all
of the above.
Inspired by the talloc library.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/bb755632-2a43-d523-36f8-a1e7a389a907@enterprisedb.com
We should process completed IOs *before* trying to start more, so that
it is always possible to decode one more record when the decoded record
queue is empty, even if maintenance_io_concurrency is set so low that a
single earlier WAL record might have saturated the IO queue.
That bug was hidden because the effect of maintenance_io_concurrency was
arbitrarily clamped to be at least 2. Fix the ordering, and also remove
that clamp. We need a special case for 0, which is now treated the same
as recovery_prefetch=off, but otherwise the number is used directly.
This allows for testing with 1, which would have made the problem
obvious in simple test scenarios.
Also add an explicit error message for missing contrecords. It was a
bit strange that we didn't report an error already, and became a latent
bug with prefetching, since the internal state that tracks aborted
contrecords would not survive retrying, as revealed by
026_overwrite_contrecord.pl with this adjustment. Reporting an error
prevents that.
Back-patch to 15.
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220831140128.GS31833%40telsasoft.com
The addition of published column names forgot to filter on attisdropped,
leading to cases where you could see "........pg.dropped.1........"
or the like as a reportedly-published column.
While we're here, rewrite the new subquery to get a more efficient plan
for it.
Hou Zhijie, per report from Jaime Casanova. Back-patch to v15 where
the bug was introduced. (Sadly, this means we need a post-beta4
catversion bump before beta4 has even hit the streets. I see no
good alternative though.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yxa1SU4nH2HfN3/i@ahch-to
XLogPageRead() can retry internally after a pread() system call has
succeeded, in the case of short reads, and page validation failures
while in standby mode (see commit 0668719801). Due to an oversight in
commit 3f1ce973, these cases could leave stale data in the internal
cache of xlogreader.c without marking it invalid. The main defense
against stale cached data on failure to read a page was in the error
handling path of the calling function ReadPageInternal(), but that
wasn't quite enough for errors handled internally by XLogPageRead()'s
retry loop if we then exited with XLREAD_WOULDBLOCK.
1. ReadPageInternal() now marks the cache invalid before calling the
page_read callback, by setting state->readLen to 0. It'll be set to
a non-zero value only after a successful read. It'll stay valid as
long as the caller requests data in the cached range.
2. XLogPageRead() no long performs internal retries while reading
ahead. While such retries should work, the general philosophy is
that we should give up prefetching if anything unusual happens so we
can handle it when recovery catches up, to reduce the complexity of
the system. Let's do that here too.
3. While here, a new function XLogReaderResetError() improves the
separation between xlogrecovery.c and xlogreader.c, where the former
previously clobbered the latter's internal error buffer directly.
The new function makes this more explicit, and also clears a related
flag, without which a standby would needlessly retry in the outer
function.
Thanks to Noah Misch for tracking down the conditions required for a
rare build farm failure in src/bin/pg_ctl/t/003_promote.pl, and
providing a reproducer.
Back-patch to 15.
Reported-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220807003627.GA4168930%40rfd.leadboat.com
The planner has to special-case indexes on boolean columns, because
what we need for an indexscan on such a column is a qual of the shape
of "boolvar = pseudoconstant". For plain bool constants, previous
simplification will have reduced this to "boolvar" or "NOT boolvar",
and we have to reverse that if we want to make an indexqual. There is
existing code to do so, but it only fires when the index's opfamily
is BOOL_BTREE_FAM_OID or BOOL_HASH_FAM_OID. Thus extension AMs, or
extension opclasses such as contrib/btree_gin, are out in the cold.
The reason for hard-wiring the set of relevant opfamilies was mostly
to avoid a catalog lookup in a hot code path. We can improve matters
while not taking much of a performance hit by relying on the
hard-wired set when the opfamily OID is visibly built-in, and only
checking the catalogs when dealing with an extension opfamily.
While here, rename IsBooleanOpfamily to IsBuiltinBooleanOpfamily
to remind future users of that macro of its limitations. At some
point we might want to make indxpath.c's improved version of the
test globally accessible, but it's not presently needed elsewhere.
Zongliang Quan and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f293b91d-1d46-d386-b6bb-4b06ff5c667b@yeah.net
The reverts the following and makes some associated cleanups:
commit f79b803dc: Common SQL/JSON clauses
commit f4fb45d15: SQL/JSON constructors
commit 5f0adec25: Make STRING an unreserved_keyword.
commit 33a377608: IS JSON predicate
commit 1a36bc9db: SQL/JSON query functions
commit 606948b05: SQL JSON functions
commit 49082c2cc: RETURNING clause for JSON() and JSON_SCALAR()
commit 4e34747c8: JSON_TABLE
commit fadb48b00: PLAN clauses for JSON_TABLE
commit 2ef6f11b0: Reduce running time of jsonb_sqljson test
commit 14d3f24fa: Further improve jsonb_sqljson parallel test
commit a6baa4bad: Documentation for SQL/JSON features
commit b46bcf7a4: Improve readability of SQL/JSON documentation.
commit 112fdb352: Fix finalization for json_objectagg and friends
commit fcdb35c32: Fix transformJsonBehavior
commit 4cd8717af: Improve a couple of sql/json error messages
commit f7a605f63: Small cleanups in SQL/JSON code
commit 9c3d25e17: Fix JSON_OBJECTAGG uniquefying bug
commit a79153b7a: Claim SQL standard compliance for SQL/JSON features
commit a1e7616d6: Rework SQL/JSON documentation
commit 8d9f9634e: Fix errors in copyfuncs/equalfuncs support for JSON node types.
commit 3c633f32b: Only allow returning string types or bytea from json_serialize
commit 67b26703b: expression eval: Fix EEOP_JSON_CONSTRUCTOR and EEOP_JSONEXPR size.
The release notes are also adjusted.
Backpatch to release 15.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/40d2c882-bcac-19a9-754d-4299e1d87ac7@postgresql.org
Before now, the cutoffs that VACUUM used to determine which XIDs/MXIDs
to freeze were determined at the start of each VACUUM by taking related
cutoffs that represent which XIDs/MXIDs VACUUM should treat as still
running, and subtracting an XID/MXID age based value controlled by GUCs
like vacuum_freeze_min_age. The FreezeLimit cutoff (XID freeze cutoff)
was derived by subtracting an XID age value from OldestXmin, while the
MultiXactCutoff cutoff (MXID freeze cutoff) was derived by subtracting
an MXID age value from OldestMxact. This approach didn't match the
approach used nearby to determine whether this VACUUM operation should
be an aggressive VACUUM or not.
VACUUM now uses the standard approach instead: it subtracts the same
age-based values from next XID/next MXID (rather than subtracting from
OldestXmin/OldestMxact). This approach is simpler and more uniform.
Most of the time it will have only a negligible impact on how and when
VACUUM freezes. It will occasionally make VACUUM more robust in the
event of problems caused by long running transaction. These are cases
where OldestXmin and OldestMxact are held back by so much that they
attain an age that is a significant fraction of the value of age-based
settings like vacuum_freeze_min_age.
There is no principled reason why freezing should be affected in any way
by the presence of a long-running transaction -- at least not before the
point that the OldestXmin and OldestMxact limits used by each VACUUM
operation attain an age that makes it unsafe to freeze some of the
XIDs/MXIDs whose age exceeds the value of the relevant age-based
settings. The new approach should at least make freezing degrade more
gracefully than before, even in the most extreme cases.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkOv5CEeyOO=c91XnT5WBR_0gii0Wn5UbZhJ=4TTykDYg@mail.gmail.com
Robert Haas reported that his older clang compiler didn't like the two
Asserts which were verifying that the given MemoryContextMethodID was <=
MEMORY_CONTEXT_METHODID_MASK when building with
-Wtautological-constant-out-of-range-compare. In my (David's) opinion,
the compiler is wrong to warn about that. Newer versions of clang don't
warn about the out of range enum value, so perhaps this was a bug that has
now been fixed. To keep older clang versions happy, let's just cast the
enum value to int to stop the compiler complaining.
The main reason for the Asserts mentioned above to exist are to inform
future developers which are adding new MemoryContexts if they run out of
bit space in MemoryChunk to store the MemoryContextMethodID. As pointed
out by Tom Lane, it seems wise to also add a comment to the header for
that enum to document the restriction on these enum values.
Additionally, also fix an incorrect usage of UINT64CONST() which was
introduced in c6e0fe1f2.
Author: Robert Haas, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYGG2C7Vbw1cjkQRRBL3zOk8SmhrQnsJgzscX=N9AwPrw@mail.gmail.com
This reverts commit df0f4feef. It turns out the problem which was causing
the 32-bit ARM and PPC animals to fail was due to a MAXALIGN problem in
slab.c. This was fixed by d5ee4db0e. The padding that was added in
df0f4feef would only do anything on machines where uint64 was not aligned
to 8 bytes. The 32-bit machines which were failing are not in that
category, so revert this commit.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3209100.1661787561@sss.pgh.pa.us
Buildfarm animals skate, grison and mamba are Assert failing on the
pointer being given to repalloc not being MAXALIGNED. c6e0fe1f2a made
changes in that area.
All of these animals are 32-bit with a MAXIMUM_ALIGNOF of 8 and a
SIZEOF_VOID_P of 4. I suspect that the pointer is not properly aligned due
to the lack of padding in the MemoryChunk struct.
Here we add the same type of padding that was previously used in
AllocChunkData and GenerationChunk that c6e0fe1f2a neglected to add.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2B1JyW5TiL%3DyV-3Uq1CrfnTyn0Xrk5uArt31Z%3D8rgPhXQ%40mail.gmail.com
NEON support is required on the Aarch64 architecture for standard
implementations. Hardware designers for specialized markets can choose
not to support it, but that's true of floating point as well, which
we assume is supported. As with x86, some SIMD support is available
on 32-bit platforms, but those are not interesting from a performance
standpoint and would require an inconvenient runtime check.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by John Naylor, Andres Freund, Thomas Munro, and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAFBsxsEyR9JkfbPcDXBRYEfdfC__OkwVGdwEAgY4Rv0cvw35EA%40mail.gmail.com#aba7a64b11503494ffd8dd27067626a9
Whenever we palloc a chunk of memory, traditionally, we prefix the
returned pointer with a pointer to the memory context to which the chunk
belongs. This is required so that we're able to easily determine the
owning context when performing operations such as pfree() and repalloc().
For the AllocSet context, prior to this commit we additionally prefixed
the pointer to the owning context with the size of the chunk. This made
the header 16 bytes in size. This 16-byte overhead was required for all
AllocSet allocations regardless of the allocation size.
For the generation context, the problem was worse; in addition to the
pointer to the owning context and chunk size, we also stored a pointer to
the owning block so that we could track the number of freed chunks on a
block.
The slab allocator had a 16-byte chunk header.
The changes being made here reduce the chunk header size down to just 8
bytes for all 3 of our memory context types. For small to medium sized
allocations, this significantly increases the number of chunks that we can
fit on a given block which results in much more efficient use of memory.
Additionally, this commit completely changes the rule that pointers to
palloc'd memory must be directly prefixed by a pointer to the owning
memory context and instead, we now insist that they're directly prefixed
by an 8-byte value where the least significant 3-bits are set to a value
to indicate which type of memory context the pointer belongs to. Using
those 3 bits as an index (known as MemoryContextMethodID) to a new array
which stores the methods for each memory context type, we're now able to
pass the pointer given to functions such as pfree() and repalloc() to the
function specific to that context implementation to allow them to devise
their own methods of finding the memory context which owns the given
allocated chunk of memory.
The reason we're able to reduce the chunk header down to just 8 bytes is
because of the way we make use of the remaining 61 bits of the required
8-byte chunk header. Here we also implement a general-purpose MemoryChunk
struct which makes use of those 61 remaining bits to allow the storage of
a 30-bit value which the MemoryContext is free to use as it pleases, and
also the number of bytes which must be subtracted from the chunk to get a
reference to the block that the chunk is stored on (also 30 bits). The 1
additional remaining bit is to denote if the chunk is an "external" chunk
or not. External here means that the chunk header does not store the
30-bit value or the block offset. The MemoryContext can use these
external chunks at any time, but must use them if any of the two 30-bit
fields are not large enough for the value(s) that need to be stored in
them. When the chunk is marked as external, it is up to the MemoryContext
to devise its own means to determine the block offset.
Using 3-bits for the MemoryContextMethodID does mean we're limiting
ourselves to only having a maximum of 8 different memory context types.
We could reduce the bit space for the 30-bit value a little to make way
for more than 3 bits, but it seems like it might be better to do that only
if we ever need more than 8 context types. This would only be a problem
if some future memory context type which does not use MemoryChunk really
couldn't give up any of the 61 remaining bits in the chunk header.
With this MemoryChunk, each of our 3 memory context types can quickly
obtain a reference to the block any given chunk is located on. AllocSet
is able to find the context to which the chunk is owned, by first
obtaining a reference to the block by subtracting the block offset as is
stored in the 'hdrmask' field and then referencing the block's 'aset'
field. The Generation context uses the same method, but GenerationBlock
did not have a field pointing back to the owning context, so one is added
by this commit.
In aset.c and generation.c, all allocations larger than allocChunkLimit
are stored on dedicated blocks. When there's just a single chunk on a
block like this, it's easy to find the block from the chunk, we just
subtract the size of the block header from the chunk pointer. The size of
these chunks is also known as we store the endptr on the block, so we can
just subtract the pointer to the allocated memory from that. Because we
can easily find the owning block and the size of the chunk for these
dedicated blocks, we just always use external chunks for allocation sizes
larger than allocChunkLimit. For generation.c, this sidesteps the problem
of non-external MemoryChunks being unable to represent chunk sizes >= 1GB.
This is less of a problem for aset.c as we store the free list index in
the MemoryChunk's spare 30-bit field (the value of which will never be
close to using all 30-bits). We can easily reverse engineer the chunk size
from this when needed. Storing this saves AllocSetFree() from having to
make a call to AllocSetFreeIndex() to determine which free list to put the
newly freed chunk on.
For the slab allocator, this commit adds a new restriction that slab
chunks cannot be >= 1GB in size. If there happened to be any users of
slab.c which used chunk sizes this large, they really should be using
AllocSet instead.
Here we also add a restriction that normal non-dedicated blocks cannot be
1GB or larger. It's now not possible to pass a 'maxBlockSize' >= 1GB
during the creation of an AllocSet or Generation context. Allocations can
still be larger than 1GB, it's just these will always be on dedicated
blocks (which do not have the 1GB restriction).
Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpjauCRXcgcaL6+e3eqecEHoeRm9D-kcbuvBitgPnW=vw@mail.gmail.com
Per flame graph from Jelte Fennema, COPY FROM ... USING BINARY shows
input validation taking at least 5% of the profile, so it's worth trying
to be more efficient here. With this change, validation of pure ASCII is
nearly 40% faster on contemporary Intel hardware. To make this change
legible and easier to adopt to additional architectures, use helper
functions to abstract the platform details away.
Reviewed by Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAFBsxsG%3Dk8t%3DC457FXnoBXb%3D8iA4OaZkbFogFMachWif7mNnww%40mail.gmail.com
SUSv3 <netinet/in.h> defines struct sockaddr_in6, and all targeted Unix
systems have it. Windows has it in <ws2ipdef.h>. Remove the configure
probe, the macro and a small amount of dead code.
Also remove a mention of IPv6-less builds from the documentation, since
there aren't any.
This is similar to commits f5580882 and 077bf2f2 for Unix sockets. Even
though AF_INET6 is an "optional" component of SUSv3, there are no known
modern operating system without it, and it seems even less likely to be
omitted from future systems than AF_UNIX.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGKErNfhmvb_H0UprEmp4LPzGN06yR2_0tYikjzB-2ECMw@mail.gmail.com
The GRANT statement can now specify WITH INHERIT TRUE or WITH
INHERIT FALSE to control whether the member inherits the granted
role's permissions. For symmetry, you can now likewise write
WITH ADMIN TRUE or WITH ADMIN FALSE to turn ADMIN OPTION on or off.
If a GRANT does not specify WITH INHERIT, the behavior based on
whether the member role is marked INHERIT or NOINHERIT. This means
that if all roles are marked INHERIT or NOINHERIT before any role
grants are performed, the behavior is identical to what we had before;
otherwise, it's different, because ALTER ROLE [NO]INHERIT now only
changes the default behavior of future grants, and has no effect on
existing ones.
Patch by me. Reviewed and testing by Nathan Bossart and Tushar Ahuja,
with design-level comments from various others.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmoa5Sf4PiWrfxA=sGzDKg0Ojo3dADw=wAHOhR9dggV=RmQ@mail.gmail.com
This is preparatory work for a project to increase the number of bits
in a RelFileNumber from 32 to 56.
Along the way, introduce static inline accessor functions for a couple
of BufferTag fields.
Dilip Kumar, reviewed by me. The overall patch series has also had
review at various times from Andres Freund, Ashutosh Sharma, Hannu
Krosing, Vignesh C, Álvaro Herrera, and Tom Lane.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-trubju5YbWAq-BSpZ90-Z6xCVBQE8BVqXqANOZAF1Znw@mail.gmail.com
This commit moves authn_id into a new global structure called
ClientConnectionInfo (mapping to a MyClientConnectionInfo for each
backend) which is intended to hold all the client information that
should be shared between the backend and any of its parallel workers,
access for extensions and triggers being the primary use case. There is
no need to push all the data of Port to the workers, and authn_id is
quite a generic concept so using a separate structure provides the best
balance (the name of the structure has been suggested by Robert Haas).
While on it, and per discussion as this would be useful for a potential
SYSTEM_USER that can be accessed through parallel workers, a second
field is added for the authentication method, copied directly from
Port.
ClientConnectionInfo is serialized and restored using a new parallel
key and a structure tracks the length of the authn_id, making the
addition of more fields straight-forward.
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Stephen Frost, Robert Haas, Tom Lane,
Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/793d990837ae5c06a558d58d62de9378ab525d83.camel@vmware.com
I added this in commit 153f40067, out of paranoia about kernels
possibly rejecting very large listen backlog requests. However,
POSIX has said for decades that the kernel must silently reduce
any value it considers too large, and there's no evidence that
any current system doesn't obey that. Let's just drop this limit
and save some complication.
While we're here, compute the request as twice MaxConnections not
twice MaxBackends; the latter no longer means what it did in 2001.
Per discussion of a report from Kevin McKibbin.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADc_NKg2d+oZY9mg4DdQdoUcGzN2kOYXBu-3--RW_hEe0tUV=g@mail.gmail.com
All backends should have a BackendType to enable statistics reporting
per BackendType.
Add a new BackendType for standalone backends, B_STANDALONE_BACKEND (and
alphabetize the BackendTypes). Both the bootstrap backend and single
user mode backends will have BackendType B_STANDALONE_BACKEND.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAAKRu_aaq33UnG4TXq3S-OSXGWj1QGf0sU%2BECH4tNwGFNERkZA%40mail.gmail.com
Somewhere during the development of the patch acquiring a lock during read
access to variable-numbered stats got lost. The missing lock acquisition won't
cause corruption, but can lead to reading torn values when accessing
stats. Add the missing lock acquisitions.
Reported-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bdrouvot@amazon.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAM-w4HMYkM_DkYhWtUGV+qE_rrBxKOzOF0+5faozxO3vXrc9wA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 15-
Previously, membership of role A in role B could be recorded in the
catalog tables only once. This meant that a new grant of role A to
role B would overwrite the previous grant. For other object types, a
new grant of permission on an object - in this case role A - exists
along side the existing grant provided that the grantor is different.
Either grant can be revoked independently of the other, and
permissions remain so long as at least one grant remains. Make role
grants work similarly.
Previously, when granting membership in a role, the superuser could
specify any role whatsoever as the grantor, but for other object types,
the grantor of record must be either the owner of the object, or a
role that currently has privileges to perform a similar GRANT.
Implement the same scheme for role grants, treating the bootstrap
superuser as the role owner since roles do not have owners. This means
that attempting to revoke a grant, or admin option on a grant, can now
fail if there are dependent privileges, and that CASCADE can be used
to revoke these. It also means that you can't grant ADMIN OPTION on
a role back to a user who granted it directly or indirectly to you,
similar to how you can't give WITH GRANT OPTION on a privilege back
to a role which granted it directly or indirectly to you.
Previously, only the superuser could specify GRANTED BY with a user
other than the current user. Relax that rule to allow the grantor
to be any role whose privileges the current user posseses. This
doesn't improve compatibility with what we do for other object types,
where support for GRANTED BY is entirely vestigial, but it makes this
feature more usable and seems to make sense to change at the same time
we're changing related behaviors.
Along the way, fix "ALTER GROUP group_name ADD USER user_name" to
require the same privileges as "GRANT group_name TO user_name".
Previously, CREATEROLE privileges were sufficient for either, but
only the former form was permissible with ADMIN OPTION on the role.
Now, either CREATEROLE or ADMIN OPTION on the role suffices for
either spelling.
Patch by me, reviewed by Stephen Frost.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaFr-RZeQ+WoQ5nKPv97oT9+aDgK_a5+qWHSgbDsMp1Vg@mail.gmail.com
Remove four probes for members of sockaddr_storage. Keep only the probe
for sockaddr's sa_len, which is enough for our two remaining places that
know about _len fields:
1. ifaddr.c needs to know if sockaddr has sa_len to understand the
result of ioctl(SIOCGIFCONF). Only AIX is still using the relevant code
today, but it seems like a good idea to keep it compilable on Linux.
2. ip.c was testing for presence of ss_len to decide whether to fill in
sun_len in our getaddrinfo_unix() function. It's just as good to test
for sa_len. If you have one, you have them all.
(The code in #2 isn't actually needed at all on several OSes I checked
since modern versions ignore sa_len on input to system calls. Proving
that's the case for all relevant OSes is left for another day, but
wouldn't get rid of that last probe anyway if we still want it for #1.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJJjF2AqdU_Aug5n2MAc1gr%3DGykNjVBZq%2Bd6Jrcp3Dyvg%40mail.gmail.com
Previously, "GRANT foo TO bar" or "GRANT foo TO bar GRANTED BY baz"
would record the OID of the grantor in pg_auth_members.grantor, but
that role could later be dropped without modifying or removing the
pg_auth_members record. That's not great, because we typically try
to avoid dangling references in catalog data.
Now, a role grant depends on the grantor, and the grantor can't be
dropped without removing the grant or changing the grantor. "DROP
OWNED BY" will remove the grant, just as it does for other kinds of
privileges. "REASSIGN OWNED BY" will not, again just like what we do
in other cases involving privileges.
pg_auth_members now has an OID column, because that is needed in order
for dependencies to work. It also now has an index on the grantor
column, because otherwise dropping a role would require a sequential
scan of the entire table to see whether the role's OID is in use as
a grantor. That probably wouldn't be too large a problem in practice,
but it seems better to have an index just in case.
A follow-on patch is planned with the goal of more thoroughly
rationalizing the behavior of role grants. This patch is just trying
to do enough to make sure that the data we store in the catalogs is at
some basic level valid.
Patch by me, reviewed by Stephen Frost
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaFr-RZeQ+WoQ5nKPv97oT9+aDgK_a5+qWHSgbDsMp1Vg@mail.gmail.com
The present implementations of adjust_appendrel_attrs_multilevel and
its sibling adjust_child_relids_multilevel are very messy, because
they work by reconstructing the relids of the child's immediate
parent and then seeing if that's bms_equal to the relids of the
target parent. Aside from being quite inefficient, this will not
work with planned future changes to make joinrels' relid sets
contain outer-join relids in addition to baserels.
The whole thing can be solved at a stroke by adding explicit parent
and top_parent links to child RelOptInfos, and making these functions
work with RelOptInfo pointers instead of relids. Doing that is
simpler for most callers, too.
In my original version of this patch, I got rid of
RelOptInfo.top_parent_relids on the grounds that it was now redundant.
However, that adds a lot of code churn in places that otherwise would
not need changing, and arguably the extra indirection needed to fetch
top_parent->relids in those places costs something. So this version
leaves that field in place.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/553080.1657481916@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit 5579388d was confused about why gai_strerror() didn't work, and
used gai_strerrorA(). It turns out that we had explicitly undefined
Windows' own macro for that somewhere else. Get rid of all that, and
use the system headers' definition of gai_sterror() directly as
intended.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGKErNfhmvb_H0UprEmp4LPzGN06yR2_0tYikjzB-2ECMw@mail.gmail.com
On BSD-family systems, header <sys/sockio.h> defines socket ioctl
numbers like SIOCGIFCONF. Only AIX is using those now, but it defines
them in <net/if.h> anyway.
Supposing some PostgreSQL hacker wants to test that AIX-only code path
on a more common development system by pretending not to have
getifaddrs(). It's enough to include <sys/ioctl.h>, at least on macOS,
FreeBSD and Linux, and we're already doing that.
Up to now, callers of find_placeholder_info() were required to pass
a flag indicating if it's OK to make a new PlaceHolderInfo. That'd
be fine if the callers had free choice, but they do not. Once we
begin deconstruct_jointree() it's no longer OK to make more PHIs;
while callers before that always want to create a PHI if it's not
there already. So there's no freedom of action, only the opportunity
to cause bugs by creating PHIs too late. Let's get rid of that in
favor of adding a state flag PlannerInfo.placeholdersFrozen, which
we can set at the point where it's no longer OK to make more PHIs.
This patch also simplifies a couple of call sites that were using
complicated logic to avoid calling find_placeholder_info() as much
as possible. Now that that lookup is O(1) thanks to the previous
commit, the extra bitmap manipulations are probably a net negative.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1405792.1660677844@sss.pgh.pa.us
Up to now we've just searched the placeholder_list when we want to
find the PlaceHolderInfo with a given ID. While there's no evidence
of that being a problem in the field, an upcoming patch will add
find_placeholder_info() calls in build_joinrel_tlist(), which seems
likely to make it more of an issue: a joinrel emitting lots of
PlaceHolderVars would incur O(N^2) cost, and we might be building
a lot of joinrels in complex queries. Hence, add an array that
can be indexed directly by phid to make the lookups constant-time.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1405792.1660677844@sss.pgh.pa.us
This event can happen when using SET ACCESS METHOD, as the data files of
the materialized need a full refresh but this command tag was not
updated to reflect that. The documentation is updated to track this
behavior.
Author: Onder Kalaci
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACawEhXwHN3X34FiwoYG8vXR-oyUdrp7qcfRWSzS+NPahS5gSw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15
SUSv3, all targeted Unixes and modern Windows have getaddrinfo() and
related interfaces. Drop the replacement implementation, and adjust
some headers slightly to make sure that the APIs are visible everywhere
using standard POSIX headers and names.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BL_3brvh%3D8e0BW_VfX9h7MtwgN%3DnFHP5o7X2oZucY9dg%40mail.gmail.com
Since HAVE_UNIX_SOCKETS is now defined unconditionally, remove the macro
and drop a small amount of dead code.
The last known systems not to have them (as far as I know at least) were
QNX, which we de-supported years ago, and Windows, which now has them.
If a new OS ever shows up with the POSIX sockets API but without working
AF_UNIX, it'll presumably still be able to compile the code, and fail at
runtime with an unsupported address family error. We might want to
consider adding a HINT that you should turn off the option to use it if
your network stack doesn't support it at that point, but it doesn't seem
worth making the relevant code conditional at compile time.
Also adjust a couple of places in the docs and comments that referred to
builds without Unix-domain sockets, since there aren't any. Windows
still gets a special mention in those places, though, because we don't
try to use them by default there yet.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BL_3brvh%3D8e0BW_VfX9h7MtwgN%3DnFHP5o7X2oZucY9dg%40mail.gmail.com
Assume that we can use LWARX hint flags and the LWSYNC instruction
on any PPC machine. The check on the assembler's behavior was only
needed for Apple's old assembler, which is no longer of interest
now that we've de-supported all PPC-era versions of macOS (thanks
to them not having clock_gettime()). Also, given an up-to-date
assembler these instructions work even on Apple's old hardware.
It seems quite unlikely that anyone would be interested in running
current Postgres on PPC hardware that's so old as to not have
these instructions.
Hence, rip out associated configure test and manual configuration
options, and just use the modernized instructions all the time.
Also, update atomics/arch-ppc.h to use these instructions as well.
(It was already using LWSYNC unconditionally in another place,
providing further proof that nobody is using PG on hardware old
enough to have a problem with that.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/166622.1660323391@sss.pgh.pa.us
<sys/resource.h> is in SUSv2 and is on all targeted Unix systems. We
have a replacement for getrusage() on Windows, so let's just move its
declarations into src/include/port/win32/sys/resource.h so that we can
use a standard-looking #include. Also remove an obsolete reference to
CLK_TCK. Also rename src/port/getrusage.c to win32getrusage.c,
following the convention for Windows-only fallback code.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BL_3brvh%3D8e0BW_VfX9h7MtwgN%3DnFHP5o7X2oZucY9dg%40mail.gmail.com
<sys/un.h> is in SUSv3 and every targeted Unix has it. Some Windows
tool chains may still lack the approximately equivalent header
<afunix.h>, so we already defined struct sockaddr_un ourselves on that
OS for now. To harmonize things a bit, move our definition into a new
header src/include/port/win32/sys/un.h.
HAVE_UNIX_SOCKETS is now defined unconditionally. We migh remove that
in a separate commit, pending discussion.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BL_3brvh%3D8e0BW_VfX9h7MtwgN%3DnFHP5o7X2oZucY9dg%40mail.gmail.com
<sys/uio.h> is in SUSv2, and all targeted Unix system have it, so we
might as well drop the probe (in fact we never really needed this one).
It's where struct iovec is defined, and as a common extension, it's also
where non-standard preadv() and pwritev() are declared on systems that
have them.
We should also be able to assume that IOV_MAX is defined on Unix.
To spell out what our pg_iovec.h header does for the OSes in the build
farm as of today:
Windows: our own struct and functions
Solaris, Cygwin: <sys/uio.h>'s struct, our own functions
Every other Unix: <sys/uio.h>'s struct and functions
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BL_3brvh%3D8e0BW_VfX9h7MtwgN%3DnFHP5o7X2oZucY9dg%40mail.gmail.com
Previously, we relied on HEAP2_NEW_CID records and XACT_INVALIDATION
records to know if the transaction has modified the catalog, and that
information is not serialized to snapshot. Therefore, after the restart,
if the logical decoding decodes only the commit record of the transaction
that has actually modified a catalog, we will miss adding its XID to the
snapshot. Thus, we will end up looking at catalogs with the wrong
snapshot.
To fix this problem, this change adds the list of transaction IDs and
sub-transaction IDs, that have modified catalogs and are running during
snapshot serialization, to the serialized snapshot. After restart or
otherwise, when we restore from such a serialized snapshot, the
corresponding list is restored in memory. Now, when decoding a COMMIT
record, we check both the list and the ReorderBuffer to see if the
transaction has modified catalogs.
Since this adds additional information to the serialized snapshot, we
cannot backpatch it. For back branches, we took another approach.
We remember the last-running-xacts list of the decoded RUNNING_XACTS
record after restoring the previously serialized snapshot. Then, we mark
the transaction as containing catalog changes if it's in the list of
initial running transactions and its commit record has
XACT_XINFO_HAS_INVALS. This doesn't require any file format changes but
the transaction will end up being added to the snapshot even if it has
only relcache invalidations. But that won't be a problem since we use
snapshot built during decoding only to read system catalogs.
This commit bumps SNAPBUILD_VERSION because of a change in SnapBuild.
Reported-by: Mike Oh
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Shi yu, Takamichi Osumi, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Bertrand Drouvot, Ahsan Hadi
Backpatch-through: 10
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/81D0D8B0-E7C4-4999-B616-1E5004DBDCD2%40amazon.com
Use SSE2 intrinsics to speed up the search, where available. Otherwise,
use a simple 'for' loop. The motivation to add this now is to speed up
XidInMVCCSnapshot(), which is the reason only unsigned 32-bit integer
arrays are optimized. Other types are left for future work, as is the
extension of this technique to non-x86 platforms.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Andres Freund, Bharath Rupireddy, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220713170950.GA3116318%40nathanxps13
This commit addresses a few things around GUCs:
- The TCP-related parameters (the four tcp_keepalives_* and
client_connection_check_interval are listed in postgresql.conf.sample in
a subsection called "TCP settings" of "CONNECTIONS AND AUTHENTICATION",
but they did not have their own group name in guc.c.
- enable_group_by_reordering, stats_fetch_consistency and
recovery_prefetch had an inconsistent description, missing a dot at the
end.
- In postgresql.conf.sample, "Process title" should not have a section
of its own, but it should be a subsection of "REPORTING AND LOGGING".
This impacts the contents of pg_settings, which could be seen as a
compatibility break, so no backpatch is done. This is similar to the
cleanup done in a55a984.
Author: Shinya Kato
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5e0c9c608624eafbba910c344282cb14@oss.nttdata.com
Commit 623cc673 removed gettimeofday(), and commits 24c3ce8f and
495ed0ef removed support for very old Windows releases with low accuracy
timers, but references to those things were left behind in comments.
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/295419.1659918447%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Previously, if an extension script did CREATE OR REPLACE and there was
an existing object not belonging to the extension, it would overwrite
the object and adopt it into the extension. This is problematic, first
because the overwrite is probably unintentional, and second because we
didn't change the object's ownership. Thus a hostile user could create
an object in advance of an expected CREATE EXTENSION command, and would
then have ownership rights on an extension object, which could be
modified for trojan-horse-type attacks.
Hence, forbid CREATE OR REPLACE of an existing object unless it already
belongs to the extension. (Note that we've always forbidden replacing
an object that belongs to some other extension; only the behavior for
previously-free-standing objects changes here.)
For the same reason, also fail CREATE IF NOT EXISTS when there is
an existing object that doesn't belong to the extension.
Our thanks to Sven Klemm for reporting this problem.
Security: CVE-2022-2625
Previously we fell back to __FUNCTION__ and then NULL. As __func__ is in C99
that shouldn't be necessary anymore.
Solution.pm defined HAVE_FUNCNAME__FUNCTION instead of
HAVE_FUNCNAME__FUNC (originating in 4164e6636e), as at some point in the past
MSVC only supported __FUNCTION__. Our minimum version supports __func__.
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220807012914.ydz73yte6j3coulo@awork3.anarazel.de
strtof() is in C99 and all targeted systems have it. We can remove the
configure probe and some dead code, but we still need replacement code
for a couple of systems that have known buggy implementations selected
via platform template.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152683.1659830125%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Previously we bothered to forward-declare struct timezone, following man
pages on typical systems, but POSIX actually says the argument (which we
ignore anyway) is void *. Drop a line.
While here, add an assertion that nobody actually uses the tzp argument.
Previously we did extra work to select between Windows APIs needed on
older releases, but now we can just use the higher resolution function
directly.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKwRpvGfcfq2qNVAQS2Wg1B9eA9QRhAmVSyJt1zsCN2sQ%40mail.gmail.com
There's no known supported system needing 1 argument gettimeofday()
support. The test for it was added a long time ago (92c6bf9775). Remove.
Until now we tested whether a gettimeofday() fallback is needed when
targetting windows. Which lead to the odd result that HAVE_GETTIMEOFDAY only
being defined when targetting MinGW (which has gettimeofday() since at least
2007). As the fallback is specific to msvc, remove the configure code and
rename src/port/gettimeofday.c to src/port/win32gettimeofday.c.
While at it, also remove the definition of struct timezone, a forward
declaration of the struct is sufficient.
Reviewed-By: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220806000311.ywx65iuchvj4qn2k@awork3.anarazel.de
Now that lstat() reports junction points with S_IFLNK/S_ISLINK(), and
unlink() can unlink them, there is no need for conditional code for
Windows in a few places. That was expressed by testing for WIN32 or
S_ISLNK, which we can now constant-fold.
The coding around pgwin32_is_junction() was a bit suspect anyway, as we
never checked for errors, and we also know that errors can be spuriously
reported because of transient sharing violations on this OS. The
lstat()-based code has handling for that.
This also reverts 4fc6b6ee on master only. That was done because
lstat() didn't previously work for symlinks (junction points), but now
it does.
Tested-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLfOOeyZpm5ByVcAt7x5Pn-%3DxGRNCvgiUPVVzjFLtnY0w%40mail.gmail.com
Junction points will be reported with S_ISLNK(x.st_mode), simulating
POSIX lstat(). stat() will follow pseudo-symlinks, like in POSIX (but
only one level before giving up, unlike in POSIX).
This completes a TODO left by commit bed90759fc.
Tested-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net> (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLfOOeyZpm5ByVcAt7x5Pn-%3DxGRNCvgiUPVVzjFLtnY0w%40mail.gmail.com
strtoll was backfilled with either __strtoll or strtoq on systems without
strtoll. The last such system on the buildfarm was an ancient HP-UX animal. We
don't support HP-UX anymore, so remove.
On other systems strtoll was present, but did not have a declaration. The last
known instance on the buildfarm was running an ancient OSX and shut down in
2019.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220804013546.h65najrzig764jar@awork3.anarazel.de
Using ATSimpleRecursion() in ATPrepCmd() to do so as bbb927b4db did is
not correct, because ATPrepCmd() can't distinguish between triggers that
may be cloned and those that may not, so would wrongly try to recurse
for the latter category of triggers.
So this commit restores the code in EnableDisableTrigger() that
86f575948c had added to do the recursion, which would do it only for
triggers that may be cloned, that is, row-level triggers. This also
changes tablecmds.c such that ATExecCmd() is able to pass the value of
ONLY flag down to EnableDisableTrigger() using its new 'recurse'
parameter.
This also fixes what seems like an oversight of 86f575948c that the
recursion to partition triggers would only occur if EnableDisableTrigger()
had actually changed the trigger. It is more apt to recurse to inspect
partition triggers even if the parent's trigger didn't need to be
changed: only then can we be certain that all descendants share the same
state afterwards.
Backpatch all the way back to 11, like bbb927b4db. Care is taken not
to break ABI compatibility (and that no catversion bump is needed.)
Co-authored-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dmitry Koval <d.koval@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqG-cZT3XzGAnEgZQLoQbyfJApVwOTQaCaas1mhpf+4V5A@mail.gmail.com
clock_gettime() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it.
Remove a chunk of fallback code for old Unix is no longer reachable on
modern systems, and untested as of the retirement of build farm animal
prairiedog.
There is no need to retain a HAVE_CLOCK_GETTIME macro here, because it
is already used in a context with Unix and Windows code paths.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
Commit dd299df818, which made heap TID a tiebreaker nbtree index
column, introduced new rules on page space management to make suffix
truncation safe for v4+ indexes. New pivot tuples (generated by suffix
truncation during leaf page splits) sometimes require dedicated extra
space at the end of a new leaf page high key/pivot to store a heap TID
using a special representation (a representation only used in pivot
tuples).
The definition of "1/3 of a page" was reduced by a single MAXALIGN()
quantum for v4 indexes to make sure that the final enlarged pivot tuple
always fit, even with a split point whose firstright tuple happened to
already be at the "1/3 of a page" limit (limit for non-pivot tuples).
Internal pages (which only contain pivot tuples) stuck with the original
"1/3 of a page" definition. This scheme made it impossible for any page
split to fail to free enough space for its newitem, which is never okay.
The macro that determines whether non-pivot tuples exceed their "1/3 of
a leaf page" restriction was structured as if space was needed for all
three tuples during a leaf page split (the new pivot plus two very large
adjoining non-pivots that are separated by the split). This was subtly
wrong, in that it accidentally relied on implementation details that
could (at least in theory) change in the future.
To fix, make the macro subtract a single MAXALIGN() quantum, once. The
macro evaluates to exactly the same value as before in practice. But it
no longer depends on the current layout of nbtree's special area struct.
No backpatch, since this isn't a live bug.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reported-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Diagnosed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmoa7UBxivM7f6Ocx_qbq4=ky3uXc+WZNOBcVX+kvJvWOEA@mail.gmail.com
preadv() and pwritev() are not standardized by POSIX, but appeared in
NetBSD in 1999 and were adopted by at least OpenBSD, FreeBSD,
DragonFlyBSD, Linux, AIX, illumos and macOS. We don't use them much
yet, but an active proposal uses them heavily.
In 15, we had two replacement implementations for other OSes: one based
on lseek() + -v function if available for true vector I/O, and the other
based on a loop over p- function.
The former would be an obstacle to hypothetical future multi-threaded
code sharing file descriptors, while the latter would not, since commit
cf112c12. Furthermore, the number of targeted systems that could
benefit from the former's potential upside has dwindled to just one
niche OS, since macOS added the functions and we de-supported HP-UX.
That doesn't seem like a good trade-off.
Therefore, drop the lseek()-based variant, and also the pg_ prefix now
that the file position portability hazard is gone.
At the time of writing, the only systems in our build farm that lack
native preadv/pwritev and thus use fallback code are:
* Solaris (but not illumos)
* macOS before release 11.0
* Windows
With this commit, the above systems will now use the *same* fallback
code, the version that loops over pread()/pwrite(). Windows already
used that (though a later proposal may include true vector I/O for
Windows), so this decision really only affects Solaris, until it gets
around to adding these system calls.
Also remove some useless includes while here.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
pread() and pwrite() are in SUSv2, and all targeted Unix systems have
them.
Previously, we defined pg_pread and pg_pwrite to emulate these function
with lseek() on old Unixen. The names with a pg_ prefix were a reminder
of a portability hazard: they might change the current file position.
That hazard is gone, so we can drop the prefixes.
Since the remaining replacement code is Windows-only, move it into
src/port/win32p{read,write}.c, and move the declarations into
src/include/port/win32_port.h.
No need for vestigial HAVE_PREAD, HAVE_PWRITE macros as they were only
used for declarations in port.h which have now moved into win32_port.h.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
setenv() and unsetenv() are in SUSv3 and targeted Unix systems have
them. We still need special code for these on Windows, but that doesn't
require a configure probe.
This marks the first time we require a SUSv3 (POSIX.1-2001) facility
(rather than SUSv2). The replacement code removed here was not needed
on any targeted system or any known non-EOL'd Unix system, and was
therefore dead and untested.
No need for vestigial HAVE_SETENV and HAVE_UNSETENV macros, because we
provide a replacement for Windows, and we didn't previously test the
macros.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
poll() and <poll.h> are in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have
them.
Retain HAVE_POLL and HAVE_POLL_H macros for readability. There's an
error in latch.c that is now unreachable (since we always have one of
WIN32 or HAVE_POLL defined), but that falls out of a decision to keep
using defined(HAVE_POLL) instead of !defined(WIN32) to guard the poll()
code.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
link() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it. We have
replacement code for Windows that doesn't require a configure probe.
Since only Windows needs it, rename src/port/link.c to win32link.c like
other similar things.
There is no need for a vestigial HAVE_LINK macro, because we expect all
Unix and, with our replacement function, Windows systems to have it, so
we didn't have any tests around link() usage.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
symlink() and readlink() are in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have
them. We have partial emulation on Windows. Code that raised runtime
errors on systems without it has been dead for years, so we can remove
that and also references to such systems in the documentation.
Define HAVE_READLINK and HAVE_SYMLINK macros on Unix. Our Windows
replacement functions based on junction points can't be used for
relative paths or for non-directories, so the macros can be used to
check for full symlink support. The places that deal with tablespaces
can just use symlink functions without checking the macros. (If they
did check the macros, they'd need to provide an #else branch with a
runtime or compile time error, and it'd be dead code.)
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
setsid() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it. Retain a
HAVE_SETSID macro, defined on Unix only. That's easier to understand
than !defined(WIN32), for the optional code it governs.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
shm_open() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it.
We retain a HAVE_SHM_OPEN macro, because it's clearer to readers than
something like !defined(WIN32).
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
getrlimit() is in SUSv2 and all targeted systems have it.
Windows doesn't have it. We could just use #ifndef WIN32, but for a
little more explanation about why we're making things conditional, let's
retain the HAVE_GETRLIMIT macro. It's defined in port.h for Unix systems.
On systems that have it, it's not necessary to test for RLIMIT_CORE,
RLIMIT_STACK or RLIMIT_NOFILE macros, since SUSv2 requires those and all
targeted systems have them. Also remove references to a pre-historic
alternative spelling of RLIMIT_NOFILE, and coding that seemed to believe
that Cygwin didn't have it.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
dlopen() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it. We still
need replacement functions for Windows, but we don't need a configure
probe for that.
Since it's no longer needed by other operating systems, rename dlopen.c
to win32dlopen.c and move the declarations into win32_port.h.
Likewise, the macros RTLD_NOW and RTLD_GLOBAL now only need to be
defined on Windows, since all targeted Unix systems have 'em.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
SSE2 vector instructions are part of the spec for the 64-bit x86
architecture. Until now we have relied on the compiler to autovectorize
in some limited situations, but some useful coding idioms can only be
expressed explicitly via compiler intrinsics. To this end, add a header
that defines USE_SSE2 where available. While x86-only for now, we can
add other architectures in the future. This will also be the intended
place for helper functions that use vector operations.
Reviewed by Nathan Bossart and Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAFBsxsE2G_H_5Wbw%2BNOPm70-BK4xxKf86-mRzY%3DL2sLoQqM%2B-Q%40mail.gmail.com
Commit fac1b470a thought we could check for set-returning functions
by testing only the top-level node in an expression tree. This is
wrong in itself, and to make matters worse it encouraged others
to make the same mistake, by exporting tlist.c's special-purpose
IS_SRF_CALL() as a widely-visible macro. I can't find any evidence
that anyone's taken the bait, but it was only a matter of time.
Use expression_returns_set() instead, and stuff the IS_SRF_CALL()
genie back in its bottle, this time with a warning label. I also
added a couple of cross-reference comments.
After a fair amount of fooling around, I've despaired of making
a robust test case that exposes the bug reliably, so no test case
here. (Note that the test case added by fac1b470a is itself
broken, in that it doesn't notice if you remove the code change.
The repro given by the bug submitter currently doesn't fail either
in v15 or HEAD, though I suspect that may indicate an unrelated bug.)
Per bug #17564 from Martijn van Oosterhout. Back-patch to v13,
as the faulty patch was.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17564-c7472c2f90ef2da3@postgresql.org
ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggreagtes have, since implemented in Postgres, been
executed by always performing a sort in nodeAgg.c to sort the tuples in
the current group into the correct order before calling the transition
function on the sorted tuples. This was not great as often there might be
an index that could have provided pre-sorted input and allowed the
transition functions to be called as the rows come in, rather than having
to store them in a tuplestore in order to sort them once all the tuples
for the group have arrived.
Here we change the planner so it requests a path with a sort order which
supports the most amount of ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregate functions and
add new code to the executor to allow it to support the processing of
ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregates where the tuples are already sorted in the
correct order.
Since there can be many ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregates in any given query
level, it's very possible that we can't find an order that suits all of
these aggregates. The sort order that the planner chooses is simply the
one that suits the most aggregate functions. We take the most strictly
sorted variation of each order and see how many aggregate functions can
use that, then we try again with the order of the remaining aggregates to
see if another order would suit more aggregate functions. For example:
SELECT agg(a ORDER BY a),agg2(a ORDER BY a,b) ...
would request the sort order to be {a, b} because {a} is a subset of the
sort order of {a,b}, but;
SELECT agg(a ORDER BY a),agg2(a ORDER BY c) ...
would just pick a plan ordered by {a} (we give precedence to aggregates
which are earlier in the targetlist).
SELECT agg(a ORDER BY a),agg2(a ORDER BY b),agg3(a ORDER BY b) ...
would choose to order by {b} since two aggregates suit that vs just one
that requires input ordered by {a}.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Ronan Dunklau, James Coleman, Ranier Vilela, Richard Guo, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpHzfo92%3DR4W0%2BxVua3BUYCKMckWAmo-2t_KiXN-wYH%3Dw%40mail.gmail.com
Here we add code which detects when ExecFindPartition() continually finds
the same partition and add a caching layer to improve partition lookup
performance for such cases.
Both RANGE and LIST partitioned tables traditionally require a binary
search for the set of Datums that a partition needs to be found for. This
binary search is commonly visible in profiles when bulk loading into a
partitioned table. Here we aim to reduce the overhead of bulk-loading
into partitioned tables for cases where many consecutive tuples belong to
the same partition and make the performance of this operation closer to
what it is with a traditional non-partitioned table.
When we find the same partition 16 times in a row, the next search will
result in us simply just checking if the current set of values belongs to
the last found partition. For LIST partitioning we record the index into
the PartitionBoundInfo's datum array. This allows us to check if the
current Datum is the same as the Datum that was last looked up. This
means if any given LIST partition supports storing multiple different
Datum values, then the caching only works when we find the same value as
we did the last time. For RANGE partitioning we simply check if the given
Datums are in the same range as the previously found partition.
We store the details of the cached partition in PartitionDesc (i.e.
relcache) so that the cached values are maintained over multiple
statements.
No caching is done for HASH partitions. The majority of the cost in HASH
partition lookups are in the hashing function(s), which would also have to
be executed if we were to try to do caching for HASH partitioned tables.
Since most of the cost is already incurred, we just don't bother. We also
don't do any caching for LIST partitions when we continually find the
values being looked up belong to the DEFAULT partition. We've no
corresponding index in the PartitionBoundInfo's datum array for this case.
We also don't cache when we find the given values match to a LIST
partitioned table's NULL partition. This is so cheap that there's no
point in doing any caching for this. We also don't cache for a RANGE
partitioned table's DEFAULT partition.
There have been a number of different patches submitted to improve
partition lookups. Hou, Zhijie submitted a patch to detect when the value
belonging to the partition key column(s) were constant and added code to
cache the partition in that case. Amit Langote then implemented an idea
suggested by me to remember the last found partition and start to check if
the current values work for that partition. The final patch here was
written by me and was done by taking many of the ideas I liked from the
patches in the thread and redesigning other aspects.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB571649B27E912EA6CC4EEF03942D9%40OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Author: Amit Langote, Hou Zhijie, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Hou Zhijie
There wasn't an especially nice way to read all of a file while
passing missing_ok = true. Add an additional overloaded variant
to support that use-case.
While here, refactor the C code to avoid a rats-nest of PG_NARGS
checks, instead handling the argument collection in the outer
wrapper functions. It's a bit longer this way, but far more
straightforward.
(Upon looking at the code coverage report for genfile.c, I was
impelled to also add a test case for pg_stat_file() -- tgl)
Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220607.160520.1984541900138970018.horikyota.ntt@gmail.com
Commit b0a55e4329 missed a few places
where we are referring to the number used as a part of the relation
filename as an "OID". We now want to call that a "RelFileNumber".
Some of these places actually made it sound like the OID in question
is pg_class.oid rather than pg_class.relfilenode, which is especially
good to clean up.
Dilip Kumar with some editing by me.
The catalog contents haven't changed, but it's good to make clear
that initdb is required. Changing RELMAPPER_FILEMAGIC would be more
appropriate, but that doesn't actually produce a useful diagnostic,
so cheat by doing this instead.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20220727171939.6ixixqcjt5riil2o@alvherre.pgsql
GetSubscriptionRelations() and GetSubscriptionNotReadyRelations() share
mostly the same code, which scans pg_subscription_rel and fetches all
the relations of a given subscription. The only difference is that the
second routine looks for all the relations not in a ready state. This
commit refactors the code to use a single routine, shaving a bit of
code.
Author: Vignesh C
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Amit Kapila, Michael Paquier, Peter
Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm0eW-9g4G_EzHebnFT5zZoasWCS_EzZQ5BgnLZny9S=pg@mail.gmail.com
This commit puts the implementation of Tuple sort variants into the separate
file tuplesortvariants.c. That gives better separation of the code and
serves well as the demonstration that Tuple sort variant can be defined outside
of tuplesort.c.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdvjix0Ahx-H3Jp1M2R%2B_74P-zKnGGygx4OWr%3DbUQ8BNdw%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov, Maxim Orlov, Matthias van de Meent
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, John Naylor
XLogRecordBlockHeader, the header holding the information for the data
related to a block, tracks the length of the data appended to the WAL
record with data_length (uint16). This limitation in size was not
enforced by the public routine in charge of registering the data
assembled later to form the WAL record inserted, XLogRegisterBufData().
Incorrectly used, it could lead to the generation of records with some
of its data overflowed. This commit adds some safeguards to prevent
that for the block data, complaining immediately if attempting to add to
a record block information with a size larger than UINT16_MAX, which is
the limit implied by the internal logic.
Note that this also adjusts XLogRegisterData() and XLogRegisterBufData()
so as the length of the WAL record data given by the caller is unsigned,
matching with what gets stored in XLogRecData->len.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author. The original patch
includes more protections when assembling a record in full that will be
looked at separately later.
Author: Matthias van de Meent
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Heikki Linnakangas, Michael Paquier, David
Zhang
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEze2WgGiw+LZt+vHf8tWqB_6VxeLsMeoAuod0N=ij1q17n5pw@mail.gmail.com
We have a few commands that "can't run in a transaction block",
meaning that if they complete their processing but then we fail
to COMMIT, we'll be left with inconsistent on-disk state.
However, the existing defenses for this are only watertight for
simple query protocol. In extended protocol, we didn't commit
until receiving a Sync message. Since the client is allowed to
issue another command instead of Sync, we're in trouble if that
command fails or is an explicit ROLLBACK. In any case, sitting
in an inconsistent state while waiting for a client message
that might not come seems pretty risky.
This case wasn't reachable via libpq before we introduced pipeline
mode, but it's always been an intended aspect of extended query
protocol, and likely there are other clients that could reach it
before.
To fix, set a flag in PreventInTransactionBlock that tells
exec_execute_message to force an immediate commit. This seems
to be the approach that does least damage to existing working
cases while still preventing the undesirable outcomes.
While here, add some documentation to protocol.sgml that explicitly
says how to use pipelining. That's latent in the existing docs if
you know what to look for, but it's better to spell it out; and it
provides a place to document this new behavior.
Per bug #17434 from Yugo Nagata. It's been wrong for ages,
so back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17434-d9f7a064ce2a88a3@postgresql.org
The setting controls tha maximum length of the header line in expanded
format output. Possible settings are full, column, page, or an integer.
the default is full, the current behaviour, and in this case the header
line is the length of the widest line of output. column causes the
header to be truncated to the width of the first column, page causes it
to be truncated to the width of the terminal page, and an integer causes
it to be truncated to that value. If the full value is less than the
page or integer value no truncation occurs. If given without an argument
this option prints its current setting.
Platon Pronko, somewhat modified by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f03d38a3-db96-a56e-d1bc-dbbc80bbde4d@gmail.com
Previously we did this after InitPostgres, at a somewhat randomly chosen
place within PostgresMain. However, since commit a0ffa885e doing this
outside a transaction can cause a crash, if we need to check permissions
while replacing a placeholder GUC. (Besides which, a preloaded library
could itself want to do database access within _PG_init.)
To avoid needing an additional transaction start/end in every session,
move the process_session_preload_libraries call to within InitPostgres's
transaction. That requires teaching the code not to call it when
InitPostgres is called from somewhere other than PostgresMain, since
we don't want session_preload_libraries to affect background workers.
The most future-proof solution here seems to be to add an additional
flag parameter to InitPostgres; fortunately, we're not yet very worried
about API stability for v15.
Doing this also exposed the fact that we're currently honoring
session_preload_libraries in walsenders, even those not connected to
any database. This seems, at minimum, a POLA violation: walsenders
are not interactive sessions. Let's stop doing that.
(All these comments also apply to local_preload_libraries, of course.)
Per report from Gurjeet Singh (thanks also to Nathan Bossart and Kyotaro
Horiguchi for review). Backpatch to v15 where a0ffa885e came in.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABwTF4VEpwTHhRQ+q5MiC5ucngN-whN-PdcKeufX7eLSoAfbZA@mail.gmail.com
sigwait() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it. An earlier
pre-standard function prototype existed on some older systems, but we
no longer need a workaround for that.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
getrusage() is in SUSv2 and all targeted Unix systems have it.
Note that POSIX only covers ru_utime and ru_stime and we rely on many
more fields without any kind of configure probe, but that predates this
commit.
The only supported system we need replacement code for now is Windows,
and that can be done without a configure probe.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ3LHeP9w5Fgzdr4G8AnEtJ=z=p6hGDEm4qYGEUX5B6fQ@mail.gmail.com
O_FSYNC was a pre-POSIX way of spelling O_SYNC, supported since commit
9d645fd84c for non-conforming operating systems of the time. It's not
needed on any modern system. We can just use standard O_SYNC directly
if it exists (= all targeted systems except Windows), and get rid of our
OPEN_SYNC_FLAG macro.
Similarly for standard O_DSYNC, we can just use that directly if it
exists (= all targeted systems except DragonFlyBSD), and get rid of our
OPEN_DATASYNC_FLAG macro.
We still avoid choosing open_datasync as a default value for
wal_sync_method if O_DSYNC has the same value as O_SYNC (= only
OpenBSD), so there is no change in default behavior.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJE7y92NY7FG2ftUbZUaqohBU65_Ys_7xF5mUHo4wirTQ%40mail.gmail.com
Commit 4f658dc8 provided the traditional BSD fls() function in
src/port/fls.c so it could be used in several places. Later we added a
bunch of similar facilities in pg_bitutils.h, based on compiler
builtins that map to hardware instructions. It's a bit confusing to
have both 1-based and 0-based variants of this operation in use in
different parts of the tree, and neither is blessed by a standard.
Let's drop fls.c and the configure probe, and reuse the newer code.
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2B7dSX1XF8yFGmYk-%3D48dbjH2kmzZj16XvhbrWP-9BzRg%40mail.gmail.com
This patch adds a new SUBSCRIPTION parameter "origin". It specifies
whether the subscription will request the publisher to only send changes
that don't have an origin or send changes regardless of origin. Setting it
to "none" means that the subscription will request the publisher to only
send changes that have no origin associated. Setting it to "any" means
that the publisher sends changes regardless of their origin. The default
is "any".
Usage:
CREATE SUBSCRIPTION sub1 CONNECTION 'dbname=postgres port=9999'
PUBLICATION pub1 WITH (origin = none);
This can be used to avoid loops (infinite replication of the same data)
among replication nodes.
This feature allows filtering only the replication data originating from
WAL but for initial sync (initial copy of table data) we don't have such a
facility as we can only distinguish the data based on origin from WAL. As
a follow-up patch, we are planning to forbid the initial sync if the
origin is specified as none and we notice that the publication tables were
also replicated from other publishers to avoid duplicate data or loops.
We forbid to allow creating origin with names 'none' and 'any' to avoid
confusion with the same name options.
Author: Vignesh C, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-By: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Ashutosh Bapat, Hayato Kuroda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm0gwjY_4HFxvvty01BOT01q_fJLKQ3pWP9=9orqubhjcQ@mail.gmail.com
Commit 964d01ae9 marked a lot of fields as read_write_ignore
to stay consistent with what was dumped by the manually-maintained
outfuncs.c code. However, it seems that a pretty fair number
of those omissions were either flat-out oversights, or a shortcut
taken because hand-written code seemed like it'd be too much trouble.
Let's upgrade things where it seems to make sense to dump.
To do this, we need to add support to gen_node_support.pl and
outfuncs.c for variable-length arrays of Node pointers. That's
pretty straightforward given the model of the existing code
for arrays of scalars, but I found I needed to tighten the
type-recognizing regexes in gen_node_support.pl. (As they
stood, they mistook "foo **" for "foo *". Make sure they're
all fully anchored to prevent additional problems.)
The main thing left un-done here is that a lot of partitioning-related
structs are still not dumped, because they are bare structs not Nodes.
I'm not sure about the wisdom of that choice ... but changing it would
be fairly invasive, so it probably requires more justification than
just making planner node dumps more complete.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1295668.1658258637@sss.pgh.pa.us
When the ability to print variable-length-array fields was first
added to outfuncs.c, there was no corresponding read capability,
as it was used only for debug dumps of planner-internal Nodes.
Not a lot of thought seems to have been put into the output format:
it's just the space-separated array elements and nothing else.
Later such fields appeared in Plan nodes, and still later we grew
read support so that Plans could be transferred to parallel workers,
but the original text format wasn't rethought. It seems inadequate
to me because (a) no cross-check is possible that we got the right
number of array entries, (b) we can't tell the difference between
a NULL pointer and a zero-length array, and (c) except for
WRITE_INDEX_ARRAY, we'd crash if a non-zero length is specified
when the pointer is NULL, a situation that can arise in some fields
that we currently conveniently avoid printing.
Since we're currently in a campaign to make the Node infrastructure
generally more it-just-works-without-thinking-about-it, now seems
like a good time to improve this.
Let's adopt a format similar to that used for Lists, that is "<>"
for a NULL pointer or "(item item item)" otherwise. Also retool
the code to not have so many copies of the identical logic.
I bumped catversion out of an abundance of caution, although I think
that we don't use any such array fields in Nodes that can get into
the catalogs.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1528424.1658272135@sss.pgh.pa.us
This allows aliases for sub-SELECTs and VALUES clauses in the FROM
clause to be omitted.
This is an extension of the SQL standard, supported by some other
database systems, and so eases the transition from such systems, as
well as removing the minor inconvenience caused by requiring these
aliases.
Patch by me, reviewed by Tom Lane.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCUCGCf82=hxd9N5n6xGHPyYpQnxW8HneeH+uP7yNALkWA@mail.gmail.com
Windows 10 gained support for flushing NTFS files with fdatasync()
semantics. The main advantage over open_datasync (in Windows API terms
FILE_FLAG_WRITE_THROUGH) is that the latter does not flush SATA drive
caches. The default setting is not changed, so users have to opt in to
this.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJZJVO%3DiX%2Beb-PXi2_XS9ZRqnn_4URh0NUQOwt6-_51xQ%40mail.gmail.com
We allow users to set the values of not-yet-loaded extension GUCs,
remembering those values in "placeholder" GUC entries. When/if
the extension is loaded later in the session, we need to verify that
the user had permissions to set the GUC. That was done correctly
before commit a0ffa885e, but as of that commit, we'd check the
permissions of the active role when the LOAD happens, not the role
that had set the value. (This'd be a security bug if it had made it
into a released version.)
In principle this is simple enough to fix: we just need to remember
the exact role OID that set each GUC value, and use that not
GetUserID() when verifying permissions. Maintaining that data in
the guc.c data structures is slightly tedious, but fortunately it's
all basically just copy-n-paste of the logic for tracking the
GucSource of each setting, as we were already doing.
Another oversight is that validate_option_array_item() hadn't
been taught to check for granted GUC privileges. This appears
to manifest only in that ALTER ROLE/DATABASE RESET ALL will
fail to reset settings that the user should be allowed to reset.
Patch by myself and Nathan Bossart, per report from Nathan Bossart.
Back-patch to v15 where the faulty code came in.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220706224727.GA2158260@nathanxps13
This is mostly just to get outfuncs.c support for them, so that
the agginfos and aggtransinfos lists can be dumped when dumping
the contents of PlannerInfo.
While here, improve some related comments; notably, clean up
obsolete comments left over from when preprocess_minmax_aggregates
had to make its own scan of the query tree.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/742479.1658160504@sss.pgh.pa.us
setrefs.c contains logic to discard no-op SubqueryScan nodes, that is,
ones that have no qual to check and copy the input targetlist unchanged.
(Formally it's not very nice to be applying such optimizations so late
in the planner, but there are practical reasons for it; mostly that we
can't unify relids between the subquery and the parent query until we
flatten the rangetable during setrefs.c.) This behavior falsifies our
previous cost estimates, since we would've charged cpu_tuple_cost per
row just to pass data through the node. Most of the time that's little
enough to not matter, but there are cases where this effect visibly
changes the plan compared to what you would've gotten with no
sub-select.
To improve the situation, make the callers of cost_subqueryscan tell
it whether they think the targetlist is trivial. cost_subqueryscan
already has the qual list, so it can check the other half of the
condition easily. It could make its own determination of tlist
triviality too, but doing so would be repetitive (for callers that
may call it several times) or unnecessarily expensive (for callers
that can determine this more cheaply than a general test would do).
This isn't a 100% solution, because createplan.c also does things
that can falsify any earlier estimate of whether the tlist is
trivial. However, it fixes nearly all cases in practice, if results
for the regression tests are anything to go by.
setrefs.c also contains logic to discard no-op Append and MergeAppend
nodes. We did have knowledge of that behavior at costing time, but
somebody failed to update it when a check on parallel-awareness was
added to the setrefs.c logic. Fix that while we're here.
These changes result in two minor changes in query plans shown in
our regression tests. Neither is relevant to the purposes of its
test case AFAICT.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2581077.1651703520@sss.pgh.pa.us
Because they are not available we've used _fileno(stdin) in some places, but
that doesn't reliably work, because stdin might be closed. This is the
prerequisite of the subsequent commit, fixing a failure introduced in
76e38b37a5.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reported-By: Sandeep Thakkar <sandeep.thakkar@enterprisedb.com>
Message-Id: 20220520164558.ozb7lm6unakqzezi@alap3.anarazel.de (on pgsql-packagers)
Backpatch: 15-, where 76e38b37a5 came in
This is in preparation for defaulting to -fvisibility=hidden in extensions,
instead of relying on all symbols in extensions to be exported.
This should have been committed before 089480c077, but something in my commit
scripts went wrong.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20211101020311.av6hphdl6xbjbuif@alap3.anarazel.de
Until now postgres built extension libraries with global visibility, i.e.
exporting all symbols. On the one platform where that behavior is not
natively available, namely windows, we emulate it by analyzing the input files
to the shared library and exporting all the symbols therein.
Not exporting all symbols is actually desirable, as it can improve loading
speed, reduces the likelihood of symbol conflicts and can improve intra
extension library function call performance. It also makes the non-windows
builds more similar to windows builds.
Additionally, with meson implementing the export-all-symbols behavior for
windows, turns out to be more verbose than desirable.
This patch adds support for hiding symbols by default and, to counteract that,
explicit symbol visibility annotation for compilers that support
__attribute__((visibility("default"))) and -fvisibility=hidden. That is
expected to be most, if not all, compilers except msvc (for which we already
support explicit symbol export annotations).
Now that extension library symbols are explicitly exported, we don't need to
export all symbols on windows anymore, hence remove that behavior from
src/tools/msvc. The supporting code can't be removed, as we still need to
export all symbols from the main postgres binary.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20211101020311.av6hphdl6xbjbuif@alap3.anarazel.de
This is in preparation for defaulting to -fvisibility=hidden in extensions,
instead of exporting all symbols. For that symbols intended to be exported
need to be tagged with PGDLLEXPORT. Most extensions only need to do so for
_PG_init() and functions defined with PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1. Adding central
declarations avoids each extension having to add PGDLLEXPORT. Any existing
declarations in extensions will continue to work if fmgr.h is included before
them, otherwise compilation for Windows will fail.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20211101020311.av6hphdl6xbjbuif@alap3.anarazel.de
Since commit a65e0864, we've required Unix systems to have
sigprocmask(). As noted in that commit's message, we were still
emulating the historical pre-standard sigsetmask() function in our
Windows support code. Emulate standard sigprocmask() instead, for
consistency.
The PG_SETMASK() abstraction is now redundant and all calls could in
theory be replaced by plain sigprocmask() calls, but that isn't done by
this commit.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3153247.1657834482%40sss.pgh.pa.us
For some systems, we need to avoid unsatisfied-external-reference
errors in static inlines. See
27d2693187 for example. In order to
test that on other systems, the gcc option -fkeep-inline-functions can
be used. But it actually is a bit stricter than what we currently
have in place, so fix up a few more places along the lines of the
above commit. (This undoes part of commit
2cd2569c72b8920048e35c31c9be30a6170e1410.)
(Note, this does not add that gcc option anywhere to the build system,
it just makes it possible to use it successfully manually.)
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E1oBgIW-002ehP-VJ%40gemulon.postgresql.org
Noticed while working in this area. This code was introduced in PG15,
which is still in beta, so backpatch to there for consistency.
Backpatch-through: 15
Teach this script to handle function pointer fields honestly.
Previously they were just silently ignored, but that's not likely to
be a behavior we can accept indefinitely. This mostly entails fixing
it so that a field declaration spanning multiple lines can be parsed,
because we have a bunch of such fields that're laid out that way.
But that's a good improvement in its own right.
With that change and a minor regex adjustment, the only struct it
fails to parse in the node-defining headers is A_Const, because
of the embedded union. The path of least resistance is to move
that union declaration outside the struct.
Having done those things, we can make it error out if it finds
any within-struct syntax it doesn't understand, which seems like
a pretty important property for robustness.
This commit doesn't change the output files at all; it's just in
the way of future-proofing.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2593369.1657759779@sss.pgh.pa.us
Previously we displayed "DSMFillZeroWrite" while in posix_fallocate(),
because we shared the same wait event for "mmap" and "posix" DSM types.
Let's introduce a new wait event "DSMAllocate", to be more accurate.
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220711174518.yldckniicknsxgzl%40awork3.anarazel.de
No members of the buildfarm are using this version of Visual Studio,
resulting in all the code cleaned up here as being mostly dead, and
VS2017 is the oldest version still supported.
More versions could be cut, but the gain would be minimal, while
removing only VS2013 has the advantage to remove from the core code all
the dependencies on the value defined by _MSC_VER, where compatibility
tweaks have accumulated across the years mostly around locales and
strtof(), so that's a nice isolated cleanup.
Note that this commit additionally allows a revert of 3154e16. The
versions of Visual Studio now supported range from 2015 to 2022.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Juan José Santamaría Flecha, Tom Lane, Thomas Munro, Justin
Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YoH2IMtxcS3ncWn+@paquier.xyz
Commit 9c727360b neglected the lesson we've learned before:
protect references to backend global variables with #ifndef FRONTEND.
Since there's already a place for static inlines in this file,
move the just-converted functions to that stanza. Undo the
entirely gratuitous de-macroization of RelationGetNumberOfBlocks
(that one may be okay, since it has no global variable references,
but it's also pointless).
Per buildfarm.
The initial version of gen_node_support.pl manually excluded most
utility statement node types from having out/read support, and
also some raw-parse-tree-only node types. That was mostly to keep
the output comparable to the old hand-maintained code. We'd like
to have out/read support for utility statements, for debugging
purposes and so that they can be included in new-style SQL functions;
so it's time to lift that restriction.
Most if not all of the previously-excluded raw-parse-tree-only node
types can appear in expression subtrees of utility statements, so
they have to be handled too.
We don't quite have full read support yet; certain custom_read_write
node types need to have their handwritten read functions implemented
before that will work.
Doing this allows us to drop the previous hack in _outQuery to not
dump the utilityStmt field in most cases, which means we no longer
need manually-maintained out/read functions for Query, so get rid
of those in favor of auto-generating them.
Fix a couple of omissions in gen_node_support.pl that are exposed
through having to handle more node types.
catversion bump forced because somebody was sloppy about the field
order in the manually-maintained Query out/read functions.
(Committers should note that almost all changes in parsenodes.h
are now grounds for a catversion bump.)
Previously, the STORAGE specification was only available in ALTER
TABLE. This makes it available in CREATE TABLE as well.
Also make the code and the documentation for STORAGE and COMPRESSION
attributes consistent.
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: wenjing zeng <wjzeng2012@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/de83407a-ae3d-a8e1-a788-920eb334f25b@sigaev.ru
There are a few things that we could do a little better within
get_cheapest_group_keys_order():
1. We should be using list_free() rather than pfree() on a List.
2. We should use for_each_from() instead of manually coding a for loop to
skip the first n elements of a List
3. list_truncate(list_copy(...), n) is not a great way to copy the first n
elements of a list. Let's invent list_copy_head() for that. That way we
don't need to copy the entire list just to truncate it directly
afterwards.
4. We can simplify finding the cheapest cost by setting the cheapest cost
variable to DBL_MAX. That allows us to skip special-casing the initial
iteration of the loop.
Author: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrGyL3ft8waEkncG9y5HDMu5TFFJB1paoTC8zi9YK97Nw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15, where get_cheapest_group_keys_order was added.
Justin Pryzby reported that some scenarios could cause gathering
of extended statistics to spend many seconds in an un-cancelable
qsort() operation. To fix, invent qsort_interruptible(), which is
just like qsort_arg() except that it will also do CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS
every so often. This bloats the backend by a couple of kB, which
seems like a good investment. (We considered just enabling
CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS in the existing qsort and qsort_arg functions,
but there are some callers for which that'd demonstrably be unsafe.
Opt-in seems like a better way.)
For now, just apply qsort_interruptible() in statistics collection.
There's probably more places where it could be useful, but we can
always change other call sites as we find problems.
Back-patch to v14. Before that we didn't have extended stats on
expressions, so that the problem was less severe. Also, this patch
depends on the sort_template infrastructure introduced in v14.
Tom Lane and Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220509000108.GQ28830@telsasoft.com
Having different build systems producing different contents of the
NodeTag enum would be catastrophic for extension ABI stability.
But that ordering depends on the order in which gen_node_support.pl
processes its input files. It seems too fragile to let the Makefiles,
MSVC build scripts, and soon meson build scripts all set this order
independently. As a klugy but serviceable solution, put a canonical
copy of the file list into gen_node_support.pl itself, and check that
against the files given on the command line.
Also, while it's fine to add and delete node tags during development,
we must not let the assigned NodeTag values change unexpectedly in
stable branches. Add a cross-check that can be enabled when a branch
is forked off (or later, but that is a time when we're unlikely to
miss doing it). It just checks that the last auto-assigned number
doesn't change, which is simplistic but will catch the most likely
sorts of mistakes.
From time to time we do need to add a node tag in a stable branch.
To support doing that without changing the branch's auto-assigned
tag numbers, invent pg_node_attr(nodetag_number(VALUE)) which can
be used to give such a node a hand-assigned tag above the last
auto-assigned one.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1249010.1657574337@sss.pgh.pa.us
This allows explaining gen_node_support.pl's handling of execnodes.h
and some other input files as being a shortcut for explicit marking
of all their node declarations as pg_node_attr(nodetag_only).
I foresee that someday we might need to be more fine-grained about
that, and this change provides the infrastructure needed to do so.
For now, it just allows removal of the script's klugy special case
for CallContext and InlineCodeBlock.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/75063.1657410615@sss.pgh.pa.us
Further to commit 92d70b77, let's drop the code we carry for the
following untested architectures: M68K, M88K, M32R, SuperH. We have no
idea if anything actually works there, and surely as vintage hardware
and microcontrollers they would be underpowered for modern purposes.
We could always consider re-adding SuperH based on evidence of usage and
build farm support, if someone shows up to provide it.
While here, SPARC is usually written in all caps.
Suggested-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (the idea, not the patch)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/959917.1657522169%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Refactor so that log_line_prefix() is a thin wrapper over a new
function log_status_format(), and move the implementation to the
latter. Export log_status_format() so that it can be used by an
emit_log_hook.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/39c8197652f4d3050aedafae79fa5af31096505f.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Alvaro Herrera
Remove PageIsValid() and PageSizeIsValid(), which weren't used and
seem unnecessary.
Some code using these formerly-macros needs some adjustments because
it was previously playing loose with the Page vs. PageHeader types,
which is no longer possible with the functions instead of macros.
Reviewed-by: Amul Sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5b558da8-99fb-0a99-83dd-f72f05388517%40enterprisedb.com
dshash.c previously maintained flags to be able to assert that you
didn't hold any partition lock. These flags could get out of sync with
reality in error scenarios.
Get rid of all that, and make assertions about the locks themselves
instead. Since LWLockHeldByMe() loops internally, we don't want to put
that inside another loop over all partition locks. Introduce a new
debugging-only interface LWLockAnyHeldByMe() to avoid that.
This problem was noted by Tom and Andres while reviewing changes to
support the new shared memory stats system, and later showed up in
reality while working on commit 389869af.
Back-patch to 11, where dshash.c arrived.
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220311012712.botrpsikaufzteyt@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ31Wce6HJ7xnVTKWjFUWQZPBngxfJVx4q0E98pDr3kAw%40mail.gmail.com
* Remove arbitrary mention of certain endianness and bitness variants;
it's enough to say that applicable variants are expected to work.
* List RISC-V (known to work, being tested).
* List SuperH and M88K (code exists, unknown status, like M68K).
* De-list VAX and remove code (known not to work).
* Remove stray trace of Alpha (support was removed years ago).
* List illumos, DragonFlyBSD (known to work, being tested).
* No need to single Windows out by listing a specific version, when we
don't do that for other OSes; it's enough to say that we support
current versions of the listed OSes (when 16 ships, that'll be
Windows 10+).
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKk7NZO1UnJM0PyixcZPpCGqjBXW_0bzFZpJBGAf84XKg%40mail.gmail.com
copyfuncs.c and friends no longer seem like great places to put
high-level remarks about what's covered and what isn't. Move that
material to backend/nodes/README and other more-prominent places.
Add back (versions of) some remarks that disappeared in 2be87f092.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3843645.1657385930@sss.pgh.pa.us
In the same vein as commit 251154beb, make it clear that we never
instantiate PlanState.
Also mark MemoryContextData as abstract. This has no effect right now,
since memnodes.h isn't one of the files fed to gen_node_support.pl.
But it seems like good documentation and future-proofing.
Add a script to automatically generate the node support functions
(copy, equal, out, and read, as well as the node tags enum) from the
struct definitions.
For each of the four node support files, it creates two include files,
e.g., copyfuncs.funcs.c and copyfuncs.switch.c, to include in the main
file. All the scaffolding of the main file stays in place.
I have tried to mostly make the coverage of the output match what is
currently there. For example, one could now do out/read coverage of
utility statement nodes, but I have manually excluded those for now.
The reason is mainly that it's easier to diff the before and after,
and adding a bunch of stuff like this might require a separate
analysis and review.
Subtyping (TidScan -> Scan) is supported.
For the hard cases, you can just write a manual function and exclude
generating one. For the not so hard cases, there is a way of
annotating struct fields to get special behaviors. For example,
pg_node_attr(equal_ignore) has the field ignored in equal functions.
(In this patch, I have only ifdef'ed out the code to could be removed,
mainly so that it won't constantly have merge conflicts. It will be
deleted in a separate patch. All the code comments that are worth
keeping from those sections have already been moved to the header
files where the structs are defined.)
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/c1097590-a6a4-486a-64b1-e1f9cc0533ce%40enterprisedb.com
PostgreSQL contains the implementation of the red-black tree. The red-black
tree is the ordered data structure, and one of its advantages is the ability
to do inequality searches. This commit adds rbt_find_less() and
rbt_find_great() functions implementing these searches. While these searches
aren't yet used in the core code, they might be useful for extensions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGRrpzYE8-7GCoaPjOiL9T_HY605MRax-2jgTtLq236uksZ1Sw%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Steve Chavez, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov
This CPU architecture has been discontinued. We already removed HP-UX
support, we never supported Windows/Itanium, and the open source
operating systems that a vintage hardware owner might hope to run have
all either ended Itanium support or never fully released support (NetBSD
may eventually). The extra code we carry for this rare ISA is now
untested. It seems like a good time to remove it.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1415825.1656893299%40sss.pgh.pa.us
HP-UX hardware is no longer produced, build farm coverage recently
ended, and there are no known active maintainers targeting this OS.
Since there is a major rewrite of the build system in the pipeline for
PostgreSQL 16, and that requires development, testing and maintainance
for each OS and tool chain, it seems like a good time to drop support
for:
* HP-UX, the operating system.
* HP aCC, the HP-UX native compiler.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1415825.1656893299%40sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit bumps the runtime value of _WIN32_WINNT to be 0x0A00 for any
builds on Windows. Hence, this makes Windows 10 the minimal requirement
when running PostgreSQL under WIN32, be it for builds of Cygwin, MinGW
or Visual Studio.
The previous minimal runtime version was either Windows Vista when
building with at least Visual Studio 2015 or Windows XP for the rest.
Windows 10 is the most modern version supported by Microsoft, and per
discussion, as we don't have buildfarm members that run older versions
anymore, this is the minimal supported version that suits better for our
needs. This will actually make easier the development of some patches,
two being async I/O and large page handling by avoiding a lot of
compatibility gotchas, on platforms that have most likely few users
anyway.
It is possible to remove MIN_WINNT in win32.h and the macros
IsWindowsXXXOrGreater() that were used in the code at runtime to check
which version of Windows was getting used. The change in pg_locale.c
comes from Juan. Note that all my tests passed, and that the CI is
green. The buildfarm will quickly tell if this needs more adjustments.
Author: Michael Paquier, Juan José Santamaría Flecha
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yo7tHKD8VCkeNi71@paquier.xyz
40af10b57 changed things so we make use of a generation memory context for
storing tuples to be sorted by tuplesort.c. That change does not play
nicely with the changes made in 9f03ca915 (back in 2014). That commit
changed things so that index_form_tuple() is called while switched into
the tuplestore's tuplecontext. In order to fetch the tuple from the index,
index_form_tuple() must do various memory allocations which are unrelated
to the storage of the final returned tuple. Although all of these
allocations are pfree'd, the fact that we now use a generation context
means that the memory for these pfree'd allocations won't be used again by
any other allocation due to generation.c's lack of freelists. This could
result in sorts used for building indexes exceeding maintenance_work_mem
by a very large amount.
Here we fix it so we no longer allocate anything apart from the tuple
itself into the generation context by adding a new version of
index_form_tuple named index_form_tuple_context, which can be called to
specify the MemoryContext to allocate the tuple into.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrHQkiFRHiGiAS-LMOvJN-eK-s762=tVzBz8ZqUea-a_A@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15, where 40af10b57 was added.
We have been using the term RelFileNode to refer to either (1) the
integer that is used to name the sequence of files for a certain relation
within the directory set aside for that tablespace/database combination;
or (2) that value plus the OIDs of the tablespace and database; or
occasionally (3) the whole series of files created for a relation
based on those values. Using the same name for more than one thing is
confusing.
Replace RelFileNode with RelFileNumber when we're talking about just the
single number, i.e. (1) from above, and with RelFileLocator when we're
talking about all the things that are needed to locate a relation's files
on disk, i.e. (2) from above. In the places where we refer to (3) as
a relfilenode, instead refer to "relation storage".
Since there is a ton of SQL code in the world that knows about
pg_class.relfilenode, don't change the name of that column, or of other
SQL-facing things that derive their name from it.
On the other hand, do adjust closely-related internal terminology. For
example, the structure member names dbNode and spcNode appear to be
derived from the fact that the structure itself was called RelFileNode,
so change those to dbOid and spcOid. Likewise, various variables with
names like rnode and relnode get renamed appropriately, according to
how they're being used in context.
Hopefully, this is clearer than before. It is also preparation for
future patches that intend to widen the relfilenumber fields from its
current width of 32 bits. Variables that store a relfilenumber are now
declared as type RelFileNumber rather than type Oid; right now, these
are the same, but that can now more easily be changed.
Dilip Kumar, per an idea from me. Reviewed also by Andres Freund.
I fixed some whitespace issues, changed a couple of words in a
comment, and made one other minor correction.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoamOtXbVAQf9hWFzonUo6bhhjS6toZQd7HZ-pmojtAmag@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobp7+7kmi4gkq7Y+4AM9fTvL+O1oQ4-5gFTT+6Ng-dQ=g@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vTe79M8uDH1yprOU64MNFE+R3ODRuA+JWf27JbhY4hJw@mail.gmail.com
50e17ad28 increased the size of ExprEvalStep from 64 bytes up to 88 bytes.
Lots of effort was spent during the development of the current expression
evaluation code to make an instance of this struct as small as possible.
Making this struct larger than needed reduces CPU cache efficiency during
expression evaluation which causes noticeable slowdowns during query
execution.
In order to reduce the size of the struct, here we remove the fn_addr
field. The values from this field can be obtained via fcinfo, just with
some extra pointer dereferencing. The extra indirection does not seem to
cause any noticeable slowdowns.
Various other fields have been moved into the ScalarArrayOpExprHashTable
struct. These fields are only used when the ScalarArrayOpExprHashTable
pointer has already been dereferenced, so no additional pointer
dereferences occur for these. Here we also make hash_fcinfo_data the last
field in ScalarArrayOpExprHashTable so that we can avoid a further pointer
dereference to get the FunctionCallInfoBaseData. This also saves a call to
palloc().
50e17ad28 was added in 14, but it's too late to adjust the size of the
ExprEvalStep in that version, so here we just backpatch to 15, which is
currently in beta.
Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch-through: 15
auto_explain.log_parameter_max_length is a new GUC part of the
extension, similar to the corresponding core setting, that controls the
inclusion of query parameters in the logged explain output.
More tests are added to check the behavior of this new parameter: when
parameters logged in full (the default of -1), when disabled (value of
0) and when partially truncated (value different than the two others).
Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87ee09mohb.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
The new expression step types increased the size of ExprEvalStep by ~4 for all
types of expression steps, slowing down expression evaluation noticeably. Move
them out of line.
There's other issues with these expression steps, but addressing them is
largely independent of this aspect.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: 15-
This reverts most of 91c0570a79, f28bf667f6, fe0972ee5e, afdeff1052. The
only thing left is the retry loop in 019_replslot_limit.pl that avoids
spurious failures by retrying a couple times.
We haven't seen any hard evidence that this is caused by anything but slow
process shutdown. We did not find any cases where walsenders did not vanish
after waiting for longer. Therefore there's no reason for this debugging code
to remain.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220530190155.47wr3x2prdwyciah@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: 15-
A previous commit replaced all the calls to this function with
durable_rename() as of dac1ff3, making it used nowhere in the tree.
Using it in extension code is also risky based on the issues described
in this previous commit, so let's remove it. This makes possible the
removal of HAVE_WORKING_LINK.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220407182954.GA1231544@nathanxps13
Use it for RelationSyncEntry->streamed_txns, which is currently using an
integer list.
The API support is not complete, not because it is hard to write but
because it's unclear that it's worth the code space, there being so
little use of XID lists.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202205130830.g5ntonhztspb@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
pg_attribute_nonnull(...) can be used to generate compiler warnings
when a function is called with the specified arguments set to NULL, as
per an idea from Andres Freund. An empty argument list indicates that
no pointer arguments can be NULL. pg_attribute_nonnull() only works for
compilers that support the nonnull function attribute. If nonnull is
not supported, pg_attribute_nonnull() has no effect.
As a beginning, this commit uses it for the DefineCustomXXXVariable()
functions to generate warnings when the "name" and "value" arguments are
set to NULL. This will likely be expanded to other places in the
future, where it makes sense.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Michael Paquier, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220525061739.ur7x535vtzyzkmqo@alap3.anarazel.de
There were many calls to construct_array() and deconstruct_array() for
built-in types, for example, when dealing with system catalog columns.
These all hardcoded the type attributes necessary to pass to these
functions.
To simplify this a bit, add construct_array_builtin(),
deconstruct_array_builtin() as wrappers that centralize this hardcoded
knowledge. This simplifies many call sites and reduces the amount of
hardcoded stuff that is spread around.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/2914356f-9e5f-8c59-2995-5997fc48bcba%40enterprisedb.com
TransactionIdIsInProgress had a fast path to return 'false' if the
single-item CLOG cache said that the transaction was known to be
committed. However, that was wrong, because a transaction is first
marked as committed in the CLOG but doesn't become visible to others
until it has removed its XID from the proc array. That could lead to an
error:
ERROR: t_xmin is uncommitted in tuple to be updated
or for an UPDATE to go ahead without blocking, before the previous
UPDATE on the same row was made visible.
The window is usually very short, but synchronous replication makes it
much wider, because the wait for synchronous replica happens in that
window.
Another thing that makes it hard to hit is that it's hard to get such
a commit-in-progress transaction into the single item CLOG cache.
Normally, if you call TransactionIdIsInProgress on such a transaction,
it determines that the XID is in progress without checking the CLOG
and without populating the cache. One way to prime the cache is to
explicitly call pg_xact_status() on the XID. Another way is to use a
lot of subtransactions, so that the subxid cache in the proc array is
overflown, making TransactionIdIsInProgress rely on pg_subtrans and
CLOG checks.
This has been broken ever since it was introduced in 2008, but the race
condition is very hard to hit, especially without synchronous
replication. There were a couple of reports of the error starting from
summer 2021, but no one was able to find the root cause then.
TransactionIdIsKnownCompleted() is now unused. In 'master', remove it,
but I left it in place in backbranches in case it's used by extensions.
Also change pg_xact_status() to check TransactionIdIsInProgress().
Previously, it only checked the CLOG, and returned "committed" before
the transaction was actually made visible to other queries. Note that
this also means that you cannot use pg_xact_status() to reproduce the
bug anymore, even if the code wasn't fixed.
Report and analysis by Konstantin Knizhnik. Patch by Simon Riggs, with
the pg_xact_status() change added by me.
Author: Simon Riggs
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4da7913d-398c-e2ad-d777-f752cf7f0bbb%40garret.ru
Previously, we encoded both NULL and the first byte at the base address
as 0. That confusion led to the assertion in commit e07d4ddc, which
failed when min_dynamic_shared_memory was used. Give them distinct
encodings, by switching to 1-based offsets for non-NULL pointers. Also
improve macro hygiene in passing (missing/misplaced parentheses), and
remove open-coded access to the raw offset value from freepage.c/h.
Although e07d4ddc was back-patched to 10, the only code that actually
makes use of relptr at the base address arrived in 84b1c63a, so no need
to back-patch further than 14 for now.
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220519193839.GT19626%40telsasoft.com
This reverts commits 5753d4ee32 and fe60b67250 that modified HOT to
ignore BRIN indexes. The commit message for 5753d4ee32 claims that:
When determining whether an index update may be skipped by using
HOT, we can ignore attributes indexed only by BRIN indexes. There
are no index pointers to individual tuples in BRIN, and the page
range summary will be updated anyway as it relies on visibility
info.
This is partially incorrect - it's true BRIN indexes don't point to
individual tuples, so HOT chains are not an issue, but the visibitlity
info is not sufficient to keep the index up to date. This can easily
result in corrupted indexes, as demonstrated in the hackers thread.
This does not mean relaxing the HOT restrictions for BRIN is a lost
cause, but it needs to handle the two aspects (allowing HOT chains and
updating the page range summaries) as separate. But that requires a
major changes, and it's too late for that in the current dev cycle.
Reported-by: Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/05ebcb44-f383-86e3-4f31-0a97a55634cf@enterprisedb.com
We were not updating the partition map cache in the subscriber even when
the corresponding remote rel is changed. Due to this data was getting
incorrectly replicated for partition tables after the publisher has
changed the table schema.
Fix it by resetting the required entries in the partition map cache after
receiving a new relation mapping from the publisher.
Reported-by: Shi Yu
Author: Shi Yu, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 13, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSZPR01MB6310F46CD425A967E4AEF736FDA49@OSZPR01MB6310.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
The original advice for hard-wired SetConfigOption calls was to use
PGC_S_OVERRIDE, particularly for PGC_INTERNAL GUCs. However,
that's really overkill for PGC_INTERNAL GUCs, since there is no
possibility that we need to override a user-provided setting.
Instead use PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT in most places, so that the
value will appear with source = 'default' in pg_settings and thereby
not be shown by psql's new \dconfig command. The one exception is
that when changing in_hot_standby in a hot-standby session, we still
use PGC_S_OVERRIDE, because people felt that seeing that in \dconfig
would be a good thing.
Similarly use PGC_S_DYNAMIC_DEFAULT for the auto-tune value of
wal_buffers (if possible, that is if wal_buffers wasn't explicitly
set to -1), and for the typical 2MB value of max_stack_depth.
In combination these changes remove four not-very-interesting
entries from the typical output of \dconfig, all of which people
fingered as "why is that showing up?" in the discussion thread.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3118455.1649267333@sss.pgh.pa.us
With the old logic, when the reciever had not yet attached, we would
never call shm_mq_inc_bytes_written(), even if force_flush = true
was specified. That could result in a situation where data that the
sender believes it has sent is never received.
Along the way, remove a useless function prototype for a nonexistent
function from shm_mq.h.
Commit 46846433a0 introduced these
problems.
Pavan Deolasee, with a few changes by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABOikdPkwtLLCTnzzmpSMXo3QZa2yXq0J7Q61ssdLFAJYrOVvQ@mail.gmail.com
Commit 1a36bc9db (SQL/JSON query functions) introduced STRING as a
type_func_name_keyword, thereby breaking applications that use
"string" as a table name, column name, function parameter name, etc.
That seems like a pretty bad thing, not least because the SQL spec
says that STRING is an unreserved keyword.
This is easy enough to fix so far as the core grammar is concerned.
However, doing so causes some ECPG test cases to fail, specifically
those that use "string" as a typedef name. It turns out this is
because portions of the ECPG grammar allow type_func_name_keywords
but not unreserved_keywords as typedef names. That's pretty horrid,
and it's mildly astonishing that we've not heard complaints about it
before. We can fix two of those uses trivially, but the ones in the
var_type production are less easy. As a stopgap, hard-code STRING as
an allowed alternative in var_type.
Per report from Alastair McKinley.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3661437.1653855582@sss.pgh.pa.us
Several places in the planner tried to clamp a double value to fit
in a "long" by doing
(long) Min(x, (double) LONG_MAX);
This is subtly incorrect, because it casts LONG_MAX to double and
potentially back again. If long is 64 bits then the double value
is inexact, and the platform might round it up to LONG_MAX+1
resulting in an overflow and an undesirably negative output.
While it's not hard to rewrite the expression into a safe form,
let's put it into a common function to reduce the risk of someone
doing it wrong in future.
In principle this is a bug fix, but since the problem could only
manifest with group count estimates exceeding 2^63, it seems unlikely
that anyone has actually hit this or will do so anytime soon. We're
fixing it mainly to satisfy fuzzer-type tools. That being the case,
a HEAD-only fix seems sufficient.
Andrey Lepikhov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ebbc2efb-7ef9-bf2f-1ada-d6ec48f70e58@postgrespro.ru
This is a slight, convenient semantics change from what commit
0f0cfb4940 ("Fix parallel operations that prevent oldest xmin from
advancing") introduced that lets us simplify the coding in the one place
where it is used.
Backpatch to 13. This is related to commit 6fea65508a ("Tighten
ComputeXidHorizons' handling of walsenders") rewriting the code site
where this is used, which has not yet been backpatched, but it may well
be in the future.
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202204191637.eldwa2exvguw@alvherre.pgsql
Commit 923def9a53 and 52e4f0cd47 allowed to specify column lists and row
filters for publication tables. This commit extends the
pg_publication_tables view and pg_get_publication_tables function to
display that information.
This information will be useful to users and we also need this for the
later commit that prohibits combining multiple publications with different
column lists for the same table.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed By: Amit Kapila, Alvaro Herrera, Shi Yu, Takamichi Osumi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202204251548.mudq7jbqnh7r@alvherre.pgsql
I started out with the intention to rename value_type to item_type to
avoid a collision with a typedef name that appears on some platforms.
Along the way, I noticed that the adjacent field "format" was not being
correctly handled by the backend/nodes/ infrastructure functions:
copyfuncs.c erroneously treated it as a scalar, while equalfuncs,
outfuncs, and readfuncs omitted handling it at all. This looks like
it might be cosmetic at the moment because the field is always NULL
after parse analysis; but that's likely a bug in itself, and the code's
certainly not very future-proof. Let's fix it while we can still do so
without forcing an initdb on beta testers.
Further study found a few other inconsistencies in the backend/nodes/
infrastructure for the recently-added JSON node types, so fix those too.
catversion bumped because of potential change in stored rules.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/526703.1652385613@sss.pgh.pa.us
Currently, preloaded libraries are expected to request additional
shared memory and LWLocks in _PG_init(). However, it is not unusal
for such requests to depend on MaxBackends, which won't be
initialized at that time. Such requests could also depend on GUCs
that other modules might change. This introduces a new hook where
modules can safely use MaxBackends and GUCs to request additional
shared memory and LWLocks.
Furthermore, this change restricts requests for shared memory and
LWLocks to this hook. Previously, libraries could make requests
until the size of the main shared memory segment was calculated.
Unlike before, we no longer silently ignore requests received at
invalid times. Instead, we FATAL if someone tries to request
additional shared memory or LWLocks outside of the hook.
Nathan Bossart and Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220412210112.GA2065815%40nathanxps13
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yn2jE/lmDhKtkUdr@paquier.xyz
Run renumber_oids.pl to move high-numbered OIDs down, as per pre-beta
tasks specified by RELEASE_CHANGES. For reference, the command was
./renumber_oids.pl --first-mapped-oid 8000 --target-oid 6205
Three variables in pqsignal.h (UnBlockSig, BlockSig and StartupBlockSig)
were not marked with PGDLLIMPORT, as they are declared in a way that
prevents mark_pgdllimport.pl to detect them. These variables are
redefined in a style more consistent with the other headers, allowing
the script to find and mark them.
PGDLLIMPORT was missing for __pg_log_level in logging.h, so add it
back. The marking got accidentally removed in 9a374b77, just after its
addition in 8ec5694.
While on it, add a comment in mark_pgdllimport.pl explaining what are
the arguments needed by the script (aka a list of header paths).
Reported-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220506234924.6mxxotl3xl63db3l@alap3.anarazel.de
The code for unloading a library has been commented-out for over 12
years, ever since commit 602a9ef5a7, and we're
no closer to supporting it now than we were back then.
Nathan Bossart, reviewed by Michael Paquier and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/Ynsc9bRL1caUSBSE@paquier.xyz
The problem is that we don't send keep-alive messages for a long time
while processing large transactions during logical replication where we
don't send any data of such transactions. This can happen when the table
modified in the transaction is not published or because all the changes
got filtered. We do try to send the keep_alive if necessary at the end of
the transaction (via WalSndWriteData()) but by that time the
subscriber-side can timeout and exit.
To fix this we try to send the keepalive message if required after
processing certain threshold of changes.
Reported-by: Fabrice Chapuis
Author: Wang wei and Amit Kapila
Reviewed By: Masahiko Sawada, Euler Taveira, Hou Zhijie, Hayato Kuroda
Backpatch-through: 10
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA5-nLARN7-3SLU_QUxfy510pmrYK6JJb=bk3hcgemAM_pAv+w@mail.gmail.com
697492434 added 3 new quicksort specialization functions for common
datatypes.
That commit was not very consistent in how it would determine if we're
compiling for 32-bit or 64-bit machines. It would sometimes use
USE_FLOAT8_BYVAL and at other times check if SIZEOF_DATUM == 8. This
could cause theoretical problems due to the way USE_FLOAT8_BYVAL is now
defined based on SIZEOF_VOID_P >= 8. If pointers for some reason were
ever larger than 8-bytes then we'd end up doing 32-bit comparisons
mistakenly. Let's just always check SIZEOF_DATUM >= 8.
It also seems that ssup_datum_signed_cmp is just never used on 32-bit
builds, so let's just ifdef that out to make sure we never accidentally
use that comparison function on such machines. This also allows us to
ifdef out 1 of the 3 new specialization quicksort functions in 32-bit
builds which seems to shrink down the binary by over 4KB on my machine.
In passing, also add the missing DatumGetInt32() / DatumGetInt64() macros
in the comparison functions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqcQExRhtRa9hJrJB_5egs3SUfOcutP3m+3HO8A+fZTPA@mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: John Naylor
Commits 4eb21763 and b74e94dc introduced a way to force every backend to
close all relation files, to fix an ancient Windows-only bug.
This commit extends that behavior to all operating systems and adds
a couple of extra barrier points, to fix a totally different class of
bug: the reuse of relfilenodes in scenarios that have no other kind of
cache invalidation to prevent file descriptor mix-ups.
In all releases, data corruption could occur when you moved a database
to another tablespace and then back again. Despite that, no back-patch
for now as the infrastructure required is too new and invasive. In
master only, since commit aa010514, it could also happen when using
CREATE DATABASE with a user-supplied OID or via pg_upgrade.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220209220004.kb3dgtn2x2k2gtdm%40alap3.anarazel.de
With sufficiently bad luck, it was possible for IssuePendingWritebacks()
to reopen a file after we'd processed PROCSIGNAL_BARRIER_SMGRRELEASE and
before the file was unlinked by some other backend. That left a small
hole in commit 4eb21763's plan to fix all spurious errors from DROP
TABLESPACE and similar on Windows.
Fix by closing md.c's segments, instead of just closing fd.c's
descriptors, and then teaching smgrwriteback() not to open files that
aren't already open.
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220209220004.kb3dgtn2x2k2gtdm%40alap3.anarazel.de
The test for lz4.h used AC_CHECK_HEADERS, but nothing was using the
resulting symbol HAVE_LZ4_H. Change this to use AC_CHECK_HEADER
instead. This was probably an oversight, seeing that the nearby
similar tests do this correctly.
Instability in the test for pg_walinspect revealed that
pg_get_wal_records_info_till_end_of_wal(x) would try to decode all the
records with a start LSN earlier than the flush LSN, even though that
might include a partial record at the end of the range. In that case,
read_local_xlog_page_no_wait() would return NULL when it tried to read
past the flush LSN, which would be interpreted as an error by the
caller. That caused a test failure only on a BF animal that had been
restarted recently, but could be expected to happen in the wild quite
easily depending on the alignment of various parameters.
Fix by using private data in read_local_xlog_page_no_wait() to signal
end-of-wal to the caller, so that it can be properly distinguished
from a real error.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Ymd/e5eeZMNAkrXo%40paquier.xyz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/111657.1650910309@sss.pgh.pa.us
Authors: Thomas Munro, Bharath Rupireddy.
This reverts commits 2c902bb and ccfbd92. Per buildfarm members
kestrel, rorqual and calliphoridae, the assertions checking that a TLI
history file should not exist when created by a WAL receiver have been
failing, and switching to durable_rename() over durable_rename_excl()
would cause the newest TLI history file to overwrite the existing one.
We need to think harder about such cases, so revert the new logic for
now.
Note that all the failures have been reported in the test
025_stuck_on_old_timeline.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/511362.1651116498@sss.pgh.pa.us
ccfbd92 has replaced all existing in-core callers of this function in
favor of durable_rename(). durable_rename_excl() is by nature unsafe on
crashes happening at the wrong time, so just remove it.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220407182954.GA1231544@nathanxps13
inline_cte() expected to find exactly as many references to the
target CTE as its cterefcount indicates. While that should be
accurate for the tree as emitted by the parser, there are some
optimizations that occur upstream of here that could falsify it,
notably removal of unused subquery output expressions.
Trying to make the accounting 100% accurate seems expensive and
doomed to future breakage. It's not really worth it, because
all this code is protecting is downstream assumptions that every
referenced CTE has a plan. Let's convert those assertions to
regular test-and-elog just in case there's some actual problem,
and then drop the failing assertion.
Per report from Tomas Vondra (thanks also to Richard Guo for
analysis). Back-patch to v12 where the faulty code came in.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/29196a1e-ed47-c7ca-9be2-b1c636816183@enterprisedb.com
Commit aa0105141 assigned fixed OIDs to template0 and postgres
in a very ad-hoc way. Notably, instead of teaching Catalog.pm
about these OIDs, the unused_oids script was just hacked to
not show them as unused. That's problematic since, for example,
duplicate_oids wouldn't report any future conflict. Hence,
invent a macro DECLARE_OID_DEFINING_MACRO() that can be used to
define an OID that is known to Catalog.pm and will participate
in duplicate-detection as well as renumbering by renumber_oids.pl.
(We don't anticipate renumbering these particular OIDs, but we
might as well build out all the Catalog.pm infrastructure while
we're here.)
Another issue is that aa0105141 neglected to touch IsPinnedObject,
with the result that it now claimed template0 and postgres are
pinned. The right thing to do there seems to be to teach it that
no database is pinned, since in fact DROP DATABASE doesn't check
for pinned-ness (and at least for these cases, that is an
intentional choice). It's not clear whether this wrong answer
had any visible effect, but perhaps it could have resulted in
erroneous management of dependency entries.
In passing, rename the TemplateDbOid macro to Template1DbOid
to reduce confusion (likely we should have done that way back
when we invented template0, but we didn't), and rename the
OID macros for template0 and postgres to have a similar style.
There are no changes to postgres.bki here, so no need for a
catversion bump.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2935358.1650479692@sss.pgh.pa.us
This is needed so that renumber_oids.pl can handle renumbering
shared catalog declarations, which need to provide C macros for
the OIDs of the shared toast table and index. The previous
method of writing a C macro separately was error-prone anyway.
Also teach renumber_oids.pl about DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX_PKEY,
as we missed doing when inventing that macro.
There are no changes to postgres.bki here, so no need for a
catversion bump.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2995325.1650487527@sss.pgh.pa.us
psql, pg_dump, and pg_amcheck share code to process object name
patterns like 'foo*.bar*' to match all tables with names starting in
'bar' that are in schemas starting with 'foo'. Before v14, any number
of extra name parts were silently ignored, so a command line '\d
foo.bar.baz.bletch.quux' was interpreted as '\d bletch.quux'. In v14,
as a result of commit 2c8726c4b0, we
instead treated this as a request for table quux in a schema named
'foo.bar.baz.bletch'. That caused problems for people like Justin
Pryzby who were accustomed to copying strings of the form
db.schema.table from messages generated by PostgreSQL itself and using
them as arguments to \d.
Accordingly, revise things so that if an object name pattern contains
more parts than we're expecting, we throw an error, unless there's
exactly one extra part and it matches the current database name.
That way, thisdb.myschema.mytable is accepted as meaning just
myschema.mytable, but otherdb.myschema.mytable is an error, and so
is some.random.garbage.myschema.mytable.
Mark Dilger, per report from Justin Pryzby and discussion among
various people.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20211013165426.GD27491%40telsasoft.com
ComputeXidHorizons (nee GetOldestXmin) thought that it could identify
walsenders by checking for proc->databaseId == 0. Perhaps that was
safe when the code was written, but it's been wrong at least since
autovacuum was invented. Background processes that aren't connected
to any particular database, such as the autovacuum launcher and
logical replication launcher, look like that too.
This imprecision is harmful because when such a process advertises an
xmin, the result is to hold back dead-tuple cleanup in all databases,
though it'd be sufficient to hold it back in shared catalogs (which
are the only relations such a process can access). Aside from being
generally inefficient, this has recently been seen to cause regression
test failures in the buildfarm, as a consequence of the logical
replication launcher's startup transaction preventing VACUUM from
marking pages of a user table as all-visible.
We only want that global hold-back effect for the case where a
walsender is advertising a hot standby feedback xmin. Therefore,
invent a new PGPROC flag that says that a process' xmin should be
considered globally, and check that instead of using the incorrect
databaseId == 0 test. Currently only a walsender sets that flag,
and only if it is not connected to any particular database. (This is
for bug-compatibility with the undocumented behavior of the existing
code, namely that feedback sent by a client who has connected to a
particular database would not be applied globally. I'm not sure this
is a great definition; however, such a client is capable of issuing
plain SQL commands, and I don't think we want xmins advertised for
such commands to be applied globally. Perhaps this could do with
refinement later.)
While at it, I rewrote the comment in ComputeXidHorizons, and
re-ordered the commented-upon if-tests, to make them match up
for intelligibility's sake.
This is arguably a back-patchable bug fix, but given the lack of
complaints I think it prudent to let it age awhile in HEAD first.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1346227.1649887693@sss.pgh.pa.us
Only 1 of 3 of these changes appear to be handled by pgindent. That change
is new to v15. The remaining two appear to be left alone by pgindent. The
exact reason for that is not 100% clear to me. It seems related to the
fact that it's a line that contains *only* a single line comment and no
actual code. It does not seem worth investigating this in too much
detail. In any case, these do not conform to our usual practices, so fix
them.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220411020336.GB26620@telsasoft.com
heap_fetch() used to have a "keep_buf" parameter that told it to return
ownership of the buffer pin to the caller after finding that the
requested tuple TID exists but is invisible to the specified snapshot.
This was thoughtlessly removed in commit 5db6df0c0, which broke
heapam_tuple_lock() (formerly EvalPlanQualFetch) because that function
needs to do more accesses to the tuple even if it's invisible. The net
effect is that we would continue to touch the page for a microsecond or
two after releasing pin on the buffer. Usually no harm would result;
but if a different session decided to defragment the page concurrently,
we could see garbage data and mistakenly conclude that there's no newer
tuple version to chain up to. (It's hard to say whether this has
happened in the field. The bug was actually found thanks to a later
change that allowed valgrind to detect accesses to non-pinned buffers.)
The most reasonable way to fix this is to reintroduce keep_buf,
although I made it behave slightly differently: buffer ownership
is passed back only if there is a valid tuple at the requested TID.
In HEAD, we can just add the parameter back to heap_fetch().
To avoid an API break in the back branches, introduce an additional
function heap_fetch_extended() in those branches.
In HEAD there is an additional, less obvious API change: tuple->t_data
will be set to NULL in all cases where buffer ownership is not returned,
in particular when the tuple exists but fails the time qual (and
!keep_buf). This is to defend against any other callers attempting to
access non-pinned buffers. We concluded that making that change in back
branches would be more likely to introduce problems than cure any.
In passing, remove a comment about heap_fetch that was obsoleted by
9a8ee1dc6.
Per bug #17462 from Daniil Anisimov. Back-patch to v12 where the bug
was introduced.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17462-9c98a0f00df9bd36@postgresql.org
The last usage of this argument in this routine can be tracked down to
7e2f9062, aka 11 years ago. Getting rid of this argument can also be an
advantage for extensions calling check_index_is_clusterable(), as it
removes any need to worry about the meaning of what a recheck would be
at this level.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220411140609.GF26620@telsasoft.com
This reverts commits 0147fc7, 4567596, aa64f23, and 5ecd018.
There is no longer agreement that introducing this function
was the right way to address the problem. The consensus now
seems to favor trying to make a correct value for MaxBackends
available to mdules executing their _PG_init() functions.
Nathan Bossart
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20220323045229.i23skfscdbvrsuxa@jrouhaud
Enforce __pg_log_level message filtering centrally in logging.c,
instead of relying on the calling macros to do it. This is more
reliable (e.g. it works correctly for direct calls to pg_log_generic)
and it saves a percent or so of total code size because we get rid of
so many duplicate checks of __pg_log_level.
This does mean that argument expressions in a logging macro will be
evaluated even if we end up not printing anything. That seems of
little concern for INFO and higher levels as those messages are printed
by default, and most of our frontend programs don't even offer a way to
turn them off. I left the unlikely() checks in place for DEBUG
messages, though.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3993549.1649449609@sss.pgh.pa.us
Compression option handling (level, algorithm or even workers) can be
used across several parts of the system and not only base backups.
Structures, objects and routines are renamed in consequence, to remove
the concept of base backups from this part of the code making this
change straight-forward.
pg_receivewal, that has gained support for LZ4 since babbbb5, will make
use of this infrastructure for its set of compression options, bringing
more consistency with pg_basebackup. This cleanup needs to be done
before releasing a beta of 15. pg_dump is a potential future target, as
well, and adding more compression options to it may happen in 16~.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Georgios Kokolatos
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YlPQGNAAa04raObK@paquier.xyz
All but a few existing callers assume without checking that this
function succeeds. While it probably will, that's a poor excuse for
not checking. Let's make it return void and instead throw an error
if it doesn't find the block reference. Callers that actually need
to handle the no-such-block case must now use the underlying function
XLogRecGetBlockTagExtended.
In addition to being a bit less error-prone, this should also serve
to suppress some Coverity complaints about XLogRecGetBlockRefInfo.
While at it, clean up some inconsistency about use of the
XLogRecHasBlockRef macro: make XLogRecGetBlockTagExtended use
that instead of open-coding the same condition, and avoid calling
XLogRecHasBlockRef twice in relevant code paths. (That is,
calling XLogRecHasBlockRef followed by XLogRecGetBlockTag is now
deprecated: use XLogRecGetBlockTagExtended instead.)
Patch HEAD only; this doesn't seem to have enough value to consider
a back-branch API break.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/425039.1649701221@sss.pgh.pa.us
Get rid of the separate "FATAL" log level, as it was applied
so inconsistently as to be meaningless. This mostly involves
s/pg_log_fatal/pg_log_error/g.
Create a macro pg_fatal() to handle the common use-case of
pg_log_error() immediately followed by exit(1). Various
modules had already invented either this or equivalent macros;
standardize on pg_fatal() and apply it where possible.
Invent the ability to add "detail" and "hint" messages to a
frontend message, much as we have long had in the backend.
Except where rewording was needed to convert existing coding
to detail/hint style, I have (mostly) resisted the temptation
to change existing message wording.
Patch by me. Design and patch reviewed at various stages by
Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Peter Eisentraut and
Daniel Gustafsson.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1363732.1636496441@sss.pgh.pa.us
Before commit 412ad7a556, delayChkpt
was a Boolean. Now it's an integer. Extensions using it need to be
appropriately updated, so let's rename the field to make sure that
a hard compilation failure occurs.
Replacing delayChkpt with delayChkptFlags made a few comments extend
past 80 characters, so I reflowed them and changed some wording very
slightly.
The back-branches will need a different change to restore compatibility
with existing minor releases; this is just for master.
Per suggestion from Tom Lane.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/a7880f4d-1d74-582a-ada7-dad168d046d1@enterprisedb.com
Up until now, we've had a policy of only marking certain variables
in the PostgreSQL header files with PGDLLIMPORT, but now we've
decided to mark them all. This means that extensions running on
Windows should no longer operate at a disadvantage as compared to
extensions running on Linux: if the variable is present in a header
file, it should be accessible.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYanc1_FSfimhgiWSqVyP5KKmh5NP2BWNwDhO8Pg2vGYQ@mail.gmail.com
Previously, the output of EXPLAIN (BUFFERS) option showed only the I/O
timing spent reading and writing shared and local buffers. This commit
adds on top of that the I/O timing for temporary buffers in the output
of EXPLAIN (for spilled external sorts, hashes, materialization. etc).
This can be helpful for users in cases where the I/O related to
temporary buffers is the bottleneck.
Like its cousin, this information is available only when track_io_timing
is enabled. Playing the patch, this is showing an extra overhead of up
to 1% even when using gettimeofday() as implementation for interval
timings, which is slightly within the usual range noise still that's
measurable.
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Georgios Kokolatos, Melanie Plageman, Julien Rouhaud,
Ranier Vilela
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAJgotTeP83p6HiAGDhs_9Fw9pZ2J=_tYTsiO5Ob-V5GQ@mail.gmail.com
Window functions such as row_number() always return a value higher than
the previously returned value for tuples in any given window partition.
Traditionally queries such as;
SELECT * FROM (
SELECT *, row_number() over (order by c) rn
FROM t
) t WHERE rn <= 10;
were executed fairly inefficiently. Neither the query planner nor the
executor knew that once rn made it to 11 that nothing further would match
the outer query's WHERE clause. It would blindly continue until all
tuples were exhausted from the subquery.
Here we implement means to make the above execute more efficiently.
This is done by way of adding a pg_proc.prosupport function to various of
the built-in window functions and adding supporting code to allow the
support function to inform the planner if the window function is
monotonically increasing, monotonically decreasing, both or neither. The
planner is then able to make use of that information and possibly allow
the executor to short-circuit execution by way of adding a "run condition"
to the WindowAgg to allow it to determine if some of its execution work
can be skipped.
This "run condition" is not like a normal filter. These run conditions
are only built using quals comparing values to monotonic window functions.
For monotonic increasing functions, quals making use of the btree
operators for <, <= and = can be used (assuming the window function column
is on the left). You can see here that once such a condition becomes false
that a monotonic increasing function could never make it subsequently true
again. For monotonically decreasing functions the >, >= and = btree
operators for the given type can be used for run conditions.
The best-case situation for this is when there is a single WindowAgg node
without a PARTITION BY clause. Here when the run condition becomes false
the WindowAgg node can simply return NULL. No more tuples will ever match
the run condition. It's a little more complex when there is a PARTITION
BY clause. In this case, we cannot return NULL as we must still process
other partitions. To speed this case up we pull tuples from the outer
plan to check if they're from the same partition and simply discard them
if they are. When we find a tuple belonging to another partition we start
processing as normal again until the run condition becomes false or we run
out of tuples to process.
When there are multiple WindowAgg nodes to evaluate then this complicates
the situation. For intermediate WindowAggs we must ensure we always
return all tuples to the calling node. Any filtering done could lead to
incorrect results in WindowAgg nodes above. For all intermediate nodes,
we can still save some work when the run condition becomes false. We've
no need to evaluate the WindowFuncs anymore. Other WindowAgg nodes cannot
reference the value of these and these tuples will not appear in the final
result anyway. The savings here are small in comparison to what can be
saved in the top-level WingowAgg, but still worthwhile.
Intermediate WindowAgg nodes never filter out tuples, but here we change
WindowAgg so that the top-level WindowAgg filters out tuples that don't
match the intermediate WindowAgg node's run condition. Such filters
appear in the "Filter" clause in EXPLAIN for the top-level WindowAgg node.
Here we add prosupport functions to allow the above to work for;
row_number(), rank(), dense_rank(), count(*) and count(expr). It appears
technically possible to do the same for min() and max(), however, it seems
unlikely to be useful enough, so that's not done here.
Bump catversion
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andy Fan, Zhihong Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqvp3At8++yF8ij06sdcoo1S_b2YoaT9D4Nf+MObzsrLQ@mail.gmail.com
Modify the subroutines called by RI trigger functions that want to check
if a given referenced value exists in the referenced relation to simply
scan the foreign key constraint's unique index, instead of using SPI to
execute
SELECT 1 FROM referenced_relation WHERE ref_key = $1
This saves a lot of work, especially when inserting into or updating a
referencing relation.
This rewrite allows to fix a PK row visibility bug caused by a partition
descriptor hack which requires ActiveSnapshot to be set to come up with
the correct set of partitions for the RI query running under REPEATABLE
READ isolation. We now set that snapshot indepedently of the snapshot
to be used by the PK index scan, so the two no longer interfere. The
buggy output in src/test/isolation/expected/fk-snapshot.out of the
relevant test case added by commit 00cb86e75d has been corrected.
(The bug still exists in branch 14, however, but this fix is too
invasive to backpatch.)
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Li Japin <japinli@hotmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGkfJfYdeq5vHPh6eqPKjSbfpDDY+j-kXYFePQedtSLeg@mail.gmail.com
Add support for unlogged sequences. Unlike for unlogged tables, this
is not a performance feature. It allows sequences associated with
unlogged tables to be excluded from replication.
A new subcommand ALTER SEQUENCE ... SET LOGGED/UNLOGGED is added.
An identity/serial sequence now automatically gets and follows the
persistence level (logged/unlogged) of its owning table. (The
sequences owned by temporary tables were already temporary through the
separate mechanism in RangeVarAdjustRelationPersistence().) But you
can still change the persistence of an owned sequence separately.
Also, pg_dump and pg_upgrade preserve the persistence of existing
sequences.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/04e12818-2f98-257c-b926-2845d74ed04f%402ndquadrant.com
Introduce a new GUC recovery_prefetch. When enabled, look ahead in the
WAL and try to initiate asynchronous reading of referenced data blocks
that are not yet cached in our buffer pool. For now, this is done with
posix_fadvise(), which has several caveats. Since not all OSes have
that system call, "try" is provided so that it can be enabled where
available. Better mechanisms for asynchronous I/O are possible in later
work.
Set to "try" for now for test coverage. Default setting to be finalized
before release.
The GUC wal_decode_buffer_size limits the distance we can look ahead in
bytes of decoded data.
The existing GUC maintenance_io_concurrency is used to limit the number
of concurrent I/Os allowed, based on pessimistic heuristics used to
infer that I/Os have begun and completed. We'll also not look more than
maintenance_io_concurrency * 4 block references ahead.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version)
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version)
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> (earlier version)
Tested-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version)
Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> (earlier version)
Tested-by: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com> (earlier version)
Tested-by: Sait Talha Nisanci <Sait.Nisanci@microsoft.com> (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq%3DAovOddfHpA%40mail.gmail.com
Change two macros to be static inline functions instead to keep the
data type consistent. This avoids a "comparison is always true"
warning that was occurring with -Wtype-limits. In the process, change
the names to look less like macros.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220407063505.njnnrmbn4sxqfsts@alap3.anarazel.de
In the stats collector days it was hard to write tests for the stats system,
because fundamentally delivery of stats messages over UDP was not
synchronous (nor guaranteed). Now we easily can force pending stats updates to
be flushed synchronously.
This moves stats.sql into a parallel group, there isn't a reason for it to run
in isolation anymore. And it may shake out some bugs.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
Allow extensions to specify a new custom resource manager (rmgr),
which allows specialized WAL. This is meant to be used by a Table
Access Method or Index Access Method.
Prior to this commit, only Generic WAL was available, which offers
support for recovery and physical replication but not logical
replication.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Bharath Rupireddy, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ed1fb2e22d15d3563ae0eb610f7b61bb15999c0a.camel%40j-davis.com
With stats now being stored in shared memory, the GUC isn't needed
anymore. However, the pg_stat_tmp directory and PG_STAT_TMP_DIR define are
kept, as pg_stat_statements (and some out-of-core extensions) store data in
it.
Docs will be updated in a subsequent commit, together with the other pending
docs updates due to shared memory stats.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220330233550.eiwsbearu6xhuqwe@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and
shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These
files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a
second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful
statistics.
Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered
objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared
memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory.
The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture.
The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it.
By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a
prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked
statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On
systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite
expensive.
Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not
necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down
replica.
Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add
tests.
Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version)
Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version)
Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
Most of pgstat uses pgstat_<verb>_<subject>() or just <verb>_<subject>(). But
not all (some introduced fairly recently by me). Rename ones that aren't
intentionally following a different scheme (e.g. AtEOXact_*).
The column 'subskiplsn' uses TYPALIGN_DOUBLE (which has 4 bytes alignment
on AIX) for storage. But the C Struct (Form_pg_subscription) has 8-byte
alignment for this field, so retrieving it from storage causes an
unaligned read.
To fix this, we rearranged the 'subskiplsn' column in the catalog so that
it naturally comes at an 8-byte boundary.
We have fixed a similar problem in commit f3b421da5f. This patch adds a
test to avoid a similar mistake in the future.
Reported-by: Noah Misch
Diagnosed-by: Noah Misch, Masahiko Sawada, Amit Kapila
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220401074423.GC3682158@rfd.leadboat.comhttps://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDeScrsHhLyEPYqN3sydg6PxAPVBboK=30xJfUVihNZDA@mail.gmail.com
Previously the pgstat <-> replication slots API was done with on the basis of
names. However, the upcoming move to storing stats in shared memory makes it
more convenient to use a integer as key.
Change the replication slot functions to take the slot rather than the slot
name, and expose ReplicationSlotIndex() to compute the index of an replication
slot. Special handling will be required for restarts, as the index is not
stable across restarts. For now pgstat internally still uses names.
Rename pgstat_report_replslot_{create,drop}() to
pgstat_{create,drop}_replslot() to match the functions for other kinds of
stats.
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220404041516.cctrvpadhuriawlq@alap3.anarazel.de
One problematic part of the current statistics collector design is that there
is no reliable way of getting rid of statistics entries. Because of that
pgstat_vacuum_stat() (called by [auto-]vacuum) matches all stats for the
current database with the catalog contents and tries to drop now-superfluous
entries. That's quite expensive. What's worse, it doesn't work on physical
replicas, despite physical replicas collection statistics entries.
This commit introduces infrastructure to create / drop statistics entries
transactionally, together with the underlying catalog objects (functions,
relations, subscriptions). pgstat_xact.c maintains a list of stats entries
created / dropped transactionally in the current transaction. To ensure the
removal of statistics entries is durable dropped statistics entries are
included in commit / abort (and prepare) records, which also ensures that
stats entries are dropped on standbys.
Statistics entries created separately from creating the underlying catalog
object (e.g. when stats were previously lost due to an immediate restart)
are *not* WAL logged. However that can only happen outside of the transaction
creating the catalog object, so it does not lead to "leaked" statistics
entries.
For this to work, functions creating / dropping functions / relations /
subscriptions need to call into pgstat. For subscriptions this was already
done when dropping subscriptions, via pgstat_report_subscription_drop() (now
renamed to pgstat_drop_subscription()).
This commit does not actually drop stats yet, it just provides the
infrastructure. It is however a largely independent piece of infrastructure,
so committing it separately makes sense.
Bumps XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
With the introduction of PgStat_Kind PgStat_Single_Reset_Type,
PgStat_Shared_Reset_Target don't make sense anymore. Replace them with
PgStat_Kind.
Instead of having dedicated reset functions for different kinds of stats, use
two generic helper routines (one to reset all stats of a kind, one to reset
one stats entry).
A number of reset functions were named pgstat_reset_*_counter(), despite
affecting multiple counters. The generic helper routines get rid of
pgstat_reset_single_counter(), pgstat_reset_subscription_counter().
Rename pgstat_reset_slru_counter(), pgstat_reset_replslot_counter() to
pgstat_reset_slru(), pgstat_reset_replslot() respectively, and have them only
deal with a single SLRU/slot. Resetting all SLRUs/slots goes through the
generic pgstat_reset_of_kind().
Previously pg_stat_reset_replication_slot() used SearchNamedReplicationSlot()
to check if a slot exists. API wise it seems better to move that to
pgstat_replslot.c.
This is done separately from the - quite large - shared memory statistics
patch to make review easier.
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220404041516.cctrvpadhuriawlq@alap3.anarazel.de
This seems beneficial on high-core-count machines, and not harmful
on lesser hardware. However, older ARM32 gear doesn't have this
instruction, so restrict the patch to ARM64.
Geoffrey Blake
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/78338F29-9D7F-4DC8-BD71-E9674CE71425@amazon.com
Until now index_concurrently_swap() directly modified pgstat internal
datastructures. That will break with the introduction of shared memory
statistics and seems off architecturally.
This is done separately from the - quite large - shared memory statistics
patch to make review easier.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
Only the pgstat_send_* functions that are called from outside pgstat*.c are
renamed (the rest will go away). This is done separately from the - quite
large - shared memory statistics patch to make review easier.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220404041516.cctrvpadhuriawlq@alap3.anarazel.de
Soon the stats collector will be no more, with statistics instead getting
stored in shared memory. There are a lot of references to the stats collector
in comments. This commit replaces most of these references with "cumulative
statistics system", with the remaining ones getting replaced as part of
subsequent commits.
This is done separately from the - quite large - shared memory statistics
patch to make review easier.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de
The transactional integration code is largely independent from the rest of
pgstat.c. Subsequent commits will add more related code.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220404041516.cctrvpadhuriawlq@alap3.anarazel.de
Exclusive-mode backups have been deprecated since 9.6 (when
non-exclusive backups were introduced) due to the issues
they can cause should the system crash while one is running and
generally because non-exclusive provides a much better interface.
Further, exclusive backup mode wasn't really being tested (nor was most
of the related code- like being able to log in just to stop an exclusive
backup and the bits of the state machine related to that) and having to
possibly deal with an exclusive backup and the backup_label file
existing during pg_basebackup, pg_rewind, etc, added other complexities
that we are better off without.
This patch removes the exclusive backup mode, the various special cases
for dealing with it, and greatly simplifies the online backup code and
documentation.
Authors: David Steele, Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Chapman Flack
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ac7339ca-3718-3c93-929f-99e725d1172c@pgmasters.nethttps://postgr.es/m/CAHg+QDfiM+WU61tF6=nPZocMZvHDzCK47Kneyb0ZRULYzV5sKQ@mail.gmail.com
This patch allows "PGC_SUSET" parameters to be set by non-superusers
if they have been explicitly granted the privilege to do so.
The privilege to perform ALTER SYSTEM SET/RESET on a specific parameter
can also be granted.
Such privileges are cluster-wide, not per database. They are tracked
in a new shared catalog, pg_parameter_acl.
Granting and revoking these new privileges works as one would expect.
One caveat is that PGC_USERSET GUCs are unaffected by the SET privilege
--- one could wish that those were handled by a revocable grant to
PUBLIC, but they are not, because we couldn't make it robust enough
for GUCs defined by extensions.
Mark Dilger, reviewed at various times by Andrew Dunstan, Robert Haas,
Joshua Brindle, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3D691E20-C1D5-4B80-8BA5-6BEB63AF3029@enterprisedb.com
In commit 27e1f1456, create_append_plan() only allowed the subplan
created from a given subpath to be executed asynchronously when it was
an async-capable ForeignPath. To extend coverage, this patch handles
cases when the given subpath includes some other Path types as well that
can be omitted in the plan processing, such as a ProjectionPath directly
atop an async-capable ForeignPath, allowing asynchronous execution in
partitioned-scan/partitioned-join queries with non-Var tlist expressions
and more UNION queries.
Andrey Lepikhov and Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by Alexander Pyhalov and
Zhihong Yu.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/659c37a8-3e71-0ff2-394c-f04428c76f08%40postgrespro.ru
These clauses allow the user to specify how data from nested paths are
joined, allowing considerable freedom in shaping the tabular output of
JSON_TABLE.
PLAN DEFAULT allows the user to specify the global strategies when
dealing with sibling or child nested paths. The is often sufficient to
achieve the necessary goal, and is considerably simpler than the full
PLAN clause, which allows the user to specify the strategy to be used
for each named nested path.
Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zhihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7e2cb85d-24cf-4abb-30a5-1a33715959bd@postgrespro.ru
* Move the execution pruning initialization steps that are common
between both ExecInitAppend() and ExecInitMergeAppend() into a new
function ExecInitPartitionPruning() defined in execPartition.c.
Those steps include creation of a PartitionPruneState to be used for
all instances of pruning and determining the minimal set of child
subplans that need to be initialized by performing initial pruning if
needed, and finally adjusting the subplan_map arrays in the
PartitionPruneState to reflect the new set of subplans remaining
after initial pruning if it was indeed performed.
ExecCreatePartitionPruneState() is no longer exported out of
execPartition.c and has been renamed to CreatePartitionPruneState()
as a local sub-routine of ExecInitPartitionPruning().
* Likewise, ExecFindInitialMatchingSubPlans() that was in charge of
performing initial pruning no longer needs to be exported. In fact,
since it would now have the same body as the more generally named
ExecFindMatchingSubPlans(), except differing in the value of
initial_prune passed to the common subroutine
find_matching_subplans_recurse(), it seems better to remove it and add
an initial_prune argument to ExecFindMatchingSubPlans().
* Add an ExprContext field to PartitionPruneContext to remove the
implicit assumption in the runtime pruning code that the ExprContext to
use to compute pruning expressions that need one can always rely on the
PlanState providing it. A future patch will allow runtime pruning (at
least the initial pruning steps) to be performed without the
corresponding PlanState yet having been created, so this will help.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEYCpEqh2LMDOp9mT+4-QoVe8HgFMKBjntEMCTZLpcCCA@mail.gmail.com
The previous coding of dshash_seq_next(), on the first call, accessed
status->hash_table->size_log2 without holding a partition lock and without
guaranteeing that ensure_valid_bucket_pointers() had ever been called.
That oversight turns out to not have immediately visible effects, because
bucket 0 is always in partition 0, and ensure_valid_bucket_pointers() was
called after acquiring the partition lock. However,
PARTITION_FOR_BUCKET_INDEX() with a size_log2 of 0 ends up triggering formally
undefined behaviour.
Simplify by accessing partition 0, without using PARTITION_FOR_BUCKET_INDEX().
While at it, remove dshash_get_current(), there is no convincing use
case. Also polish a few comments.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGL9hY_VY=+oUK+Gc1iSRx-Ls5qeYJ6q=dQVZnT3R63Taw@mail.gmail.com
These would all need to be rephrased when moving to shared memory stats, but
since they don't provide actual information right now, remove them instead.
The comments for PgStat_Msg* are left in, because they will all be removed as
part of the shared memory stats patch.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
This feature allows jsonb data to be treated as a table and thus used in
a FROM clause like other tabular data. Data can be selected from the
jsonb using jsonpath expressions, and hoisted out of nested structures
in the jsonb to form multiple rows, more or less like an outer join.
Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zhihong Yu (whose
name I previously misspelled), Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson,
Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7e2cb85d-24cf-4abb-30a5-1a33715959bd@postgrespro.ru
The general usage pattern when we store tuples in tuplesort.c is that
we store a series of tuples one by one then either perform a sort or spill
them to disk. In the common case, there is no pfreeing of already stored
tuples. For the common case since we do not individually pfree tuples, we
have very little need for aset.c memory allocation behavior which
maintains freelists and always rounds allocation sizes up to the next
power of 2 size.
Here we conditionally use generation.c contexts for storing tuples in
tuplesort.c when the sort will never be bounded. Unfortunately, the
memory context to store tuples is already created by the time any calls
would be made to tuplesort_set_bound(), so here we add a new sort option
that allows callers to specify if they're going to need a bounded sort or
not. We'll use a standard aset.c allocator when this sort option is not
set.
Extension authors must ensure that the TUPLESORT_ALLOWBOUNDED flag is
used when calling tuplesort_begin_* for any sorts that make a call to
tuplesort_set_bound().
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andy Fan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvoH4ASzsAOyHcxkuY01Qf++8JJ0paw+03dk+W25tQEcNQ@mail.gmail.com
This replaces the bool flag for randomAccess. An upcoming patch requires
adding another option, so instead of breaking the API for that, then
breaking it again one day if we add more options, let's just break it
once. Any boolean options we add in the future will just make use of an
unused bit in the flags.
Any extensions making use of tuplesorts will need to update their code
to pass TUPLESORT_RANDOMACCESS instead of true for randomAccess.
TUPLESORT_NONE can be used for a set of empty options.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvoH4ASzsAOyHcxkuY01Qf%2B%2B8JJ0paw%2B03dk%2BW25tQEcNQ%40mail.gmail.com
Here we make a series of improvements to the generation memory
allocator, namely:
1. Allow generation contexts to have a minimum, initial and maximum block
sizes. The standard allocator allows this already but when the generation
context was added, it only allowed fixed-sized blocks. The problem with
fixed-sized blocks is that it's difficult to choose how large to make the
blocks. If the chosen size is too small then we'd end up with a large
number of blocks and a large number of malloc calls. If the block size is
made too large, then memory is wasted.
2. Add support for "keeper" blocks. This is a special block that is
allocated along with the context itself but is never freed. Instead,
when the last chunk in the keeper block is freed, we simply mark the block
as empty to allow new allocations to make use of it.
3. Add facility to "recycle" newly empty blocks instead of freeing them
and having to later malloc an entire new block again. We do this by
recording a single GenerationBlock which has become empty of any chunks.
When we run out of space in the current block, we check to see if there is
a "freeblock" and use that if it contains enough space for the allocation.
Author: David Rowley, Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Andy Fan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d987fd54-01f8-0f73-af6c-519f799a0ab8@enterprisedb.com
When VACUUM set relfrozenxid before now, it set it to whatever value was
used to determine which tuples to freeze -- the FreezeLimit cutoff.
This approach was very naive. The relfrozenxid invariant only requires
that new relfrozenxid values be <= the oldest extant XID remaining in
the table (at the point that the VACUUM operation ends), which in
general might be much more recent than FreezeLimit.
VACUUM now carefully tracks the oldest remaining XID/MultiXactId as it
goes (the oldest remaining values _after_ lazy_scan_prune processing).
The final values are set as the table's new relfrozenxid and new
relminmxid in pg_class at the end of each VACUUM. The oldest XID might
come from a tuple's xmin, xmax, or xvac fields. It might even come from
one of the table's remaining MultiXacts.
Final relfrozenxid values must still be >= FreezeLimit in an aggressive
VACUUM (FreezeLimit still acts as a lower bound on the final value that
aggressive VACUUM can set relfrozenxid to). Since standard VACUUMs
still make no guarantees about advancing relfrozenxid, they might as
well set relfrozenxid to a value from well before FreezeLimit when the
opportunity presents itself. In general standard VACUUMs may now set
relfrozenxid to any value > the original relfrozenxid and <= OldestXmin.
Credit for the general idea of using the oldest extant XID to set
pg_class.relfrozenxid at the end of VACUUM goes to Andres Freund.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkymFbz6D_vL+jmqSn_5q1wsFvFrE+37yLgL_Rkfd6Gzg@mail.gmail.com
DecodeInterval (interval input) was careless about integer-overflow
hazards, allowing bogus results to be obtained for sufficiently
large input values. Also, since it initially converted the input
to a "struct tm", it was impossible to produce the full range of
representable interval values.
Meanwhile, EncodeInterval (interval output) and a few other
functions could suffer failures if asked to process sufficiently
large interval values, because they also relied on being able to
represent an interval in "struct tm" which is not designed to
handle that.
Fix all this stuff by introducing new struct types that are more
fit for purpose.
While this is clearly a bug fix, it's also an API break for any
code that's calling these functions directly. So back-patching
doesn't seem wise, especially in view of the lack of field
complaints.
Joe Koshakow, editorialized a bit by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHff0JLYHwyBrtMx_=6wr=k2Xp+D+-X3vEhHjJYMj+mQcg@mail.gmail.com
This is essentially the same as applying VACUUM FULL to a partitioned
table, which has been supported since commit 3c3bb99330 (March 2017).
While there's no great use case in applying CLUSTER to partitioned
tables, we don't have any strong reason not to allow it either.
For now, partitioned indexes cannot be marked clustered, so an index
must always be specified.
While at it, rename some variables that were RangeVars during the
development that led to 8bc717cb88 but never made it that way to the
source tree; there's no need to perpetuate names that have always been
more confusing than helpful.
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201028003312.GU9241@telsasoft.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200611153502.GT14879@telsasoft.com
Previously, the specialized tuplesort routine inlined handling for
reverse-sort and NULLs-ordering but called the datum comparator via a
pointer in the SortSupport struct parameter. Testing has showed that we
can get a useful performance gain by specializing datum comparison for
the different representations of abbreviated keys -- signed and unsigned
64-bit integers and signed 32-bit integers. Almost all abbreviatable data
types will benefit -- the only exception for now is numeric, since the
datum comparison is more complex. The performance gain depends on data
type and input distribution, but often falls in the range of 10-20% faster.
Thomas Munro
Reviewed by Peter Geoghegan, review and performance testing by me
Discussion:
https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CA%2BhUKGKKYttZZk-JMRQSVak%3DCXSJ5fiwtirFf%3Dn%3DPAbumvn1Ww%40mail.gmail.com
The current implementation supports exactly one IP address in a server
certificate's Common Name, which is brittle (the strings must match
exactly). This patch adds support for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in a
server's Subject Alternative Names.
Per discussion on-list:
- If the client's expected host is an IP address, we allow fallback to
the Subject Common Name if an iPAddress SAN is not present, even if
a dNSName is present. This matches the behavior of NSS, in
violation of the relevant RFCs.
- We also, counter-intuitively, match IP addresses embedded in dNSName
SANs. From inspection this appears to have been the behavior since
the SAN matching feature was introduced in acd08d76.
- Unlike NSS, we don't map IPv4 to IPv6 addresses, or vice-versa.
Author: Jacob Champion <pchampion@vmware.com>
Co-authored-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9f5f20974cd3a4091a788cf7f00ab663d5fcdffe.camel@vmware.com
This makes the code more consistent with SpGiST, GiST and GIN, that
already use this style, and the idea is to make easier the introduction
of more sanity checks for each of these AM-specific macros. BRIN uses a
different set of macros to get a page's type and flags, so it has no
need for something similar.
Author: Matthias van de Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEze2WjE3+tGO9Fs9+iZMU+z6mMZKo54W1Zt98WKqbEUHbHOBg@mail.gmail.com
This patch is extracted from a larger patch that allowed setting the
default returned value from these functions to json or jsonb. That had
problems, but this piece of it is fine. For these functions only json or
jsonb can be specified in the RETURNING clause.
Extracted from an original patch from Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
postgres_fdw would push ORDER BY clauses to the remote side without
verifying that the sort operator is safe to ship. Moreover, it failed
to print a suitable USING clause if the sort operator isn't default
for the sort expression's type. The net result of this is that the
remote sort might not have anywhere near the semantics we expect,
which'd be disastrous for locally-performed merge joins in particular.
We addressed similar issues in the context of ORDER BY within an
aggregate function call in commit 7012b132d, but failed to notice
that query-level ORDER BY was broken. Thus, much of the necessary
logic already existed, but it requires refactoring to be usable
in both cases.
Back-patch to all supported branches. In HEAD only, remove the
core code's copy of find_em_expr_for_rel, which is no longer used
and really should never have been pushed into equivclass.c in the
first place.
Ronan Dunklau, per report from David Rowley;
reviews by David Rowley, Ranier Vilela, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvr4OeC2DBVY--zVP83-K=bYrTD7F8SZDhN4g+pj2f2S-A@mail.gmail.com
When evaluating a query with a multi-column GROUP BY clause using sort,
the cost may be heavily dependent on the order in which the keys are
compared when building the groups. Grouping does not imply any ordering,
so we're allowed to compare the keys in arbitrary order, and a Hash Agg
leverages this. But for Group Agg, we simply compared keys in the order
as specified in the query. This commit explores alternative ordering of
the keys, trying to find a cheaper one.
In principle, we might generate grouping paths for all permutations of
the keys, and leave the rest to the optimizer. But that might get very
expensive, so we try to pick only a couple interesting orderings based
on both local and global information.
When planning the grouping path, we explore statistics (number of
distinct values, cost of the comparison function) for the keys and
reorder them to minimize comparison costs. Intuitively, it may be better
to perform more expensive comparisons (for complex data types etc.)
last, because maybe the cheaper comparisons will be enough. Similarly,
the higher the cardinality of a key, the lower the probability we’ll
need to compare more keys. The patch generates and costs various
orderings, picking the cheapest ones.
The ordering of group keys may interact with other parts of the query,
some of which may not be known while planning the grouping. E.g. there
may be an explicit ORDER BY clause, or some other ordering-dependent
operation, higher up in the query, and using the same ordering may allow
using either incremental sort or even eliminate the sort entirely.
The patch generates orderings and picks those minimizing the comparison
cost (for various pathkeys), and then adds orderings that might be
useful for operations higher up in the plan (ORDER BY, etc.). Finally,
it always keeps the ordering specified in the query, on the assumption
the user might have additional insights.
This introduces a new GUC enable_group_by_reordering, so that the
optimization may be disabled if needed.
The original patch was proposed by Teodor Sigaev, and later improved and
reworked by Dmitry Dolgov. Reviews by a number of people, including me,
Andrey Lepikhov, Claudio Freire, Ibrar Ahmed and Zhihong Yu.
Author: Dmitry Dolgov, Teodor Sigaev, Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrey Lepikhov, Claudio Freire, Ibrar Ahmed, Zhihong Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7c79e6a5-8597-74e8-0671-1c39d124c9d6%40sigaev.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcW_4o2NC0zutLkOJPsFt80megSpX_dVRo6GK9PC-Jx_Ag%40mail.gmail.com
This Patch introduces three SQL standard JSON functions:
JSON() (incorrectly mentioned in my commit message for f4fb45d15c)
JSON_SCALAR()
JSON_SERIALIZE()
JSON() produces json values from text, bytea, json or jsonb values, and
has facilitites for handling duplicate keys.
JSON_SCALAR() produces a json value from any scalar sql value, including
json and jsonb.
JSON_SERIALIZE() produces text or bytea from input which containis or
represents json or jsonb;
For the most part these functions don't add any significant new
capabilities, but they will be of use to users wanting standard
compliant JSON handling.
Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
libzstd allows transparent parallel compression just by setting
an option when creating the compression context, so permit that
for both client and server-side backup compression. To use this,
use something like pg_basebackup --compress WHERE-zstd:workers=N
where WHERE is "client" or "server" and N is an integer.
When compression is performed on the server side, this will spawn
threads inside the PostgreSQL backend. While there is almost no
PostgreSQL server code which is thread-safe, the threads here are used
internally by libzstd and touch only data structures controlled by
libzstd.
Patch by me, based in part on earlier work by Dipesh Pandit
and Jeevan Ladhe. Reviewed by Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobj6u-nWF-j=FemygUhobhryLxf9h-wJN7W-2rSsseHNA@mail.gmail.com
COPY FROM supports the HEADER option to silently discard the header
line from a CSV or text file. It is possible to load by mistake a
file that matches the expected format, for example, if two text
columns have been swapped, resulting in garbage in the database.
This adds a new option value HEADER MATCH that checks the column names
in the header line against the actual column names and errors out if
they do not match.
Author: Rémi Lapeyre <remi.lapeyre@lenstra.fr>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAF1-J-0PtCWMeLtswwGV2M70U26n4g33gpe1rcKQqe6wVQDrFA@mail.gmail.com
The current logical replication behavior is to send every transaction to
subscriber even if the transaction is empty. This can happen because
transaction doesn't contain changes from the selected publications or all
the changes got filtered. It is a waste of CPU cycles and network
bandwidth to build/transmit these empty transactions.
This patch addresses the above problem by postponing the BEGIN message
until the first change is sent. While processing a COMMIT message, if
there was no other change for that transaction, do not send the COMMIT
message. This allows us to skip sending BEGIN/COMMIT messages for empty
transactions.
When skipping empty transactions in synchronous replication mode, we send
a keepalive message to avoid delaying such transactions.
Author: Ajin Cherian, Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Takamichi Osumi, Shi Yu, Masahiko Sawada, Greg Nancarrow, Vignesh C, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMkU=1yohp9-dv48FLoSPrMqYEyyS5ZWkaZGD41RJr10xiNo_Q@mail.gmail.com
This introduces the SQL/JSON functions for querying JSON data using
jsonpath expressions. The functions are:
JSON_EXISTS()
JSON_QUERY()
JSON_VALUE()
All of these functions only operate on jsonb. The workaround for now is
to cast the argument to jsonb.
JSON_EXISTS() tests if the jsonpath expression applied to the jsonb
value yields any values. JSON_VALUE() must return a single value, and an
error occurs if it tries to return multiple values. JSON_QUERY() must
return a json object or array, and there are various WRAPPER options for
handling scalar or multi-value results. Both these functions have
options for handling EMPTY and ERROR conditions.
Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Because this strategy logs changes on a block-by-block basis, it
avoids the need to checkpoint before and after the operation.
However, because it logs each changed block individually, it might
generate a lot of extra write-ahead logging if the template database
is large. Therefore, the older strategy remains available via a new
STRATEGY parameter to CREATE DATABASE, and a corresponding --strategy
option to createdb.
Somewhat controversially, this patch assembles the list of relations
to be copied to the new database by reading the pg_class relation of
the template database. Cross-database access like this isn't normally
possible, but it can be made to work here because there can't be any
connections to the database being copied, nor can it contain any
in-doubt transactions. Even so, we have to use lower-level interfaces
than normal, since the table scan and relcache interfaces will not
work for a database to which we're not connected. The advantage of
this approach is that we do not need to rely on the filesystem to
determine what ought to be copied, but instead on PostgreSQL's own
knowledge of the database structure. This avoids, for example,
copying stray files that happen to be located in the source database
directory.
Dilip Kumar, with a fairly large number of cosmetic changes by me.
Reviewed and tested by Ashutosh Sharma, Andres Freund, John Naylor,
Greg Nancarrow, Neha Sharma. Additional feedback from Bruce Momjian,
Heikki Linnakangas, Julien Rouhaud, Adam Brusselback, Kyotaro
Horiguchi, Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Álvaro Herrera, and others.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYtcdxBjLh31DLxUXHxFVMPGzrU5_T=CYCvRyFHywSBUQ@mail.gmail.com
This view is similar to pg_hba_file_rules view, except that it is
associated with the parsing of pg_ident.conf. Similarly to its cousin,
this view is useful to check via SQL if changes planned in pg_ident.conf
would work upon reload or restart, or to diagnose a previous failure.
Bumps catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
This patch intrdocuces the SQL standard IS JSON predicate. It operates
on text and bytea values representing JSON as well as on the json and
jsonb types. Each test has an IS and IS NOT variant. The tests are:
IS JSON [VALUE]
IS JSON ARRAY
IS JSON OBJECT
IS JSON SCALAR
IS JSON WITH | WITHOUT UNIQUE KEYS
These are mostly self-explanatory, but note that IS JSON WITHOUT UNIQUE
KEYS is true whenever IS JSON is true, and IS JSON WITH UNIQUE KEYS is
true whenever IS JSON is true except it IS JSON OBJECT is true and there
are duplicate keys (which is never the case when applied to jsonb values).
Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
This has no in-core callers but will be wanted by extensions.
It's just a thin wrapper around get_query_def, so it adds little code.
Also, fix get_from_clause_item() to force insertion of an alias
for a SUBQUERY RTE item. This is irrelevant to existing uses because
RTE_SUBQUERY items made by the parser always have aliases already.
However, if one tried to use pg_get_querydef() to inspect a post-rewrite
Query, it could be an issue. In any case, get_from_clause_item already
contained logic to force alias insertion for VALUES items, so the lack
of the same for SUBQUERY is a pretty clear oversight.
In passing, replace duplicated code for selection of pretty-print
options with a common macro.
Julien Rouhaud, reviewed by Pavel Stehule, Gilles Darold, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210627041138.zklczwmu3ms4ufnk@nol
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table using a
source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL statement that can
conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows -- a task that would otherwise
require multiple PL statements. For example,
MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
DO NOTHING;
MERGE works with regular tables, partitioned tables and inheritance
hierarchies, including column and row security enforcement, as well as
support for row and statement triggers and transition tables therein.
MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though also useful
for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended to be used in preference
to existing single SQL commands for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there
is some overhead. MERGE can be used from PL/pgSQL.
MERGE does not support targetting updatable views or foreign tables, and
RETURNING clauses are not allowed either. These limitations are likely
fixable with sufficient effort. Rewrite rules are also not supported,
but it's not clear that we'd want to support them.
Author: Pavan Deolasee <pavan.deolasee@gmail.com>
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Simon Riggs <simon.riggs@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier versions)
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> (earlier versions)
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (earlier versions)
Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201231134736.GA25392@alvherre.pgsql
pg_stat_get_replication_slot() accidentally was marked as non-strict, crashing
when called with NULL input. As it's already released, introduce an explicit
NULL check in 14, fix the catalog in HEAD.
Bumps catversion in HEAD.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220326212432.s5n2maw6kugnpyxw@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: 14-, where replication slot stats were introduced
This patch introduces the SQL/JSON standard constructors for JSON:
JSON()
JSON_ARRAY()
JSON_ARRAYAGG()
JSON_OBJECT()
JSON_OBJECTAGG()
For the most part these functions provide facilities that mimic
existing json/jsonb functions. However, they also offer some useful
additional functionality. In addition to text input, the JSON() function
accepts bytea input, which it will decode and constuct a json value from.
The other functions provide useful options for handling duplicate keys
and null values.
This series of patches will be followed by a consolidated documentation
patch.
Nikita Glukhov
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
This introduces some of the building blocks used by the SQL/JSON
constructor and query functions. Specifically, it provides node
executor and grammar support for the FORMAT JSON [ENCODING foo]
clause, and values decorated with it, and for the RETURNING clause.
The following SQL/JSON patches will leverage these.
Nikita Glukhov (who probably deserves an award for perseverance).
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
clang 13 with -Wextra warns that "performing pointer subtraction with
a null pointer has undefined behavior" in the places where freepage.c
tries to set a relptr variable to constant NULL. This appears to be
a compiler bug, but it's unlikely to get fixed instantly. Fortunately,
we can work around it by introducing an inline support function, which
seems like a good change anyway because it removes the macro's existing
double-evaluation hazard.
Backpatch to v10 where this code was introduced.
Patch by me, based on an idea of Andres Freund's.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/48826.1648310694@sss.pgh.pa.us
This allows specifying an optional column list when adding a table to
logical replication. The column list may be specified after the table
name, enclosed in parentheses. Columns not included in this list are not
sent to the subscriber, allowing the schema on the subscriber to be a
subset of the publisher schema.
For UPDATE/DELETE publications, the column list needs to cover all
REPLICA IDENTITY columns. For INSERT publications, the column list is
arbitrary and may omit some REPLICA IDENTITY columns. Furthermore, if
the table uses REPLICA IDENTITY FULL, column list is not allowed.
The column list can contain only simple column references. Complex
expressions, function calls etc. are not allowed. This restriction could
be relaxed in the future.
During the initial table synchronization, only columns included in the
column list are copied to the subscriber. If the subscription has
several publications, containing the same table with different column
lists, columns specified in any of the lists will be copied.
This means all columns are replicated if the table has no column list
at all (which is treated as column list with all columns), or when of
the publications is defined as FOR ALL TABLES (possibly IN SCHEMA that
matches the schema of the table).
For partitioned tables, publish_via_partition_root determines whether
the column list for the root or the leaf relation will be used. If the
parameter is 'false' (the default), the list defined for the leaf
relation is used. Otherwise, the column list for the root partition
will be used.
Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> now display any column lists.
Author: Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera, Rahila Syed
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Alvaro Herrera, Vignesh C, Ibrar Ahmed,
Amit Kapila, Hou zj, Peter Smith, Wang wei, Tang, Shi yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28vddB_NFdRVpuyRBJEBWjz4BSyTB=_ektNRH8NJ1jf95g@mail.gmail.com
Crash recovery on standby may encounter missing directories when
replaying create database WAL records. Prior to this patch, the standby
would fail to recover in such a case. However, the directories could be
legitimately missing. Consider a sequence of WAL records as follows:
CREATE DATABASE
DROP DATABASE
DROP TABLESPACE
If, after replaying the last WAL record and removing the tablespace
directory, the standby crashes and has to replay the create database
record again, the crash recovery must be able to move on.
This patch adds a mechanism similar to invalid-page tracking, to keep a
tally of missing directories during crash recovery. If all the missing
directory references are matched with corresponding drop records at the
end of crash recovery, the standby can safely continue following the
primary.
Backpatch to 13, at least for now. The bug is older, but fixing it in
older branches requires more careful study of the interactions with
commit e6d8069522, which appeared in 13.
A new TAP test file is added to verify the condition. However, because
it depends on commit d6d317dbf6, it can only be added to branch
master. I (Álvaro) manually verified that the code behaves as expected
in branch 14. It's a bit nervous-making to leave the code uncovered by
tests in older branches, but leaving the bug unfixed is even worse.
Also, the main reason this fix took so long is precisely that we
couldn't agree on a good strategy to approach testing for the bug, so
perhaps this is the best we can do.
Diagnosed-by: Paul Guo <paulguo@gmail.com>
Author: Paul Guo <paulguo@gmail.com>
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Author: Asim R Praveen <apraveen@pivotal.io>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEET0ZGx9AvioViLf7nbR_8tH9-=27DN5xWJ2P9-ROH16e4JUA@mail.gmail.com
Move DLSUFFIX from makefiles into header files for all platforms.
Move the DLSUFFIX assignment from src/makefiles/ to src/templates/,
have configure read it, and then substitute it into Makefile.global
and pg_config.h. This avoids the need for all makefile rules that
need it to locally set CPPFLAGS. It also resolves an inconsistent
setup between the two Windows build systems.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/2f9861fb-8969-9005-7518-b8e60f2bead9@enterprisedb.com
A TOAST table can normally have only one index, but there are corner
cases where it has more; for example, transiently during REINDEX
CONCURRENTLY. In such a case, the pg_statio_all_tables view produced
multiple rows for the owning table, one per TOAST index. Refactor the
view to avoid that, instead summing the stats across all the indexes,
as we do for regular table indexes.
While this has been wrong for a long time, back-patching seems unwise
due to the difficulty of putting a system view change into back
branches.
Andrei Zubkov, tweaked a bit by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/acefef4189706971fc475f912c1afdab1c48d627.camel@moonset.ru
If TRUNCATE causes some buffers to be invalidated and thus the
checkpoint does not flush them, TRUNCATE must also ensure that the
corresponding files are truncated on disk. Otherwise, a replay
from the checkpoint might find that the buffers exist but have
the wrong contents, which may cause replay to fail.
Report by Teja Mupparti. Patch by Kyotaro Horiguchi, per a design
suggestion from Heikki Linnakangas, with some changes to the
comments by me. Review of this and a prior patch that approached
the issue differently by Heikki Linnakangas, Andres Freund, Álvaro
Herrera, Masahiko Sawada, and Tom Lane.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/BYAPR06MB6373BF50B469CA393C614257ABF00@BYAPR06MB6373.namprd06.prod.outlook.com
This commit adds support for decoding of sequences to the built-in
replication (the infrastructure was added by commit 0da92dc530).
The syntax and behavior mostly mimics handling of tables, i.e. a
publication may be defined as FOR ALL SEQUENCES (replicating all
sequences in a database), FOR ALL SEQUENCES IN SCHEMA (replicating
all sequences in a particular schema) or individual sequences.
To publish sequence modifications, the publication has to include
'sequence' action. The protocol is extended with a new message,
describing sequence increments.
A new system view pg_publication_sequences lists all the sequences
added to a publication, both directly and indirectly. Various psql
commands (\d and \dRp) are improved to also display publications
including a given sequence, or sequences included in a publication.
Author: Tomas Vondra, Cary Huang
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Amit Kapila, Hannu Krosing, Andres
Freund, Petr Jelinek
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d045f3c2-6cfb-06d3-5540-e63c320df8bc@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1710ed7e13b.cd7177461430746.3372264562543607781@highgo.ca
They were macros previously, but recent callsite additions made Coverity
complain about one of the assertions being always true. This change
could have been made a long time ago, but the Coverity complain broke
the inertia.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202203241021.uts52sczx3al@alvherre.pgsql
Up to now, the planner estimated the size of a recursive query's
worktable as 10 times the size of the non-recursive term. It's hard
to see how to do significantly better than that automatically, but
we can give users control over the multiplier to allow tuning for
specific use-cases. The default behavior remains the same.
Simon Riggs
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-EuaLm4H3g0+BSTYHEGxJj3Kht0R+rJ8vT57Dejnh=_nA@mail.gmail.com
hba.c is growing big, and more contents are planned for it. In order to
prepare for this future work, this commit moves all the code related to
the system function processing the contents of pg_hba.conf,
pg_hba_file_rules() to a new file called hbafuncs.c, which will be used
as the location for the SQL portion of the authentication file parsing.
While on it, HbaToken, the structure holding a string token lexed from a
configuration file related to authentication, is renamed to a more
generic AuthToken, as it gets used not only for pg_hba.conf, but also
for pg_ident.conf. TokenizedLine is now named TokenizedAuthLine.
The size of hba.c is reduced by ~12%.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
There are more compression parameters that can be specified than just
an integer compression level, so rename the new COMPRESSION_LEVEL
option to COMPRESSION_DETAIL before it gets released. Introduce a
flexible syntax for that option to allow arbitrary options to be
specified without needing to adjust the main replication grammar,
and common code to parse it that is shared between the client and
the server.
This commit doesn't actually add any new compression parameters,
so the only user-visible change is that you can now type something
like pg_basebackup --compress gzip:level=5 instead of writing just
pg_basebackup --compress gzip:5. However, it should make it easy to
add new options. If for example gzip starts offering fries, we can
support pg_basebackup --compress gzip:level=5,fries=true for the
benefit of users who want fries with that.
Along the way, this fixes a few things in pg_basebackup so that the
pg_basebackup can be used with a server-side compression algorithm
that pg_basebackup itself does not understand. For example,
pg_basebackup --compress server-lz4 could still succeed even if
only the server and not the client has LZ4 support, provided that
the other options to pg_basebackup don't require the client to
decompress the archive.
Patch by me. Reviewed by Justin Pryzby and Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYvpetyRAbbg1M8b3-iHsaN4nsgmWPjOENu5-doHuJ7fA@mail.gmail.com
When serialization or deadlock errors are reported by backend, allow
to retry and continue the benchmarking. For this purpose new options
"--max-tries", "--failures-detailed" and "--verbose-errors" are added.
Transactions with serialization errors or deadlock errors will be
repeated after rollbacks until they complete successfully or reach the
maximum number of tries (specified by the --max-tries option), or the
maximum time of tries (specified by the --latency-limit option).
These options can be specified at the same time. It is not possible to
use an unlimited number of tries (--max-tries=0) without the
--latency-limit option or the --time option. By default the option
--max-tries is set to 1, which means transactions with
serialization/deadlock errors are not retried. If the last try fails,
this transaction will be reported as failed, and the client variables
will be set as they were before the first run of this transaction.
Statistics on retries and failures are printed in the progress,
transaction / aggregation logs and in the end with other results (all
and for each script). Also retries and failures are printed
per-command with average latency by using option
(--report-per-command, -r).
Option --failures-detailed prints group failures by basic types
(serialization failures / deadlock failures).
Option --verbose-errors prints distinct reports on errors and failures
(errors without retrying) by type with detailed information like which
limit for retries was violated and how far it was exceeded for the
serialization/deadlock failures.
Patch originally written by Marina Polyakova then Yugo Nagata
inherited the discussion and heavily modified the patch to make it
commitable.
Authors: Yugo Nagata, Marina Polyakova
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Tatsuo Ishii, Alvaro Herrera, Kevin Grittner, Andres Freund, Arthur Zakirov, Alexander Korotkov, Teodor Sigaev, Ildus Kurbangaliev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/72a0d590d6ba06f242d75c2e641820ec%40postgrespro.ru
This introduces some of the building blocks used by the SQL/JSON
constructor and query functions. Specifically, it provides node
executor and grammar support for the FORMAT JSON [ENCODING foo]
clause, and values decorated with it, and for the RETURNING clause.
The following SQL/JSON patches will leverage these.
Nikita Glukhov (who probably deserves an award for perseverance).
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup. Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu and
Himanshu Upadhyaya.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
A security invoker view checks permissions for accessing its
underlying base relations using the privileges of the user of the
view, rather than the privileges of the view owner. Additionally, if
any of the base relations are tables with RLS enabled, the policies of
the user of the view are applied, rather than those of the view owner.
This allows views to be defined without giving away additional
privileges on the underlying base relations, and matches a similar
feature available in other database systems.
It also allows views to operate more naturally with RLS, without
affecting the assignments of policies to users.
Christoph Heiss, with some additional hacking by me. Reviewed by
Laurenz Albe and Wolfgang Walther.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b66dd6d6-ad3e-c6f2-8b90-47be773da240%40cybertec.at
This feature allows skipping the transaction on subscriber nodes.
If incoming change violates any constraint, logical replication stops
until it's resolved. Currently, users need to either manually resolve the
conflict by updating a subscriber-side database or by using function
pg_replication_origin_advance() to skip the conflicting transaction. This
commit introduces a simpler way to skip the conflicting transactions.
The user can specify LSN by ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... SKIP (lsn = XXX),
which allows the apply worker to skip the transaction finished at
specified LSN. The apply worker skips all data modification changes within
the transaction.
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Takamichi Osumi, Hou Zhijie, Peter Eisentraut, Amit Kapila, Shi Yu, Vignesh C, Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Euler Taveira
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDeScrsHhLyEPYqN3sydg6PxAPVBboK=30xJfUVihNZDA@mail.gmail.com
Now that 13619598f1 has split pgstat up into multiple files it isn't quite as
hard to come up with a sensible order for pgstat.[ch]. Inconsistent naming
makes it still not quite right looking, but that's work for another commit.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
pgstat.c is very long, and it's hard to find an order that makes sense and is
likely to be maintained over time. Splitting the different pieces into
separate files makes that a lot easier.
With a few exceptions, this commit just moves code around. Those exceptions
are:
- adding file headers for new files
- removing 'static' from functions
- adapting pgstat_assert_is_up() to work across TUs
- minor comment adjustments
git diff --color-moved=dimmed-zebra is very helpful separating code movement
from code changes.
The next commit in this series will reorder pgstat.[ch] contents to be a bit
more coherent.
Earlier revisions of this patch had "global" statistics (archiver, bgwriter,
checkpointer, replication slots, SLRU, WAL) in one file, because each seemed
small enough. However later commits will increase their size and their
aggregate size is not insubstantial. It also just seems easier to split each
type of statistic into its own file.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
For GENERATED columns, we record all dependencies of the generation
expression as AUTO dependencies of the column itself. This means
that the generated column is silently dropped if any dependency
is removed, even if CASCADE wasn't specified. This is at least
a POLA violation, but I think it's actually based on a misreading
of the standard. The standard does say that you can't drop a
dependent GENERATED column in RESTRICT mode; but that's buried down
in a subparagraph, on a different page from some pseudocode that
makes it look like an AUTO drop is being suggested.
Change this to be more like the way that we handle regular default
expressions, ie record the dependencies as NORMAL dependencies of
the pg_attrdef entry. Also, make the pg_attrdef entry's dependency
on the column itself be INTERNAL not AUTO. That has two effects:
* the column will go away, not just lose its default, if any
dependency of the expression is dropped with CASCADE. So we
don't need any special mechanism to make that happen.
* it provides an additional cross-check preventing someone from
dropping the default expression without dropping the column.
catversion bump because of change in the contents of pg_depend
(which also requires a change in one information_schema view).
Per bug #17439 from Kevin Humphreys. Although this is a longstanding
bug, it seems impractical to back-patch because of the need for
catalog contents changes.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17439-7df4421197e928f0@postgresql.org
This is a pure refactoring commit: there isn't (I hope) any functional
change.
StoreAttrDefault and RemoveAttrDefault[ById] are moved from heap.c,
reducing the size of that overly-large file by about 300 lines.
I took the opportunity to trim unused #includes from heap.c, too.
Two new functions for translating between a pg_attrdef OID and the
relid/attnum of the owning column are created by extracting ad-hoc
code from objectaddress.c. This already removes one copy of said
code, and a follow-on bug fix will create more callers.
The only other function directly manipulating pg_attrdef is
AttrDefaultFetch. I judged it was better to leave that in relcache.c,
since it shares special concerns about recursion and error handling
with the rest of that module.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/651168.1647451676@sss.pgh.pa.us
The old name was overly generic. An upcoming commit moves relation stats
handling into its own file, making pgstat_initstats() look even more out of
place.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
A later commit will make the check more complicated than the
current (rel)->pgstat_info != NULL. It also just seems nicer to have a central
copy of the logic, even while still simple.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
When an update on a partitioned table referenced in foreign key
constraints causes a row to move from one partition to another,
the fact that the move is implemented as a delete followed by an insert
on the target partition causes the foreign key triggers to have
surprising behavior. For example, a given foreign key's delete trigger
which implements the ON DELETE CASCADE clause of that key will delete
any referencing rows when triggered for that internal DELETE, although
it should not, because the referenced row is simply being moved from one
partition of the referenced root partitioned table into another, not
being deleted from it.
This commit teaches trigger.c to skip queuing such delete trigger events
on the leaf partitions in favor of an UPDATE event fired on the root
target relation. Doing so is sensible because both the old and the new
tuple "logically" belong to the root relation.
The after trigger event queuing interface now allows passing the source
and the target partitions of a particular cross-partition update when
registering the update event for the root partitioned table. Along with
the two ctids of the old and the new tuple, the after trigger event now
also stores the OIDs of those partitions. The tuples fetched from the
source and the target partitions are converted into the root table
format, if necessary, before they are passed to the trigger function.
The implementation currently has a limitation that only the foreign keys
pointing into the query's target relation are considered, not those of
its sub-partitioned partitions. That seems like a reasonable
limitation, because it sounds rare to have distinct foreign keys
pointing to sub-partitioned partitions instead of to the root table.
This misbehavior stems from commit f56f8f8da6 (which added support for
foreign keys to reference partitioned tables) not paying sufficient
attention to commit 2f17844104 (which had introduced cross-partition
updates a year earlier). Even though the former commit goes back to
Postgres 12, we're not backpatching this fix at this time for fear of
destabilizing things too much, and because there are a few ABI breaks in
it that we'd have to work around in older branches. It also depends on
commit f4566345cf, which had its own share of backpatchability issues
as well.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reported-by: Eduard Català <eduard.catala@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFvkBCmfwkQX_yBqv2Wz8ugUGiBDxum8=WvVbfU1TXaNg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAL54xNZsLwEM1XCk5yW9EqaRzsZYHuWsHQkA2L5MOSKXAwviCQ@mail.gmail.com
createdb() didn't check for collation attributes validity, which has
to be done explicitly on ICU < 54. It also forgot to close the ICU collator
opened during the check which leaks some memory.
To fix both, add a new check_icu_locale() that does all the appropriate
verification and close the ICU collator.
initdb also had some partial check for ICU < 54. To have consistent error
reporting across major ICU versions, and get rid of the need to include ucol.h,
remove the partial check there. The backend will report an error if needed
during the post-boostrap iniitialization phase.
Author: Julien Rouhaud <julien.rouhaud@free.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20220319041459.qqqiqh335sga5ezj@jrouhaud
Teach xlogreader.c to decode the WAL into a circular buffer. This will
support optimizations based on looking ahead, to follow in a later
commit.
* XLogReadRecord() works as before, decoding records one by one, and
allowing them to be examined via the traditional XLogRecGetXXX()
macros and certain traditional members like xlogreader->ReadRecPtr.
* An alternative new interface XLogReadAhead()/XLogNextRecord() is
added that returns pointers to DecodedXLogRecord objects so that it's
now possible to look ahead in the WAL stream while replaying.
* In order to be able to use the new interface effectively while
streaming data, support is added for the page_read() callback to
respond to a new nonblocking mode with XLREAD_WOULDBLOCK instead of
waiting for more data to arrive.
No direct user of the new interface is included in this commit, though
XLogReadRecord() uses it internally. Existing code doesn't need to
change, except in a few places where it was accessing reader internals
directly and now needs to go through accessor macros.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier versions)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq=AovOddfHpA@mail.gmail.com
If a RowExpr is marked as returning a named composite type, we aren't
going to consult its colnames list; we'll use the attribute names
shown for the type in pg_attribute. Hence, skip storing that list,
to save a few nanoseconds when copying the expression tree around.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2950001.1638729947@sss.pgh.pa.us
This adds the option to use ICU as the default locale provider for
either the whole cluster or a database. New options for initdb,
createdb, and CREATE DATABASE are used to select this.
Since some (legacy) code still uses the libc locale facilities
directly, we still need to set the libc global locale settings even if
ICU is otherwise selected. So pg_database now has three
locale-related fields: the existing datcollate and datctype, which are
always set, and a new daticulocale, which is only set if ICU is
selected. A similar change is made in pg_collation for consistency,
but in that case, only the libc-related fields or the ICU-related
field is set, never both.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5e756dd6-0e91-d778-96fd-b1bcb06c161a%402ndquadrant.com
Commit 83fd4532a7 allowed publishing of changes via ancestors, for
publications defined with publish_via_partition_root. But the way
the ancestor was determined in get_rel_sync_entry() was incorrect,
simply updating the same variable. So with multiple publications,
replicating different ancestors, the outcome depended on the order
of publications in the list - the value from the last loop was used,
even if it wasn't the top-most ancestor.
This is a probably rare situation, as in most cases publications do
not overlap, so each partition has exactly one candidate ancestor
to replicate as and there's no ambiguity.
Fixed by tracking the "ancestor level" for each publication, and
picking the top-most ancestor. Adds a test case, verifying the
correct ancestor is used for publishing the changes and that this
does not depend on order of publications in the list.
Older releases have another bug in this loop - once all actions are
replicated, the loop is terminated, on the assumption that inspecting
additional publications is unecessary. But that misses the fact that
those additional applications may replicate different ancestors.
Fixed by removal of this break condition. We might still terminate the
loop in some cases (e.g. when replicating all actions and the ancestor
is the partition root).
Backpatch to 13, where publish_via_partition_root was introduced.
Initial report and fix by me, test added by Hou zj. Reviews and
improvements by Amit Kapila.
Author: Tomas Vondra, Hou zj, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Hou zj
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d26d24dd-2fab-3c48-0162-2b7f84a9c893%40enterprisedb.com
If we run out of space in the checkpointer sync request queue (which is
hopefully rare on real systems, but common with very small buffer pool),
we wait for it to drain. While waiting, we should report that as a wait
event so that users know what is going on, and also handle postmaster
death, since otherwise the loop might never terminate if the
checkpointer has exited.
Back-patch to 12. Although the problem exists in earlier releases too,
the code is structured differently before 12 so I haven't gone any
further for now, in the absence of field complaints.
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220226213942.nb7uvb2pamyu26dj%40alap3.anarazel.de
The checkpointer shouldn't ignore its latch. Other backends may be
waiting for it to drain the request queue. Hopefully real systems don't
have a full queue often, but the condition is reached easily when
shared_buffers is small.
This involves defining a new wait event, which will appear in the
pg_stat_activity view often due to spread checkpoints.
Back-patch only to 14. Even though the problem exists in earlier
branches too, it's hard to hit there. In 14 we stopped using signal
handlers for latches on Linux, *BSD and macOS, which were previously
hiding this problem by interrupting the sleep (though not reliably, as
the signal could arrive before the sleep begins; precisely the problem
latches address).
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220226213942.nb7uvb2pamyu26dj%40alap3.anarazel.de
Commit 3500ccc39b allowed for base backup
targets, meaning that we could do something with the backup other than
send it to the client, but all of those targets had to be baked in to
the core code. This commit makes it possible for extensions to define
additional backup targets.
Patch by me, reviewed by Abhijit Menon-Sen.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaqvdT-u3nt+_kkZ7bgDAyqDB0i-+XOMmr5JN2Rd37hxw@mail.gmail.com
Logical replication apply workers for a subscription can easily get stuck
in an infinite loop of attempting to apply a change, triggering an error
(such as a constraint violation), exiting with the error written to the
subscription server log, and restarting.
To partially remedy the situation, this patch adds a new subscription
option named 'disable_on_error'. To be consistent with old behavior, this
option defaults to false. When true, both the tablesync worker and apply
worker catch any errors thrown and disable the subscription in order to
break the loop. The error is still also written in the logs.
Once the subscription is disabled, users can either manually resolve the
conflict/error or skip the conflicting transaction by using
pg_replication_origin_advance() function. After resolving the conflict,
users need to enable the subscription to allow apply process to proceed.
Author: Osumi Takamichi and Mark Dilger
Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Vignesh C, Amit Kapila, Wang wei, Tang Haiying, Peter Smith, Masahiko Sawada, Shi Yu
Discussion : https://postgr.es/m/DB35438F-9356-4841-89A0-412709EBD3AB%40enterprisedb.com
wal_compression gains a new value, "zstd", to allow the compression of
full-page images using the compression method of the same name.
Compression is done using the default level recommended by the library,
as of ZSTD_CLEVEL_DEFAULT = 3. Some benchmarking has shown that it
could make sense to use a level lower for the FPI compression, like 1 or
2, as the compression rate did not change much with a bit less CPU
consumed, but any tests done would only cover few scenarios so it is
hard to come to a clear conclusion. Anyway, there is no reason to not
use the default level instead, which is the level recommended by the
library so it should be fine for most cases.
zstd outclasses easily pglz, and is better than LZ4 where one wants to
have more compression at the cost of extra CPU but both are good enough
in their own scenarios, so the choice between one or the other of these
comes to a study of the workload patterns and the schema involved,
mainly.
This commit relies heavily on 4035cd5, that reshaped the code creating
and restoring full-page writes to be aware of the compression type,
making this integration straight-forward.
This patch borrows some early work from Andrey Borodin, though the patch
got a complete rewrite.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220222231948.GJ9008@telsasoft.com
Add ability to scan all entries sequentially to dshash. The interface is
similar but a bit different both from that of dynahash and simple dshash
search functions. The most significant differences is that dshash's interfac
always needs a call to dshash_seq_term when scan ends. Another is
locking. Dshash holds partition lock when returning an entry,
dshash_seq_next() also holds lock when returning an entry but callers
shouldn't release it, since the lock is essential to continue a scan. The
seqscan interface allows entry deletion while a scan is in progress using
dshash_delete_current().
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyoga.ntt@gmail.com>
Both client-side compression and server-side compression are now
supported for zstd. In addition, a backup compressed by the server
using zstd can now be decompressed by the client in order to
accommodate the use of -Fp.
Jeevan Ladhe, with some edits by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobyzfbz=gyze2_LL1ZumZunmaEKbHQxjrFkOR7APZGu-g@mail.gmail.com
This new function extracts common code from PrepareQuery() and
exec_parse_message(). It is then exactly analogous to the existing
pg_analyze_and_rewrite_fixedparams() and
pg_analyze_and_rewrite_withcb().
To unify these two code paths, this makes PrepareQuery() now subject
to log_parser_stats. Also, both paths now invoke
TRACE_POSTGRESQL_QUERY_REWRITE_START(). PrepareQuery() no longer
checks whether a utility statement was specified. The grammar doesn't
allow that anyway, and exec_parse_message() supports it, so
restricting it doesn't seem necessary.
This also adds QueryEnvironment support to the *varparams functions,
for consistency with its cousins, even though it is not used right
now.
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <bossartn@amazon.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/c67ce276-52b4-0239-dc0e-39875bf81840@enterprisedb.com
Set-returning functions that use the Materialize mode, creating a
tuplestore to include all the tuples returned in a set rather than doing
so in multiple calls, use roughly the same set of steps to prepare
ReturnSetInfo for this job:
- Check if ReturnSetInfo supports returning a tuplestore and if the
materialize mode is enabled.
- Create a tuplestore for all the tuples part of the returned set in the
per-query memory context, stored in ReturnSetInfo->setResult.
- Build a tuple descriptor mostly from get_call_result_type(), then
stored in ReturnSetInfo->setDesc. Note that there are some cases where
the SRF's tuple descriptor has to be the one specified by the function
caller.
This refactoring is done so as there are (well, should be) no behavior
changes in any of the in-core functions refactored, and the centralized
function that checks and sets up the function's ReturnSetInfo can be
controlled with a set of bits32 options. Two of them prove to be
necessary now:
- SRF_SINGLE_USE_EXPECTED to use expectedDesc as tuple descriptor, as
expected by the function's caller.
- SRF_SINGLE_BLESS to validate the tuple descriptor for the SRF.
The same initialization pattern is simplified in 28 places per my
count as of src/backend/, shaving up to ~900 lines of code. These
mostly come from the removal of the per-query initializations and the
sanity checks now grouped in a single location. There are more
locations that could be simplified in contrib/, that are left for a
follow-up cleanup.
fcc2817, 07daca5 and d61a361 have prepared the areas of the code related
to this change, to ease this refactoring.
Author: Melanie Plageman, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_azyd1Z3W_r7Ou4sorTjRCs+PxeHw1CWJeXKofkE6TuZg@mail.gmail.com
There are three parallel ways to call parse/analyze: with fixed
parameters, with variable parameters, and by supplying your own parser
callback. Some of the involved functions were confusingly named and
made this API structure more confusing. This patch renames some
functions to make this clearer:
parse_analyze() -> parse_analyze_fixedparams()
pg_analyze_and_rewrite() -> pg_analyze_and_rewrite_fixedparams()
(Otherwise one might think this variant doesn't accept parameters, but
in fact all three ways accept parameters.)
pg_analyze_and_rewrite_params() -> pg_analyze_and_rewrite_withcb()
(Before, and also when considering pg_analyze_and_rewrite(), one might
think this is the only way to pass parameters. Moreover, the parser
callback doesn't necessarily need to parse only parameters, it's just
one of the things it could do.)
parse_fixed_parameters() -> setup_parse_fixed_parameters()
parse_variable_parameters() -> setup_parse_variable_parameters()
(These functions don't actually do any parsing, they just set up
callbacks to use during parsing later.)
This patch also adds some const decorations to the fixed-parameters
API, so the distinction from the variable-parameters API is more
clear.
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <bossartn@amazon.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/c67ce276-52b4-0239-dc0e-39875bf81840@enterprisedb.com
There's no visible point in casting the result of a comparison to
bool, because it already is that, at least on C99 compilers.
I see no point in these assertions that a pointer we're about to
dereference isn't null, either. If it is, the resulting SIGSEGV
will notify us of the problem just fine.
Noted while reviewing Zhihong Yu's patch. This is basically
cosmetic, so no need for back-patch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALNJ-vT9r0DSsAOw9OXVJFxLENoVS_68kJ5x0p44atoYH+H4dg@mail.gmail.com
This macro cast the result to BlockNumber after shifting, not before,
which is the wrong thing. Per the C spec, the uint16 fields would
promote to int not unsigned int, so that (for 32-bit int) the shift
potentially shifts a nonzero bit into the sign position. I doubt
there are any production systems where this would actually end with
the wrong answer, but it is undefined behavior per the C spec, and
clang's -fsanitize=undefined option reputedly warns about it on some
platforms. (I can't reproduce that right now, but the code is
undeniably wrong per spec.) It's easy to fix by casting to
BlockNumber (uint32) in the proper places.
It's been wrong for ages, so back-patch to all supported branches.
Report and patch by Zhihong Yu (cosmetic tweaking by me)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALNJ-vT9r0DSsAOw9OXVJFxLENoVS_68kJ5x0p44atoYH+H4dg@mail.gmail.com
This function has been incorrectly marked as a set-returning function
with prorows (estimated number of rows) set to 1 since its creation in
7117685, that introduced non-exclusive backups. There is no need for
that as the function is designed to return only one tuple.
This commit fixes the catalog definition of pg_stop_backup_v2() so as it
is not marked as proretset anymore, with prorows set to 0. This
simplifies its internals by removing one tuplestore (used for one single
record anyway) and by removing all the checks related to a set-returning
function.
Issue found during my quest to simplify some of the logic used in
in-core system functions.
Bump catalog version.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yh8guT78f1Ercfzw@paquier.xyz
It was decided (refer to the Discussion link below) that the stats
collector is not an appropriate place to store the error information of
subscription workers.
This patch changes the pg_stat_subscription_workers view (introduced by
commit 8d74fc96db) so that it stores only statistics counters:
apply_error_count and sync_error_count, and has one entry for
each subscription. The removed error information such as error-XID and
the error message would be stored in another way in the future which is
more reliable and persistent.
After removing these error details, there is no longer any relation
information, so the subscription statistics are now a cluster-wide
statistics.
The patch also changes the view name to pg_stat_subscription_stats since
the word "worker" is an implementation detail that we use one worker for
one tablesync and one apply.
Author: Masahiko Sawada, based on suggestions by Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Haiying Tang, Takamichi Osumi, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220125063131.4cmvsxbz2tdg6g65@alap3.anarazel.de
This is pretty queasy-making on general principles, and the more so
once you notice that CommitTransactionCommand() is actually stomping
on the values saved by _SPI_commit(). It's okay as long as the
active values didn't change during HoldPinnedPortals(); but that's
a larger assumption than I think we want to make, especially since
the fix is so simple.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1533956.1645731245@sss.pgh.pa.us
SPI_commit previously left it up to the caller to recover from any error
occurring during commit. Since that's complicated and requires use of
low-level xact.c facilities, it's not too surprising that no caller got
it right. Let's move the responsibility for cleanup into spi.c. Doing
that requires redefining SPI_commit as starting a new transaction, so
that it becomes equivalent to SPI_commit_and_chain except that you get
default transaction characteristics instead of preserving the prior
transaction's characteristics. We can make this pretty transparent
API-wise by redefining SPI_start_transaction() as a no-op. Callers
that expect to do something in between might be surprised, but
available evidence is that no callers do so.
Having made that API redefinition, we can fix this mess by having
SPI_commit[_and_chain] trap errors and start a new, clean transaction
before re-throwing the error. Likewise for SPI_rollback[_and_chain].
Some cleanup is also needed in AtEOXact_SPI, which was nowhere near
smart enough to deal with SPI contexts nested inside a committing
context.
While plperl and pltcl need no changes beyond removing their now-useless
SPI_start_transaction() calls, plpython needs some more work because it
hadn't gotten the memo about catching commit/rollback errors in the
first place. Such an error resulted in longjmp'ing out of the Python
interpreter, which leaks Python stack entries at present and is reported
to crash Python 3.11 altogether. Add the missing logic to catch such
errors and convert them into Python exceptions.
We are probably going to have to back-patch this once Python 3.11 ships,
but it's a sufficiently basic change that I'm a bit nervous about doing
so immediately. Let's let it bake awhile in HEAD first.
Peter Eisentraut and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3375ffd8-d71c-2565-e348-a597d6e739e3@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17416-ed8fe5d7213d6c25@postgresql.org
See also afdeff1052. Failures after that commit provided a few more hints,
but not yet enough to understand what's going on.
In 019_replslot_limit.pl shut down nodes with fast instead of immediate mode
if we observe the failure mode. That should tell us whether the failures we're
observing are just a timing issue under high load. PGCTLTIMEOUT should prevent
buildfarm animals from hanging endlessly.
Also adds a bit more logging to replication slot drop and ShutdownPostgres().
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220225192941.hqnvefgdzaro6gzg@alap3.anarazel.de
The buffer argument hasn't been used since the function was first added
by commit bbb6e559c4. The sibling heap_prepare_freeze_tuple function
doesn't have such an argument either. Remove it.
This feature adds row filtering for publication tables. When a publication
is defined or modified, an optional WHERE clause can be specified. Rows
that don't satisfy this WHERE clause will be filtered out. This allows a
set of tables to be partially replicated. The row filter is per table. A
new row filter can be added simply by specifying a WHERE clause after the
table name. The WHERE clause must be enclosed by parentheses.
The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that
publishes UPDATE and/or DELETE operations must contain only columns that
are covered by REPLICA IDENTITY. The row filter WHERE clause for a table
added to a publication that publishes INSERT can use any column. If the
row filter evaluates to NULL, it is regarded as "false". The WHERE clause
only allows simple expressions that don't have user-defined functions,
user-defined operators, user-defined types, user-defined collations,
non-immutable built-in functions, or references to system columns. These
restrictions could be addressed in the future.
If you choose to do the initial table synchronization, only data that
satisfies the row filters is copied to the subscriber. If the subscription
has several publications in which a table has been published with
different WHERE clauses, rows that satisfy ANY of the expressions will be
copied. If a subscriber is a pre-15 version, the initial table
synchronization won't use row filters even if they are defined in the
publisher.
The row filters are applied before publishing the changes. If the
subscription has several publications in which the same table has been
published with different filters (for the same publish operation), those
expressions get OR'ed together so that rows satisfying any of the
expressions will be replicated.
This means all the other filters become redundant if (a) one of the
publications have no filter at all, (b) one of the publications was
created using FOR ALL TABLES, (c) one of the publications was created
using FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA and the table belongs to that same schema.
If your publication contains a partitioned table, the publication
parameter publish_via_partition_root determines if it uses the partition's
row filter (if the parameter is false, the default) or the root
partitioned table's row filter.
Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> will display any row filters.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira, Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian
Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Amit Kapila, Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Wei Wang
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAHE3wggb715X%2BmK_DitLXF25B%3DjE6xyNCH4YOwM860JR7HarGQ%40mail.gmail.com
"regress" is a new mode added to compute_query_id aimed at facilitating
regression testing when a module computing query IDs is loaded into the
backend, like pg_stat_statements. It works the same way as "auto",
meaning that query IDs are computed if a module enables it, except that
query IDs are hidden in EXPLAIN outputs to ensure regression output
stability.
Like any GUCs of the kind (force_parallel_mode, etc.), this new
configuration can be added to an instance's postgresql.conf, or just
passed down with PGOPTIONS at command level. compute_query_id uses an
enum for its set of option values, meaning that this addition ensures
ABI compatibility.
Using this new configuration mode allows installcheck-world to pass when
running the tests on an instance with pg_stat_statements enabled,
stabilizing the test output while checking the paths doing query ID
computations.
Reported-by: Anton Melnikov
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1634283396.372373993@f75.i.mail.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YgHlxgc/OimuPYhH@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 14
Commit 75d22069e tried to throw a warning for setting a custom GUC whose
prefix belongs to a previously-loaded extension, if there is no such GUC
defined by the extension. But that caused unstable behavior with
parallel workers, because workers don't necessarily load extensions and
GUCs in the same order their leader did. To make that work safely, we
have to completely disallow the case. We now actually remove any such
GUCs at the time of initial extension load, and then throw an error not
just a warning if you try to add one later. While this might create a
compatibility issue for a few people, the improvement in error-detection
capability seems worth it; it's hard to believe that there's any good
use-case for choosing such GUC names.
This also un-reverts 5609cc01c (Rename EmitWarningsOnPlaceholders() to
MarkGUCPrefixReserved()), since that function's old name is now even
more of a misnomer.
Florin Irion and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1902182.1640711215@sss.pgh.pa.us
